ETC ID703000

User’s Manual
ID850 Ver. 2.50
Integrated Debugger
Operation
Target Device
V850 Series™
Document No. U16217EJ1V0UM00 (1st edition)
Date Published October 2002 CP(K)
© NEC Corporation 2002
Printed in Japan
[MEMO]
2
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
V850 Series, V852, V853, V850/SA1, V850/SB1, V850/SB2, V850/SC1, V850/SC2, V850/SC3, V850/SF1,
V850/SV1, V850E/MS1, V850E/MS2, V850E/MA1, V850E/MA2, V850E/IA1, and V850E/IA2 are trademarks of
NEC Corporation.
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
Windows and WindowsNT are either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
3
The export of these products from Japan is regulated by the Japanese government. The export of some or all of these
products may be prohibited without governmental license. To export or re-export some or all of these products from a
country other than Japan may also be prohibited without a license from that country. Please call an NEC sales
representative.
• The information in this document is current as of October, 2002. The information is subject to
change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC's data sheets or
data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC semiconductor products. Not all
products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC sales representative
for availability and additional information.
• No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of NEC. NEC assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
• NEC does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of
third parties by or arising from the use of NEC semiconductor products listed in this document or any other
liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any
patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC or others.
• Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative
purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these
circuits, software and information in the design of customer's equipment shall be done under the full
responsibility of customer. NEC assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third
parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information.
• While NEC endeavours to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC semiconductor products, customers
agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize
risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC
semiconductor products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as
redundancy, fire-containment, and anti-failure features.
• NEC semiconductor products are classified into the following three quality grades:
"Standard", "Special" and "Specific". The "Specific" quality grade applies only to semiconductor products
developed based on a customer-designated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The
recommended applications of a semiconductor product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below.
Customers must check the quality grade of each semiconductor product before using it in a particular
application.
"Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio
and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment
and industrial robots
"Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster
systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed
for life support)
"Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life
support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc.
The quality grade of NEC semiconductor products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC's
data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC semiconductor products in applications not
intended by NEC, they must contact an NEC sales representative in advance to determine NEC's willingness
to support a given application.
(Note)
(1) "NEC" as used in this statement means NEC Corporation and also includes its majority-owned subsidiaries.
(2) "NEC semiconductor products" means any semiconductor product developed or manufactured by or for
NEC (as defined above).
M8E 00. 4
4
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
Regional Information
Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC
product in your application, pIease contact the NEC office in your country to obtain a list of authorized
representatives and distributors. They will verify:
•
Device availability
•
Ordering information
•
Product release schedule
•
Availability of related technical literature
•
Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and
components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth)
•
Network requirements
In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary
from country to country.
NEC Electronics Inc. (U.S.)
Santa Clara, California
Tel: 408-588-6000
800-366-9782
Fax: 408-588-6130
800-729-9288
NEC do Brasil S.A.
Electron Devices Division
Guarulhos-SP, Brasil
Tel: 11-6462-6810
Fax: 11-6462-6829
• Filiale Italiana
Milano, Italy
Tel: 02-66 75 41
Fax: 02-66 75 42 99
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
• Branch The Netherlands
Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Tel: 040-244 58 45
Fax: 040-244 45 80
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
• Branch Sweden
Taeby, Sweden
Tel: 08-63 80 820
NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH Fax: 08-63 80 388
Duesseldorf, Germany
• United Kingdom Branch
Tel: 0211-65 03 01
Milton Keynes, UK
Fax: 0211-65 03 327
Tel: 01908-691-133
Fax: 01908-670-290
• Sucursal en España
Madrid, Spain
Tel: 091-504 27 87
Fax: 091-504 28 60
Hong Kong
Tel: 2886-9318
Fax: 2886-9022/9044
Seoul Branch
Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-528-0303
Fax: 02-528-4411
NEC Electronics Shanghai, Ltd.
Shanghai, P.R. China
Tel: 021-6841-1138
Fax: 021-6841-1137
NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.
Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: 02-2719-2377
Fax: 02-2719-5951
NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Novena Square, Singapore
Tel: 253-8311
Fax: 250-3583
• Succursale Française
Vélizy-Villacoublay, France
Tel: 01-30-67 58 00
Fax: 01-30-67 58 99
J02.4
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
5
[MEMO]
6
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
PREFACE
Target Readers
This manual is intended for user engineers who design and develop application systems
of the V850 Series.
Purpose
This manual is intended for users to understand the functions of the ID850 in the
organization below.
Organization
This manual consists of the following chapters:
• OVERVIEW
• INSTALLATION
• STARTING AND TERMINATING
• ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus
• FUNCTIONS OF ID850
• OPERATION
• WINDOW REFERENCE
• COMMAND REFERENCE
How to Use This Manual
It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical
engineering, logic circuits, microcontrollers, C language, and assemblers.
To understand the functions of the V850 Series
→ Refer to Hardware User's Manual for each product..
To understand the instruction functions of the V850 Series
→ Refer to V850 Series Architecture User’s Manual or V850E/MS1
TM
Architecture
User’s Manual.
Conventions
Data significance:
Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right
Note:
Footnote for item marked with Note in the text
Caution:
Information requiring particular attention
Remark:
Supplementary information
Numerical representation:
Binary … XXXX or XXXXB
Decimal ... XXXX
Hexadecimal … 0xXXXX
Prefix indicating the power of 2 (address space, memory capacity):
2
10
= 1024
M (Mega): 2
20
= 1024
K (Kilo):
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
2
7
Related Documents
Refer to the documents listed below when using this manual.
The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions.
However, preliminary versions are not marked as such.
Documents related to development tools (User's Manuals)
Document Name
TM
Document No.
TM
TM
TM
TM
IE-703002-MC (In-circuit emulator for V853 , V850/SA1 , V850/SB1 , V850/SB2 , V850/SC1 ,
V850/SC2TM, V850/SC3TM, V850/SF1TM, V850/SV1TM)
U11595E
IE-V850E-MC (In-circuit emulator for V850E/IA1TM, V850E/IA2TM),
IE-V850E-MC-A (In-circuit emulator for V850E/MA1TM, V850E/MA2TM)
U14487E
IE-703003-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V853)
U11596E
IE-703017-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850/SA1)
U12898E
IE-703037-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850/SB1, V850/SB2)
U14151E
IE-703040-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850/SV1)
U14337E
IE-703079-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850/SF1)
U15447E
TM
IE-703102-MC (In-circuit emulator for V850E/MS1, V850E/MS2 )
U13875E
IE-703102-MC-EM1, IE-703102-MC-EM1-A (In-circuit emulator option board for V850E/MS1, V850E/MS2)
U13876E
IE-703107-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850E/MA1)
U14481E
IE-703116-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850E/IA1)
U14700E
CA850 Ver. 2.50 C Compiler Package
Operation
U16053E
C Language
U16054E
PM plus
U16055E
Assembly Language
U16042E
ID850 Ver. 2.50 Integrated Debugger
Operation
This manual
SM850 Ver. 2.50 System Simulator
Operation
U16218E
SM850 Ver. 2.00 or Later System Simulator
External Part User Open Interface
Specifications
U14873E
RX850 Ver. 3.13 or Later Real-Time OS
Basics
U13430E
Installation
U13410E
Technical
U13431E
Fundamental
U13773E
Installation
U13774E
Technical
U13772E
RX850 Pro Ver. 3.13 Real-Time OS
8
RD850 Ver. 3.01 Task Debugger
U13737E
RD850 Pro Ver. 3.01 Task Debugger
U13916E
AZ850 Ver. 3.10 System Performance Analyzer
U14410E
PG-FP3 Flash Memory Programmer
U13502E
PG-FP4 Flash Memory Programmer
U15260E
TW Ver. 1.00 Performance Analysis Tuning Tool
U16104E
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW … 17
1. 1
Overview … 17
1. 2
Features … 17
1. 3
System Configuration … 18
1. 3. 1 Example of system configuration … 18
1. 4
Operating Environment … 18
1. 4. 1 Hardware environment … 18
1. 4. 2 Software environment … 19
1. 5
Notes on Source-Level Debugging … 19
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION … 20
2. 1
Installing ID850 … 20
2. 1. 1 Installing procedure … 20
2. 2
Uninstalling ID850 … 25
2. 2. 1 Uninstalling procedure … 25
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING … 27
3. 1
Starting … 27
3. 2
Terminating … 28
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus … 30
4. 1
Setting Build Mode … 30
4. 2
Registering Debugger to PM plus Project … 30
4. 2. 1 Selecting debugger … 30
4. 2. 2 Downloading multiple load module files … 31
4. 3
To Start ID850 from PM plus … 32
4. 3. 1 Restoring debugging environment … 32
4. 4
Auto Load … 32
4. 4. 1 Auto load by correcting source code … 33
4. 4. 2 Auto load by starting debugger … 33
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850 … 34
5. 1
Mapping function … 34
5. 2
Setting Debugging Environment … 35
5. 3
Program Execution Function … 35
5. 3. 1 Real-time execution function … 36
5. 3. 2 Non-real-time execution function … 36
5. 4
Event function … 37
5. 4. 1 Using event function … 37
5. 4. 2 Event condition … 38
5. 4. 3 Event link condition … 38
5. 4. 4 Setting of various event conditions … 39
5. 5
5. 6
Break function … 39
Trace function … 40
5. 6. 1 Operation of trace … 41
5. 6. 2 Trace condition setting function … 41
5. 7
Coverage Measurement Function … 42
5. 8
Snapshot Function … 43
5. 9
Stub Function … 43
5. 10 Register Manipulation Function … 44
5. 11 Memory Manipulation Function … 44
5. 12 Watch Function … 44
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
9
5. 13 Time Measurement Function … 44
5. 14 Load/Save Function … 45
5. 14. 1 View files … 45
5. 14. 2 Information files … 46
5. 14. 3 Setting files … 46
5. 15 Real-Time RAM Sampling Function … 46
CHAPTER 6 OPERATION … 48
6. 1
Flow of Debugging Operations … 48
6. 2
Active Status and Static Status … 50
6. 3
Jump Function … 51
6. 4
Trace Result with Linking Window … 52
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE … 53
10
7. 1
Window List … 53
7. 2
Explanation of Windows … 55
Window/dialog name … 56
Main window … 57
Configuration dialog box … 78
Extended Option dialog box … 90
Debugger Option dialog box … 95
Font dialog box … 103
Project File Save dialog box … 105
Project File Load dialog box … 108
View File Save dialog box … 110
View File Load dialog box … 114
Download dialog box … 117
Upload dialog box … 121
Load Module List dialog box … 124
Browse dialog box … 126
Address Move dialog box … 128
Source Text Move dialog box … 130
Trace Move dialog box … 133
Symbol To Address dialog box … 136
Source window … 139
Source Search dialog box … 153
Assemble window … 156
Assemble Search dialog box … 162
Memory window … 165
Memory Search dialog box … 170
Memory Fill dialog box … 173
Memory Copy dialog box … 175
Memory Compare dialog box … 177
Memory Compare Result dialog box … 179
DMM dialog box … 181
Watch window … 183
Quick Watch dialog box … 190
Add Watch dialog box … 194
Change Watch dialog box … 198
Local Variable window … 201
Stack Trace window … 204
Register window … 208
Register Select dialog box … 211
IOR window … 213
IOR Select dialog box … 218
Add I/O Port dialog box … 221
Trace window … 224
Trace Search dialog box … 233
Trace Data Select dialog box … 241
Coverage window … 244
Coverage Search dialog box … 249
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
Coverage-Clear dialog box … 252
Coverage-Address dialog box … 254
Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box … 256
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box … 259
Event Manager … 261
Software Break Manager … 270
Event dialog box … 273
Event Link dialog box … 282
Break dialog box … 288
Trace dialog box … 293
Snap Shot dialog box … 299
Stub dialog box … 306
Timer dialog box … 310
Timer Result dialog box … 316
Delay Count dialog box … 318
Reset Debugger dialog box … 320
About dialog box … 322
Exit Debugger dialog box … 324
Console window … 326
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE … 327
8. 1
Command Line Rules … 327
8. 2
Command List … 327
8. 3
List of Variables … 330
8. 4
List of Packages … 330
8. 5
Key Bind … 330
8. 6
Expansion window … 330
8. 7
Callback Procedure … 330
8. 8
Hook Procedure … 331
8. 9
Related Files … 333
8. 10 Cautions … 333
8. 11 Commands … 334
Command name … 334
address … 335
assemble … 336
batch … 337
breakpoint … 338
cache … 340
dbgexit … 342
download … 343
extwin … 344
finish … 345
go … 346
help … 347
hook … 348
ie … 349
jump … 350
map … 351
mdi … 353
memory … 354
module … 356
next … 357
refresh … 358
register … 359
reset … 360
run … 361
step … 362
stop … 363
upload … 364
version … 365
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
11
watch … 366
where … 367
wish … 368
xcoverage … 369
xtime … 370
xtrace … 371
APPENDIX A INPUT CONVENTIONS … 373
A. 1 Character set … 373
A. 2 Symbols … 374
A. 3 Numeric Values … 375
A. 4 Expressions and Operators … 375
APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY … 378
B. 1 Terminology … 378
APPENDIX C MESSAGES … 380
C.1
Error/Warning Messages from … 380
C.1.1 Display format of … 380
C.1.2 Fatal error messages … 380
C.1.3 Syntax error messages … 386
C.1.4 Warning message or question message … 403
APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST … 407
D. 1 Function List of Special Function Keys … 407
D. 2 Function List of Function Keys … 408
D. 3 Function List of Special Function Keys (Shift + key) … 408
D. 4 Function List of Function Keys (Shift + key) … 409
D. 5 List of Special Function Keys (Ctrl + key) … 409
D. 6 Function List of Function Keys (Ctrl + key) … 409
D. 7 Function List of Control Keys (Ctrl + key) … 410
D. 8 List of Special Function Keys (Ctrl + Shift + key) … 411
APPENDIX E INDEX … 412
12
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure No. Title , Page
1-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
4-1
5-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-37
7-38
7-39
7-40
7-41
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-50
7-51
Example of ID850 System Configuration … 18
Configuration Dialog Box … 27
Main Window … 28
Exit Debugger Dialog Box … 28
Message Box for Confirmation of Stopping Execution … 28
Debugger Settings Dialog Box (PM plus) … 31
Flow of Stub Function … 43
Main Window … 57
Toolbar with Only Graphics (default) … 58
Toolbar with Graphics and Characters … 58
Status Bar … 76
Configuration Dialog Box … 79
Extended Option Dialog Box … 90
Debugger Option Dialog Box … 95
Add Source path Dialog Box … 97
Font Dialog Box … 103
Project File Save Dialog Box … 105
Project File Load Dialog Box … 108
View File Save Dialog Box … 110
View File Load Dialog Box … 114
Download Dialog Box … 117
The Progress of Download … 120
Upload Dialog Box … 121
Load Module List Dialog Box … 124
Browse Dialog Box … 126
Address Move Dialog Box … 128
Source Text Move Dialog Box … 130
Trace Move Dialog Box … 133
Symbol To Address Dialog Box … 136
Source Window … 139
Source Search Dialog Box … 153
Assemble Window … 156
Assemble Search Dialog Box … 162
Memory Window … 165
Memory Search Dialog Box … 170
Memory Fill Dialog Box … 173
Memory Copy Dialog Box … 175
Memory Compare Dialog Box … 177
Confirmation Dialog Box … 178
Memory Compare Result Dialog Box … 179
DMM Dialog Box … 181
Watch Window … 183
Quick Watch Dialog Box … 190
Add Watch Dialog Box … 194
Change Watch Dialog Box … 198
Local Variable Window, … 201
Stack Trace Window … 204
Register Window … 208
Register Select Dialog Box … 211
IOR Window … 213
IOR Select Dialog Box … 218
Add I/O Port Dialog Box … 221
Trace Window … 224
Trace Search Dialog Box … 233
Trace Data Select Dialog Box … 241
Coverage Window … 244
Coverage Search Dialog Box … 249
Coverage-Clear Dialog Box … 252
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
13
7-52
7-53
7-54
7-55
7-56
7-57
7-58
7-59
7-60
7-61
7-62
7-63
7-64
7-65
7-66
7-67
7-68
7-69
C-1
14
Coverage-Address Dialog Box … 254
Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box … 256
Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box … 259
Event Manager … 261
Software Break Manager … 270
Event Dialog Box … 273
Event Link Dialog Box … 283
Break Dialog Box … 288
Trace Dialog Box … 293
Snap Shot Dialog Box (with Register Selected) … 299
Stub Dialog Box … 306
Timer Dialog Box … 310
Timer Result Dialog Box … 316
Delay Count Dialog Box … 318
Reset Debugger Dialog Box … 320
About Dialog Box … 322
Exit Debugger Dialog Box … 324
Console window … 326
Error/Warning Messages … 380
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
LIST OF TABLES
Table No. Title, Page
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-37
7-38
7-39
7-40
7-41
8-1
8-2
8-3
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
B-1
D-1
D-2
Various Event Conditions … 38
Operation of Tracer (During Next Over Execution) … 41
List of View Files … 45
List of Information Files … 46
List of Setting Files … 46
Window List … 53
Break Cause … 76
Settable Sizes as Internal ROM/RAM … 81
Size of Internal RAM and Start Address … 81
Mapping Unit in Configuration Dialog Box … 86
Registers Necessary for Accessing External Memory … 88
Address Range and Valid Size … 92
Contents Saved to Project File … 105
Extension Corresponding to Current Window … 111
Type of File That Can Be Loaded on View File Load Dialog Box … 115
Type of File That Can Be Downloaded … 118
Type of File That Can Be Uploaded … 122
Type of File That Can Be Displayed in Browse Dialog Box … 127
Frame Number Specification Format … 134
Specifying Symbols … 137
Details of Setting/Deleting Breakpoint … 142
Display Color of Breakpoint and Its Meaning … 142
Meaning of Event Display Mark … 143
Details of Drag & Drop Function (Line/Address) … 151
Details of Drag & Drop Function (Character String) … 152
Data Display Format (Watch-Related) … 186
Number of Clocks and Time Tag Value … 226
Correspondence Between External Sense Data and External Sense Clip … 228
Cursor Position and Jump Pointer … 229
Types of Status Conditions … 234
List of Access Size Conditions (Trace) … 235
Settable Range of Address Condition … 236
Settable Range of Data Condition … 237
Settable Range of External Sense Data Condition … 238
Status List of Coverage Data … 246
Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each Event Condition … 261
Marks of Event Icon … 263
Color of Character on Mark and its Meaning … 263
Address Condition and Jump Pointer … 264
Separator for Displaying Event Details … 265
List of Status Conditions … 275
List of Access Size Conditions (Event) … 276
Settable Range of Data Condition … 277
Settable Range of External Sense Data Condition … 278
Various Event Conditions for Which Event Link Condition Can Be Use … 282
Number of Events Settable in Break Condition Setting Area … 289
List of Debugger Control Commands … 327
List of Console/Tcl Commands … 329
Message ID … 331
Usable Character Set … 373
List of Special Characters … 373
Input Format of Numeric Values … 375
List of Operators … 375
Operator Priority … 377
Range of Radixes … 377
Delimiter … 378
Function List of Special Function Keys … 407
Function List of Function Keys … 408
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
15
D-3
D-4
D-5
D-6
D-7
D-8
16
Function List of Special Function Keys (Shift + key) … 408
Function List of Function Keys (Shift + key) … 409
List of Special Function Keys (Ctrl + key) … 409
Function List of Function Keys (Ctrl + key) … 409
Function List of Control Keys (Ctrl + key) … 410
List of Special Function Keys (Ctrl + Shift + key) … 411
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1. 1
Overview
The Integrated debugger ID850 for the V850 Series (hereafter referred to as the ID850) is a software tool
developed for NEC's V850 Series of 32-bit microcontrollers for embedded control. This software tool is
intended to enable efficient debugging of user programs.
The ID850 runs on a host machine that uses Windows as the operating system and employs an easy-tounderstand, easy-to-use GUI (Graphical User Interface).
The commands that are often used are displayed as buttons, so that they can be executed with a single
mouse click. In this way, an environment with excellent operability can be provided.
1. 2
Features
The ID850 has the following features.
(1)
Source debugging
A C source program and source program in assembly language can be debugged.
(2)
Using functions of in-circuit emulator
By using the detailed event setting function of an in-circuit emulator, break events can be set and the
user program can be traced.
(3)
Monitor function (automatic display updating function when execution is stopped)
If execution of the user program is stopped, the values of the window displayed on the screen are
automatically updated.
(4)
Saving/restoring debugging environment
The debugging environment including information on setting of breakpoints and events, downloading
files, and display status and position of windows can be saved to a file (project file).
By loading this project file, the debugging environment can be restored.
(5)
Function expansion by TIP or ToolLink
By associating with a task debugger (RD) and system performance analyzer (AZ) supporting TIP (Tool
Interface Protocol) or ToolLink, the debugging efficiency of the user program using a real-time OS (RX)
can be dramatically improved.
(6)
Batch execution by command and creation of custom window
A console window that allows batch processing on the command line and creation of the user's own
custom window has been added.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
17
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1. 3
System Configuration
The supplies a comfortable debugging environment for the user program and target system developed for
the V850 Series, by connecting the host machine and an in-circuit emulator with an interface board.
1. 3. 1
Example of system configuration
Figure 1-1 shows an example of the system configuration of the ID850.
Figure 1-1 Example of ID850 System Configuration
Host machine
Interface board
In-circuit emulator
Target system
1. 4
Operating Environment
The ID850 has the following hardware and software requirements:
1. 4. 1
Hardware environment
(1)
Host machine (any of the following)
• IBM PC/AT TM -compatible machine
(2)
In-circuit emulator (any of the following)
• IE-703002-MC
• IE-703102-MC
• IE-V850E-MC, or IE-V850E-MC-A
• IE-V850ES-G1
(3)
Interface board (any of the following)
• IE-70000-PCI-IF-A (for PCI bus)
• IE-70000-CD-IF-A (for PCMCIA card slot)
• IE-70000-PC-IF-C (for ISA bus)
18
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1. 4. 2
Software environment
(1)
Operating system (any of the following)
Windows98, Windows2000, Windows NT4.0 (Service Pack5 or above), Windows Me, Windows XP
Home Edition, Windows XP Professional
Caution Regardless of which of the OSs above is used, we recommend that the latest Service Pack is
installed.
(2)
Device file
The device file of the target device to be used.
(3)
Device driver
Device driver for interface board (supplied with the product)
Remark The driver can also be downloaded from the Online Delivery Service (ODS).
1. 5
Notes on Source-Level Debugging
To perform source-level debugging, add an option (-g option) to generate debug information when the
source file is compiled.
If this option is not added, the source file cannot be debugged at the source level.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
19
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
This chapter explains the procedure of installing and uninstalling ID850.
2. 1
Installing ID850
To use the ID850, the ID850, a device file and a device driver are necessary. Install the device file with
the dedicated installer "DFINST.exe" (supplied with the ID850 ), and the device driver in accordance with
Readme.txt in the FD"NEC IE-PC Driver Installation Disk".
Caution
To install the ID850 again after the ID850 has been installed once, be sure to uninstall the
ID850. If the ID850 is installed in a directory different from that in which the ID850 has been
already installed, without uninstalling the ID850, the ID850 that has already been installed
cannot be uninstalled.
To install the ID850, prepare the following:
• ID850 system disk
An example of installing the ID850 is shown below.
In this example, the settings are as follows:
2. 1. 1
20
Install directory
C:\NECTools32
CD-ROM drive
Drive Q
Directory to which Windows is installed
C:\WINDOWS
Installing procedure
1
Start Windows.
2
Insert the ID850 system disk to the CD-ROM drive.
3
Start Explorer and double-click "Setup.exe" in the drive Q.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
4
After setup initialization, the setup program is started. Click the <Next>> button.
5
At this time, your agreement with the Software License Agreement is necessary.
Click the <Yes> button. To stop installation, click the <No> button.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
21
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
6
Input the product ID. The product ID of the SP product may be input. Click the <Next>> button.
7
Select items to be installed, and the drive and directory in which the ID850 is to be installed. The
default drive and directory is "C:\NECTools32".
To change the drive and directory, click the <Browse...> button. After each item has been set, click
the <Next>> button. To stop installation, click the <No> button.
Caution If the ID850 previously installed is not uninstalled, a confirmation dialog box inquiring if the
ID850 is uninstalled is displayed.
22
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
8
Specify the name of the folder to which the icon of the ID850 is to be registered. Specify a group
name, and click the <Next>> button. To stop installation, click the <Cancel> button. The default
folder is "NEC Tools32".
9
Final check for starting installation
Confirm the set contents. If you don't need to change the setting, click the <Next>> button. To
change the setting, click the <Back> button and change the setting. If there are any problems, stop
installation by clicking the <Cancel> button.
10 Copy the files to the specified directory.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
23
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
11 Completing installation
When the installation has been completed, a dialog box indicating that setup has been completed
is opened. Click the <Finish> button.
12 When the system disk has been copied, the icon of the ID850 is registered to the "NEC Tools32"
group. This completes the installation of the ID850.
24
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
2. 2
Uninstalling ID850
This section explains how to uninstall the ID850 .
2. 2. 1
Uninstalling procedure
1
Start Windows.
2
Start [Add and Delete Application] from the Control Panel.
3
[NEC ID850 V850 Integrated Debugger Vx.xx] from the list displayed at [Setup and Delete], and
click the < Add/Remove...> button.
4
The Confirm File Deletion dialog box will be displayed. Click the <Yes> button.
5
While the files are being deleted, the following dialog box is displayed. Click <Yes> for all the files
that are inquired (even if <No> is selected, the newest files of the same name will overwrite the
existing files when the ID850 is installed again).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
25
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
-
6
The program will be deleted. When the message "Uninstalling is complete." is displayed, click the
<OK> button.
7
26
This completes the uninstallation of the ID850.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
This chapter explains the procedure of starting and terminating the ID850.
3. 1
Starting
Start the ID850 as follows:
1
Turn on the power to the in-circuit emulator, and then turn on the power to the target system.
2
Start Windows on the PC.
3
Select [Start] -> [Program] -> [NEC Tools32] -> [ID850] from the Windows start menu to start the
ID850. The Configuration dialog box will be opened.
4
Set the items related to the operating environment of the ID850 in the Configuration dialog box.
After setting each item, click the <OK> button in the dialog box.
Figure 3-1 Configuration Dialog Box
5
The Main window will be opened and the ID850 can be operated. Mainly use this window for
debugging.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
27
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
Figure 3-2 Main Window
3. 2
Terminating
Terminate the ID850 as follows:
1
Select the [File] menu -> [Exit] on the Main window. The following Exit Debugger dialog box will be
opened:
Figure 3-3 Exit Debugger Dialog Box
If the above operation is performed while the user program is being executed, the dialog box shown in
Figure 3-4 is opened.
In this case, clicking the <Yes> button opens the Exit Debugger dialog box.
Figure 3-4 Message Box for Confirmation of Stopping Execution
28
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
2
To save the current debugging environment to a project file, click the <Yes> button.
If the <No> button is clicked, all the windows are closed and the ID850 is terminated.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
29
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus
This chapter explains the procedure and points to be noted when a function to associate the PM plus is
used.
The ID850 can automatically perform a series of operations in development processes, such as creating
source files -> compiling -> debugging -> correcting source files, in association with the PM plus.
The operation explained in this chapter requires a PM plus(V5.00 or later).
Caution If a load module file is created by using the Windows command prompt, the function to
associate the ID850 with the PM plus cannot be used.
4. 1
Setting Build Mode
To debug the load module file created by the PM plus on the ID850 at the source level, build to output
symbol information for debugging must be performed to create a load module file. This setting can be
performed by selecting [Debug Build] on the PM plus.
4. 2
Registering Debugger to PM plus Project
The debugger to be used or the load module files to be downloaded can be specified for each project in
the PM plus.
Select a debugger using the following procedure:
4. 2. 1
Selecting debugger
The procedure for selecting the debugger is as follows:
Creating a new workspace
1
Select [File] menu -> [New Workspace...] on the PM plus.
-> This opens the dialog box to create a new workspace using the wizard format.
2
Creating the necessary settings for the workspace with the wizard, the [New Workspace - Step 7/8
(Select Debugger)] dialog box will be opened. Specify [ID850 V850 Integrated Debugger] in this
dialog box.
-> For details of the setting, refer to the PM plus online help or user's manual.
Using an existing workspace
1
Select [Tool] menu -> [Debugger Settings...] on the PM plus.
-> The Debugger Settings dialog box will be opened.
2
Specify [ID850 V850 Integrated Debugger] and click the <OK> button in this dialog box.
The ID850 is registered as the debugger of the active project.
The ID850 icon is displayed on the toolbar of the PM plus.
30
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus
4. 2. 2
Downloading multiple load module files
The load module files of the same project group are downloaded to the debugger.
For details of the project group, refer to the PM plus online help or user's manual.
Download multiple load module files in the following steps.
1
Select [Tool] menu -> [Debugger Settings...] on the PM plus.
-> The Debugger Settings dialog box will be opened.
Figure 4-1 Debugger Settings Dialog Box (PM plus)
2
Specify [ID850 V850 Integrated Debugger] in this dialog box.
3
Specify the load module file to be downloaded first in the [Debug Target File] when the debugger is
started.
4
Check the [Download the debug target files in the same project group] check box, and select the
debug target files in the same group to be downloaded in the Debug Target File List.
->The selected file will be downloaded right after the file specified in [Debug Target File] when the
debugger is started. Note that when these files are downloaded, symbol reset and CPU reset are
not executed.
5
Click the <OK> button.
Remark
Multiple load module files that are being downloaded can be checked in the Load Module List
dialog box dialog box of the ID850.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
31
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus
4. 3
To Start ID850 from PM plus
The ID850 can be started from the PM plus as follows:
• Click the ID850 starting button on the toolbar of the PM plus.
• Select the [Build] menu -> [Debug] on the PM plus.
• Select the [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug] on the PM plus.
• Select the [Build] menu -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus.
If the debugging environment of the ID850 is saved to a project file currently being used by the PM plus, it
will be started in the debugging environment saved in the project file.
If the debugging environment of the ID850 is not saved to a project file being used by the PM plus, the
Configuration dialog box is opened. At this time, the device type (Chip name) cannot be changed.
4. 3. 1
Restoring debugging environment
The previous debugging environment can be restored by the following procedure when the ID850 is
started from the PM plus:
1
Create a new workspace (project file : e.g., sample.prj) on the PM plus.
Caution
In the ID850 and PM plus, the environment information is saved to a project file and
referenced. The extension of the project file that can be used by the ID850 and PM plus is prj.
For the information that is saved or restored by the project file, refer to the online help or the
user's manual of each product.
2
Start the ID850 from the PM plus. Because a new project file is created, set items other than the
device type (Chip name) in the Configuration dialog box in the same manner as when only the
ID850 is started.
3
Download the load module file to be debugged with the Download dialog box of the ID850.
4
Debug the load module file on the ID850.
5
Click the <Yes> button on the Exit Debugger dialog box when the ID850 is terminated.
-> The debugging environment will be saved to the project file (sample.prj) for the PM pluswhen the
ID850 is terminated (the debug environment can also be saved to the sample.prj file by overwriting
the project file at times other than the completion of ID850 debugging).
6
When the ID850 is next started up after the sample.prj file is read by PM plus, the debug
environment at the point when the project file was saved is automatically restored.
4. 4
Auto Load
If a bug is found while the load module file is being debugged by the ID850, correct the source file using
the following procedure. Compiling and re-downloading the file can be automatically executed (Refer to
"Auto load by correcting source code").
The load module is downloaded again to the ID850 by compiling and linking the file on the PM plus with
32
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus
the activated ID850 (refer to "Auto load by starting debugger").
4. 4. 1
Auto load by correcting source code
Correct the source file for auto load as follows:
1
Open the source file to be corrected in the Source window. Select [File] menu -> [Open] and
specify the file to be corrected on the ID850 (if the file is already open in the Source window, that
window is displayed in the forefront).
-> The specified file will be opened in the Source window.
2
Select [Edit] menu -> [Correct Source] on the ID850.
-> An editor will be opened and the specified source file will be read.
3
Correct the source file on the editor.
4
Terminate the editor.
Caution The CPU reset is not performed when the load module file is automatically downloaded. The
debug window that was opened when the editor was called, and each event setting will be
restored. If the previously used line or symbol has been deleted as a result of correcting the
source file, the following happens:
- A software break point may be deleted.
- A variable that was displayed is dimmed.
- The event mark of an event condition is displayed in yellow.
5
4. 4. 2
Select [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug], or [Build] -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus.
Auto load by starting debugger
If the following operation is performed on the PM plus with the ID850 started, the load module will be
automatically downloaded to the ID850.
• Selecting the [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug] on the PM plus.
• Selecting the [Build] menu -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus.
The CPU reset is not performed after the load module has been downloaded.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
33
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
This chapter explains the basic debugging functions of the ID850.
• Mapping function
• Setting Debugging Environment
• Program Execution Function
• Event function
• Break function
• Trace function
• Coverage Measurement Function
• Snapshot Function
• Stub Function
• Register Manipulation Function
• Memory Manipulation Function
• Watch Function
• Time Measurement Function
• Load/Save Function
• Real-Time RAM Sampling Function
5. 1
Mapping function
The following types of mapping functions that can be set in the Configuration dialog box are available:
(1)
Internal ROM
A memory area specified as the internal ROM is equivalent to the internal ROM of the target device.
If the target device writes data to this memory area, a write protect break occurs.
(2)
Internal RAM
A memory area specified as the internal RAM is equivalent to the internal RAM of the target device.
The target device accesses the memory in the in-circuit emulator.
(3)
User area mapping (Target)
A memory area specified as user area mapping is an area that accesses the memory on the target
system. The target device accesses the memory on the target system.
Caution
Addresses of memory areas other than the internal ROM, internal RAM, and peripheral I/O
registers can be set.
34
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
(4)
Emulation ROM
A memory area specified as the emulation ROM is equivalent to when ROM is connected to the target
device. The target device accesses the memory in the in-circuit emulator. If the target memory
accesses this area, a write protect break occurs.
Caution
Addresses of memory areas other than the internal ROM, internal RAM, and peripheral I/O
registers can be set.
(5)
Emulation RAM
A memory area specified as the emulation RAM is equivalent to when RAM is connected to the target
device. The target device accesses the memory in the in-circuit emulator. If the target memory
accesses this area, a write protect break occurs.
Caution
Addresses of memory areas other than the internal ROM, internal RAM, and peripheral I/O
registers can be set.
(6)
I/O Protect area
An I/O Protect area can be set in the area specified for the target device. This area is displayed in the
same manner as an area that is not mapped (display symbol: ??), on the Memory window. By
mapping an area with this attribute, data cannot be read or written from/to this area by the Memory
window, on the area can therefore be protected from an illegal access.
To read or write the value of the area mapped with this attribute, register the value in the IOR window
or Watch window.
5. 2
Setting Debugging Environment
Set a debugging environment with the Configuration dialog box that is opened when the debugger is
started, or the Extended Option dialog box or Debugger Option dialog box.
By creating a file (project file) to which the current debugging environment is saved during debugging,
and loading this file, the debugging environment when the project file is saved can be restored.
To manipulate the project file, use the Project File Save dialog box and Project File Load dialog box.
After the project file has been loaded, the size and position of the displayed window are returned to the
previous size and status (refer to "Table 7-8 Contents Saved to Project File").
To load the project file when starting up the debugger, press the <Project...> button in the Configuration
dialog box. It can also be specified that the project file is automatically loaded each time the debugger is
started up (refer to "To automatically load a project file").
5. 3
Program Execution Function
The program execution function is used to start execution of the user program by the CPU and operation
of the tracer.
These functions can be executed by selecting the [Run] menu or the corresponding function button, and
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
35
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
the execution formats are classified into real-time execution and non-real-time execution.
5. 3. 1
Real-time execution function
The following real-time execution functions are available:
• [Go] (Go button)
• [Ignore break points and Go] (GoN button)
• [Start From Here] (Start function)
• [Come Here] (Come function)
• [Restart] (ReGo button)
(1)
[Go] (Go button)
The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current PC register and is
stopped if a set break event condition is satisfied. Each analyzer prepares for operation as soon as
execution of the user program is started, and is executed or stopped by a condition set as an event
condition (break event condition or trace event condition).
(2)
[Ignore break points and Go] (GoN button)
This command executes the user program starting from the address indicated by the current PC
register. Execution of the user program continues, ignoring set breakpoints.
(3)
[Start From Here] (Start function)
This command executes the user program starting from the specified address. Execution of the user
program is stopped when a set break event condition is satisfied.
(4)
[Come Here] (Come function)
The user program is executed from the address indicated by the current PC register to the address
selected in the line/address display area of the Source window or the Assemble window, and then a
break occurs.
While the user program is being executed, the break event currently set does not occur.
(5)
[Restart] (ReGo button)
The CPU is reset and the user program is executed starting from address 0.
This is the same operation as "resetting the CPU before execution of the user program and executing
[Go]".
5. 3. 2
Non-real-time execution function
The following non-real-time execution functions are available:
• [Step In] (Step button)
• [Next Over] (Over button)
36
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
• [Slow Motion]
(1)
[Step In] (Step button)
The operation differs depending on whether this function is executed in the Source window or the
Assemble window.
In the Source window
Step execution of one line of the source text is performed starting from the current PC register value
and the contents of each window are updated.
In the Assemble window
One instruction is executed from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are
updated.
(2)
[Next Over] (Over button)
The operation differs depending on whether the instruction to be executed is the jarl instruction or any
other instruction.
jarl instruction
Next step execution is performed, assuming the function or subroutine called by the jarl instruction as
one step (step execution continues until the nesting level becomes the same as when the jarl
instruction was executed).
Instruction other than jarl
The same processing as [Step In] is performed.
(3)
[Slow Motion]
Step execution of one line is performed from the address indicated by the current PC register value in
the source mode. In the instruction mode, step execution of one instruction is performed. The contents
of each window are updated each time step execution is performed. This operation is repeated until
the user executes [Stop].
5. 4
Event function
An event is a specific status of the target system during user program execution, such as "address
0x1000 is fetched" or "data is written to address 0x2000".
The ID850 uses an event to trigger an action of functions such as break and trace functions. An event
function is used to set, delete, and reference a specific status of the target system that triggers an action
(debugging action) as an event condition.
5. 4. 1
Using event function
So that an action that is triggered by an event function in accordance with the user's debugging aim, the
following various event conditions must be set.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
37
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
Table 5-1 Various Event Conditions
Set Condition
Setting Dialog Box
Contents
Break event
Break dialog box
Condition in which the execution of the user program or
the operation of the tracer is stopped.
Trace event
Trace dialog box
Condition in which the process of user program
execution is saved to the trace memory.
Snapshot event
Snap Shot dialog box
Condition in which the timing of executing a snapshot is
specified.
The following three snap data items can be registered:
- Register value
- Peripheral I/O register value
- Memory contents
Stub event
Stub dialog box
Condition in which the timing of inserting the program is
specified when the stub function is used.
(To return from a specified function if a stub event
occurs, be sure to describe the JMP [r31] instruction in
the function.)
Timer event
Timer dialog box
Condition in which the timing of starting and stopping
time measurement is specified when zone
measurement is performed.
These various event conditions are set independently as an "Event condition" or "Event link condition", or
as a combination of these. To use the event function of the ID850, therefore, first create the necessary
"Event condition" and "Event link condition", and set the various event conditions shown in the Table 5-1 by
using these conditions.
5. 4. 2
Event condition
Create an event condition in the Event dialog box.
Set an address condition, status condition, and data condition in this dialog box. Specify a combination of
these as one event condition and name and register this event condition. The registered event condition
can be used to set various event conditions. However, the number of event conditions that can be set is
limited.
The event condition that is created when a breakpoint is set in the Source window or the Assemble
window can also be used (Breakpoint setting/deletion function).
5. 4. 3
Event link condition
An event link condition specifies sequential constraints for each event, so that two or more events are
treated as a single event.
To create an event link condition, use the Event Link dialog box.
By arranging already registered event conditions in this dialog box, one event link condition can be
named and registered. The registered event link condition can be used to set various event conditions in
the same manner as the event condition. However, the number of event conditions that can be set is
limited.
38
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
5. 4. 4
Setting of various event conditions
Various event conditions listed in Table 5-1 are individually created in the corresponding dialog box.
To create various event condition, drag and drop the event icon of an event condition or event link
condition registered on the Event Manager to the condition area of each setting dialog box.
The created various event condition is set by clicking the <Set> or <OK> button in the setting dialog box.
The mark of the event that has been set is displayed in red. After the event has been set, a debugging
action occurs as various event condition.
Up to 256 various event conditions can be registered. The number of various event conditions that can
be "set" differs depending on the various event condition (refer to "Table 7-31 Maximum Number of Valid
Events for Each Event Condition").
5. 5
Break function
The break function is used to stop execution of the user program by the CPU and operation of the tracer.
The following types of break functions are available:
• Event detection break
• Break by Come function
• Software break
• Break on satisfaction of condition of step execution
• Forced break
• Fail-safe break
Caution
The event detection break and software break are not performed when [Come Here], [Step
In], [Return Out], or [Next Over] described in "Program Execution Function" is executed.
(1)
Event detection break
Event detection break is a function used to stop execution of the user program by detecting a set break
event condition. This break is valid for [Go], [Go & Go], [Start From Here], and [Restart].
In the case of [Go & Go], however, the contents of each window are updated and the user program is
executed again after the event detection break has occurred. Set a break event as follows:
• Set as an execution event in the Source window or Assemble window (Breakpoint setting/deletion
function).
• Set in the Break dialog box.
(2)
Break by Come function
The Break by Come function is used to stop the user program that is executed by the [Come Here]
command, by detecting an address specified in the Source window or Assemble window. When
execution of the user program has been stopped, the breakpoint by the Come function is eliminated.
While the user program is being executed by using this function, a break event that has been set does
not occur.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
39
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
(3)
Software break
Software break is a function to replace the instruction at the specified address with a debuggerdedicated software break instruction and stop the user program executed by the [Go], [Go & Go], [Start
From Here], or [Restart] command.
As many software break events as necessary can be set (however, only 100 of them are valid).
Because the instruction at the specified address is rewritten, however, a software break event cannot
be set on the external ROM or stopped by the access timing of a variable.
While one event detection break uses one hardware resource per event condition, the feature of a
software break is that a breakpoint is set at two or more addresses.
Set a software break event in the Source window or Assemble window (refer to "Breakpoint setting/
deletion function").
The Software Break Managermanages the software breaks (by validating or invalidating).
(4)
Break on satisfaction of condition of step execution
Break on satisfaction of condition of step execution is a function used to stop execution of the user
program when the end condition of each command ([Step In], [Next Over], [Return Out], and
[Slowmotion]) is satisfied.
Because one instruction is executed, stopped, and the condition is confirmed at one time, the
processing time is longer than that of real-time execution.
(5)
Forced break
Forced break is a function used to forcibly stop execution of the user program. It is valid for all the
program execution commands. Force break includes the following:
• [Stop] command: Forcibly stops execution of the user program.
(6)
Fail-safe break
A fail-safe break is a function for forcibly stopping the user program when the user program has
executed a prohibited action on the memory and registers.
The types of fail-safe break functions are as follows:
Non-map break
This break occurs if an attempt is made to access a non-map area.
Write-protect break
This break occurs if an attempt is made to write to memory that must
not be written to, such as ROM.
Peripheral I/O register
Illegal access break
This break occurs if an attempt is made to access peripheral I/O
registers illegally.
Note that if a fail-safe break occurs, there may be a problem with the user program or the set
environment of the ID850 may be wrong.
5. 6
Trace function
The trace function is used to save the history of the data indicating the execution process of the user
40
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
program to the trace memory. The trace data saved to the trace memory can be checked in the Trace
window.
The item to be displayed in the Trace window can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box.
To use the trace function, check that the trace function is valid by selecting the [Option] menu -> [Tracer
ON]. The trace function is valid in the default status, and all data is unconditionally traced (unconditional
trace) when the program is executed.
When the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used, the result of a DMA trace can be collected, in
addition to the ordinary trace result (refer to "To execute DMA trace" ).
5. 6. 1
Operation of trace
The trace memory of the ID850 is a ring buffer with a capacity of 32,768 frames.
The operation of the tracer differs as indicated in (1) to (3) below, depending on the style of execution of
the user program.
(1)
Operation during real-time execution
The operation of the tracer differs depending on the specified trace mode.
All trace
(Unconditional trace)
Trace is started when real-time execution of the program is specified,
and ends when a break occurs.
Conditional trace
Trace is started or stopped by the condition set in the Trace dialog
box (if a break occurs while a trace is being executed, however, trace
is stopped immediately).
These trace modes can be set by selecting the [Run] menu -> [Conditional Trace /Unconditional
Trace].
(2)
Operation during Step In execution
The tracer operates every step execution, and trace data of one step is successively added to the
trace memory.
(3)
Operation during Next Over execution
The operation of the tracer differs depending on the instruction to which Next Over is to be executed.
Table 5-2 Operation of Tracer (During Next Over Execution)
Instruction
5. 6. 2
Tracer Operation
jarl disp22, [lp] instruction
The jarl instruction and the subroutine that was called are traced.
Other instructions
The same operation as that during Step In execution is performed.
Trace condition setting function
The following setting types of trace condition are available:
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
41
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
(1)
Setting trace mode
Two trace modes, unconditional trace and conditional trace, are available.
(2)
Setting of tracer control mode
The tracer has a ring structure.
The following operation modes of the tracer can be selected from the [Run] menu:
(3)
Non-Stop
Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the oldest frame
(default).
Full Stop
Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer.
Full Break
Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and program
execution.
* Only IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A used
Setting trace event condition
A trace event condition triggers starting/stopping trace execution when a conditional trace is set.
A trace event condition is set in the Trace dialog box.
The following types of trace event conditions can be specified:
5. 7
Section trace
Executes a trace between two specified conditions (in a specific zone).
A section trace (zone trace) can be executed by setting a trace start event
and trace end event and executing a conditional trace.
Qualify trace
Executes a trace only when a condition is satisfied.
If two or more events are set as qualify trace events, a qualify trace can be
executed by executing a conditional trace.
A qualify trace can be executed by setting a qualify trace event and
executing a conditional trace.
Delay trigger trace
Executes a trace by the number of delay counts after a condition has been
satisfied.
A delay trigger trace can be executed by setting a delay trigger event
condition, setting a delay count in the Delay Count dialog box, and
executing a conditional trace.
Coverage Measurement Function
Coverage is a function used to record the status (such as execution, read, and write) for each address
when the user program is executed.
Coverage measurement can be performed by selecting the [Option] menu -> [Coverage ON], and the
status of each address is recorded in the coverage memory by executing the program.
The coverage results can be checked in the Coverage window. This window displays the results of
coverage executed in the 1 MB space specified in the Coverage-Address dialog box.
The efficiency of the coverage can be checked in the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box that is opened
by clicking the <View> button on the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
42
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
5. 8
Snapshot Function
Snapshot is a function used to save the contents of registers, memory, and peripheral I/O registers to the
trace memory as snap data while the user program is being executed.
A snap event condition specifies the trigger by which a snapshot is to be executed.
The snap event condition can be set in the Snap Shot dialog box.
The following snap data can be collected:
• Register value (program registers, system registers)
• Peripheral I/O register value
• Memory contents
One snap event condition can specify collection of up to 16 snap data.
5. 9
Stub Function
The stub function is used to execute the user program (sub-program) that has been downloaded or
written by online assembly to a vacant memory area in advance when an event occurs.
A stub event condition is a trigger by which the stub function is to be executed. The snap event condition
can be set in the Stub dialog box.
Append the JMP [r31] instruction to the end of the sub-program that is executed when a stub event
occurs, otherwise, malfunction may occur.
Use the stub function in the "after" break mode. If it is used in the "before" break mode, only the subprogram is repeated.
Figure 5-1 Flow of Stub Function
Main program
Sub-program
(1)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(2)
JMP [r31] instruction
If stub function is not used
(1) and (2) are executed.
If stub function is used
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
43
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
1
(1) is executed.
2
A stub event occurs in (3) and a break occurs.
3
The in-circuit emulator sets the current address to the r31 register in (4), and rewrites the PC value
to the entry address of the sub-program.
4
(5) is executed.
5
Execution is returned to the main program by the JMP instruction at the end of the sub-program in
(6).
5. 10
Register Manipulation Function
The register manipulation function is used to display or change the contents of the program registers,
system registers, and peripheral I/O registers.
This function can be used in the Register window or IOR window. To change the register to be displayed
in each window, use the Register Select dialog box or IOR Select dialog box.
A user-defined I/O port can be displayed or changed by registering it to the Add I/O Port dialog box. In a
device supporting programmable IOR, programmable IOR can be displayed or changed by using the
Configuration dialog box.
5. 11
Memory Manipulation Function
As a memory manipulation function, the memory contents can be displayed or changed by using
mnemonic codes, hexadecimal codes, and ASCII codes.
This function can be used in the Memory window or Assemble window. The contents of memory can be
copied, initialized, and compared.
5. 12
Watch Function
Data (variable) values can be checked or changed in the Watch window.
Local variables can be checked or changed in the Local Variable window.
The contents of a variable value can be easily referenced in the Source window or Assemble window by
placing the mouse cursor on the selected variable (balloon watch function).
5. 13
Time Measurement Function
The time measurement function is used to measure the full execution time from the start of execution of
the user program to the occurrence of a break, or the execution time of the user program in a specific zone
by using a timer event.
A timer event condition specifies the trigger by which time measurement is started or stopped. Set a
timer event condition in the Timer dialog box. The time from the start of execution of the user program to
the occurrence of a break can be easily measured by using the Run-Break event registered in advance.
To use the timer function, select the [Option] menu -> [Timer On] to set the timer to ON. If the timer is set
to OFF, the timer does not operate. However, the Run-Break event is not affected regardless of whether the
44
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
timer is set to ON or OFF.
To stop the timer currently in operation during emulation, select the [Run] menu -> [Timer Stop]. To
operate the timer when it is stopped, select the [Run] menu -> [Timer Start]. These two menus are toggled
and alternately displayed depending on the current timer status.
The maximum execution measurement time is about 2 minutes 51 seconds (at 25 MHz).
5. 14
Load/Save Function
The load/save function is used to load/save each file.
The ID850 loads/saves each file individually.
These three types of files can be handled:
5. 14. 1
view files
File recording the screen information when it is saved. By loading this file, a
reference file is opened in the Source window.
Information file
File recording the set data and debugging environment as information on the
user program and debugger.
Setting files
File recording the window information.
View files
The list of the view files to be handled is shown below:
These files can be manipulated in the View File Load dialog box and View File Save dialog box.
Table 5-3 List of View Files
File Type
Contents
Source Text (*.SVW)
Source window view file
Records the source text in the Source window.
Assemble (*.DIS)
Assemble window view file
Records the assembly information in the Assemble window.
Memory (*.MEM)
Memory window view file
Records the memory information in the Memory window.
Register (*.RGW)
Register window view file
Records the register information in the Register window.
Local Variable (*.LOC)
Local Variable window view file
Records the local variable information in the Local Variable window.
Stack Trace (*.STK)
Stack Trace window view file
Records the stack trace information in the Stack Trace window.
Trace (*.TVW)
Trace window view file
Records the trace information in the Trace window.
Coverage (*.COV)
Coverage window view file
Records the coverage information in the Coverage window.
Console (*.LOG)
Console window view file
Records the information in the Console window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
45
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
5. 14. 2
Information files
The list of the information files to be handled is shown below.
Table 5-4 List of Information Files
File Name (Extension)
Contents
Dialog Box
Object file
(*.HEX)
Stores the object codes of the user
program.
Download dialog box,
Upload dialog box
Load module file
(*.OUT)
Stores the object codes, symbols, and
source information of the user program.
Download dialog box
Project File
(*.PRJ)
Stores the debugging environment
Project File Load dialog box,
Project File Save dialog box
Binary file
(*.BIN)
Records data in binary format.
Download dialog box,
Upload dialog box
Coverage result file
(*.CVB)
Stores the coverage results.
Download dialog box,
Upload dialog box
A project file sets the display information, size, and display position of a window or dialog box, and
restores the debugging environment to the previous status (when the project file was saved) when it is
loaded.
5. 14. 3
Setting files
The list of the setting files to be handled is shown below:
These files can be manipulated in the View File Load dialog box and View File Save dialog box.
Table 5-5 List of Setting Files
File Name (Extension)
5. 15
Contents
Watch setting file
(*.WCH)
Stores the watch setting contents of the Watch window.
Peripheral I/O register setting file
(*.OR)
Stores the peripheral I/O register setting contents of the IOR
window.
Event setting file
(*.EVN)
Stores the event setting contents of the Event Manager.
Real-Time RAM Sampling Function
The following two types of real-time RAM sampling functions are available
• Real-time internal RAM sampling function
• Real-time RAM sampling function
The real-time RAM sampling functions are used to read and display the memory contents, even during
user program execution, if a variable allocated to a range in which the memory contents can be read, or the
memory contents are displayed.
46
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS OF ID850
While the memory range for the former depends on the in-circuit emulator (refer to "Table 7-7 Address
Range and Valid Size", no memory range limitation applies to the latter.
This function can be checked in the Watch window or Memory window.
Settings related to this function are performed in the Extended Option dialog box.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
47
CHAPTER 6 OPERATION
CHAPTER 6 OPERATION
This chapter explains the flow of basic debugging operations using the ID850 and the following functions:
• Flow of Debugging Operations
• Active Status and Static Status
• Jump Function
• Trace Result with Linking Window
6. 1
Flow of Debugging Operations
(1)
Setting debugging environment
Prepare for debugging.
-> Mapping function
-> Configuration dialog box
Download a load module file to be debugged.
-> Download dialog box
Checking the loaded file.
-> Load Module List dialog box
(2)
Displaying source program
By downloading a load module file with debug information, the corresponding source file is
automatically displayed.
-> Source window
(3)
Displaying disassemble result
The disassembled result of the downloaded user program is displayed.
-> Assemble window
(4)
Setting breakpoint
Breakpoints can be set easily in the Source window, Assemble window, and Watch window.
-> Breakpoint setting/deletion function
-> To set a breakpoint for read/write access to a variable
(5)
Setting event
Register event conditions and event link conditions.
-> Event dialog box, Event Link dialog box
Setting of various event conditions
Set a various event condition by using the Event Manager or an event icon in the event manager area
on each various event setting dialog box.
Each various event condition corresponds to the following various event setting dialog box.
48
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6 OPERATION
Break event condition -> Break dialog box
Trace event condition -> Trace dialog box
Snap event condition -> Snap Shot dialog box
Stub event condition -> Stub dialog box
Timer event condition -> Timer dialog box
Checking setting status of various event conditions
-> Event dialog box or the event manager area in each various event setting dialog box
Checking setting status of software breakpoint
-> Software Break Manager
(6)
Executing user program
By executing the user program, the PC advances to the set breakpoint, break event, or forced
breakpoint (refer to "Program Execution Function").
Use the execution control button or [Run] menu to execute the user program.
(7)
Checking trace data
-> Trace window
(8)
Editing, checking, and changing memory contents
-> Memory window, Memory Copy dialog box, Memory Fill dialog box, Memory Compare dialog box,
Memory Compare Result dialog box
(9)
Registering, checking, and changing variable value
-> Watch window, Quick Watch dialog box, Add Watch dialog box, Change Watch dialog box, Local
Variable window
(10) Checking stack contents
-> Stack Trace window
(11) Checking and changing of registered contents of register value
-> Register window, Register Select dialog box
The value of the PC register can also be checked in the Source window and Assemble window.
(12) Checking and changing peripheral I/O register value
-> IOR window, IOR Select dialog box
(13) Registering, checking, and changing user-defined I/O port value
-> Add I/O Port dialog box, IOR window
(14) Changing mnemonic and executing online assembly
-> Assemble window, Source window
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
49
CHAPTER 6 OPERATION
(15) Checking execution time of user program
-> Timer dialog box, Timer Result dialog box, Trace window
(16) Checking coverage measurement result
-> Coverage window, Coverage-Clear dialog box, Coverage-Address dialog box, Coverage-Condition
Setting dialog box, Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box
(17) Searching character string in each window
By clicking the < Search...> button in the window in which searching is to be executed, the following
types of searching dialog boxes are opened:
Source Search dialog box, Assemble Search dialog box, Memory Search dialog box, Trace Search
dialog box, Coverage Search dialog box
(18) Manipulating view file
-> View File Save dialog box, View File Load dialog box
(19) Uploading memory contents and coverage result
-> Upload dialog box
(20) Saving debugging environment to project file
-> Project File Save dialog box
(21) Terminating ID850
-> Exit Debugger dialog box
6. 2
Active Status and Static Status
The Source window, Assemble window, Memory window, and Coverage window have the following two
window statuses:
Active status
The display position and contents of the window in the active status are
automatically updated in association with the current PC value.
This window is also the jump destination of the jump function. If this window is
linked with the Trace window, the contents displayed in the active window are
updated in association with the Trace window. Only one window can be opened
in the active status.
Select this status by the [Window] menu.
Static status
The display position of the window in the static status does not move in
association with the current PC value, but the displayed contents are updated.
The static window is not used as the jump destination of the jump function. In
addition, it is not linked with the Trace window.
If an active window is already open, the next window is opened in the static
status. Two or more static windows can be opened at the same time.
Select this status by the [Window] menu.
Because two or more static windows can be opened, the current status of the windows can be
50
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 6 OPERATION
temporarily held.
6. 3
Jump Function
The jump function is used to jump to Source window, Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage
window from a jump pointer that is the line or address on which the cursor is placed, and display the
contents of the jump destination window from the jump pointer.
You can jump among the above windows, or from Trace window, Stack Trace window, Event Manager,
and Register window to the above windows.
Jump method
1
Move the cursor to the line or address that is to be used as the jump pointer, on the window from
which jumping is possible (select an event icon on the Event Manager).
2
Select the following menu item to which execution is to jump from the [Jump] menu.
Source window->Select [Source].
Assemble window->Select [Assemble].
Memory window->Select [Memory].
Coverage window->Select [Coverage].
Caution If a program code does not exist on the line at the cursor position, the first address of the line
with a program code above or below that line is used as the jump pointer.
Details of jump source address
To jump from the following windows, the jump destination is as follows:
• To jump from the Trace window to the Memory window or Coverage window, the jump source
address differs depending on the cursor position in the trace result display area.
If the cursor is at an access address, access data, or access
status
-> Access address
Other than above
-> Fetch address
To jump to the Source window or Assemble window
-> Fetch address
• To jump from the Register window, move the cursor to a register value.
• To jump from the Stack Trace window, the jump destination is as follows:
[With current function]
• If the jump destination is the Source window -> Jumps to the current PC line.
• If the jump destination is a window other than the Source window -> Jumps to the current PC
address.
[With function other than current function]
• If the jump destination is the Source window
-> Jumps to the line that calls a nested function.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
51
CHAPTER 6 OPERATION
• If the jump destination is a window other than the Source window
-> Jumps to the address next to the instruction that calls a nested function.
6. 4
Trace Result with Linking Window
By linking Trace window with each window (Source window, Assemble window, Memory window, or
Coverage window), the corresponding part can be displayed on the linked window, by using the address at
the cursor position on the Trace window as a pointer.
If the cursor is moved on the Trace window, the corresponding part on the linked window is highlighted or
indicated by the cursor position.
To link a window
1
Set the Trace window as the current window.
2
Select a window to be linked with the [View] menu -> [Window Synchronize].
Source window ->Select [Source].
Assemble window ->Select [Assemble].
Memory window ->Select [Memory].
Coverage window ->Select [Coverage].
3
Move the cursor to the line to be linked in the trace result display area of the Trace window.
4
Using the address of the line selected in 3 as a pointer, the corresponding part is highlighted (or
indicated by the cursor position) in the display area of the window selected in 2.
Caution The linking source address differs as follows depending on the cursor position in the trace
result display area if the Memory window or Coverage window is linked.
Access address, access data, access status -> Access address
Others -> Fetch address
When the Source window or Assemble window is linked, the fetch address is always used as
the pointer.
52
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
This chapter explains the details of the window/dialog box functions of the ID850.
7. 1
Window List
Table 7-1 lists the windows of the ID850.
Table 7-1 Window List
Window Name
Contents
Main window
This window is displayed first, when the debugger is started.
It controls execution of the user program. Various windows are
opened from this window.
Configuration dialog box
Displays and sets the debugger operation environment.
Extended Option dialog box
This dialog box is used to display and set the extended options of the
debugger.
Debugger Option dialog box
Displays and sets options.
Font dialog box
Displays the types of fonts displayed in the Source window and sets
the size of the font.
Project File Save dialog box
Saves the debug environment.
Project File Load dialog box
Loads the debug environment.
View File Save dialog box
Saves the contents of the current window to a view file or event setting
file.
View File Load dialog box
Reads the view file or source event setting file of each window.
Download dialog box
Loads an object file and binary file.
Upload dialog box
Saves the memory contents to a file.
Load Module List dialog box
Lists the names and file path names of the downloaded load module
files.
Browse dialog box
Debugger Option dialog box, Select the file to be set in Source Search
dialog box.
Source Text Move dialog box
This dialog box is used to specify a file to be displayed in Source
window and the position from which displaying the file is to be started.
Address Move dialog box
Specifies the start address to display the contents of the Memory
window, Assemble window or Coverage window.
Trace Move dialog box
Specifies the start address to display the contents of the Trace
window.
Symbol To Address dialog box
Displays the addresses and symbol values of variables and functions.
Source window
Displays a source file or text file.
Source Search dialog box
Searches for a character string in a source file.
Assemble window
Disassembles the program and executes online assembly.
Assemble Search dialog box
Searches the contents of the Assemble window.
Memory window
Displays and modifies the contents of memory.
Memory Search dialog box
Searches the contents of the Memory window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
53
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-1 Window List
Window Name
54
Contents
Memory Fill dialog box
Initializes the memory contents with specified data.
Memory Copy dialog box
Copies the memory.
Memory Compare dialog box
Compares the memory.
Memory Compare Result dialog box
Displays the result of comparing the memory.
DMM dialog box
Sets addresses and data subject to DMM.
Watch window
Displays and modifies variables.
Quick Watch dialog box
Temporarily displays and changes the value of a variable.
Add Watch dialog box
Registers a variable to be displayed in the Watch window.
Change Watch dialog box
Changes a variable to be displayed in the Watch window.
Local Variable window
Displays and changes the local variable in the current function.
Stack Trace window
Displays and changes the stack contents of the current user program.
Register window
Displays and changes the contents of the registers (program registers
and system registers).
Register Select dialog box
Selects a register to be displayed in the Register window.
IOR window
Displays and changes the contents of the peripheral I/O registers.
IOR Select dialog box
Selects a peripheral I/O register or I/O port to be displayed in the IOR
window.
Add I/O Port dialog box
Registers an I/O port to be displayed in the IOR window.
Trace window
Displays trace results.
Trace Search dialog box
Searches trace data.
Trace Data Select dialog box
Selects items to be displayed in the Trace window.
Coverage window
Displays the coverage results.
Coverage Search dialog box
Searches coverage results.
Coverage-Clear dialog box
Clears the coverage results.
Coverage-Address dialog box
Selects the coverage measurement range as a space of 1 MB or more.
Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box
Sets a coverage efficiency measurement range.
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box
Displays the coverage results in terms of efficiency.
Event Manager
Displays, enables/disables, and deletes each event condition.
Event dialog box
Registers and displays event conditions.
Event Link dialog box
Registers and displays event link conditions.
Break dialog box
Registers, sets, and displays break event conditions.
Trace dialog box
Registers, sets, and displays trace event conditions.
Snap Shot dialog box
Registers, sets, and displays snapshot event conditions.
Stub dialog box
Registers, sets, and displays stub event conditions.
Timer dialog box
Displays execution time measurement result, and registers, sets, and
displays timer event conditions.
Timer Result dialog box
Displays execution time measurement results.
Delay Count dialog box
Sets the delay count of a trace.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-1 Window List
Window Name
7. 2
Contents
Software Break Manager
Display, enable or disable, and delete software breaks.
Reset Debugger dialog box
Initializes the ID850, target CPU, and symbol information.
About dialog box
Displays the version of the ID850.
Exit Debugger dialog box
Terminate the ID850.
Console window
Inputs commands.
Error/Warning dialog box
Displays error/warning messages.
Explanation of Windows
This section explains each debug window as follows:
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
55
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Window/dialog name
Briefly explains the function of the window or dialog box and points to be noted.
In addition, the display image of the window or dialog box is also illustrated.
Items of related operation are also explained.
Opening
Explains how to open the window or dialog box.
If two or more methods of opening are listed, the window or dialog box can be opened by any of them.
Explanation of each area
Explains items to be set to or displayed in each area of the window or dialog box.
Functions often used (right-click menu)
Explains the context menu that is displayed in the window when the right mouse button is clicked.
From the context menu, convenient functions often used in this window can be selected with a single
action (window only).
Function buttons
Explains the operation of each button in the window or dialog box.
Related operations
Explains the operation of a window or dialog box related to this window or dialog box.
56
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Main window
This window is automatically opened when the ID850 is started up and initialized. It exists on the screen
until the ID850 is terminated. Other windows are manipulated from this window. Execution of the user
program is controlled in this window.
Execution of the user program is controlled in the following three modes:
Source mode
Debugs the user program at the source level.
Instruction mode
Debugs the user program at the instruction level.
Auto mode
Automatically selects the source mode or instruction mode.
The auto mode is set when the debugger is started up.
Figure 7-1 Main Window
This section explains the following items:
• Toolbar
• Menu bar
• Window display area
• Status bar
Toolbar
The toolbar is a collection of buttons that can execute often-used commands with a single action. Each
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
57
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
button is graphically displayed to indicate the image of its function. This toolbar can be displayed in the
following two modes. The modes are selected in Debugger Option dialog box.
Figure 7-2 Toolbar with Only Graphics (default)
Figure 7-3 Toolbar with Graphics and Characters
Whether the toolbar is displayed or not can be specified by selecting [Option] -> [Tool Bar] from the menu
bar. This toolbar can be moved inside or outside the main window by dragging and dropping with the
mouse.
The meaning of each button on the toolbar is as follows. When the mouse cursor is placed on a button
of the toolbar, a tool hint pops up several seconds later.
Stop
ReGo
Go
Go
Ret
Step
Over
58
Stops execution of the user program.
Same function as [Run] -> [Stop] on the menu bar.
Resets the CPU and executes the user program.
Same function as [Run] -> [Restart] on the menu bar.
Executes the user program from the current PC without resetting the CPU.
Same function as [Run] -> [Go] on the menu bar.
Executes the user program without a break occurrence.
Same function as [Run] -> [Ignore break points and Go] on the menu bar.
The user program is real-time executed until execution returns.
Same function as [Run] -> [Return Out] on the menu bar
* This command is used for a function described in C language.
Step execution (executes instructions in the program one by one.)
If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are executed one by one.
Same function as [Run] -> [Step In] on the menu bar.
Next step execution (executes the program, assuming a function/call statement as one
step.)
If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are not executed on a step-by-step
basis.
Same function as [Run] -> [Next Over] on the menu bar.
Res
Resets the CPU.
Same function as [Run] -> [CPU Reset] on the menu bar.
Open
Opens View File Load dialog box.
Same function as [File] -> [Open...] on the menu bar.
Load
Opens Download dialog box.
Same function as [File] -> [Download...] on the menu bar.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Proj
Opens Project File Load dialog box.
Same function as [File] -> [Project] -> [Open...] on the menu bar.
Src
Displays the source text.
Opens Source window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Source Text] on the menu bar.
Asm
Displays the disassemble results.
Opens Assemble window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Assemble] on the menu bar.
Mem
Displays the contents of the memory.
Opens Memory window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Memory] on the menu bar.
Wch
Displays the watch contents.
Opens Watch window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Watch] on the menu bar.
Reg
Displays the register contents.
Opens Register window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Register] on the menu bar.
IOR
Displays the contents of the Peripheral I/O registers.
Opens IOR window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [I/O Register] on the menu bar.
Loc
Displays the local variable contents.
Opens Local Variable window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Local Variable] on the menu bar.
Stk
Displays the stack contents.
Opens Stack Trace window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Stack Trace] on the menu bar.
TrW
Displays the trace results.
Opens Trace window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Trace] on the menu bar.
Cov
Displays coverage measurement results.
Opens Coverage window.
Same function as [Browse] -> [Coverage] on the menu bar.
Mgr
Opens Event Manager.
Same function as [Event] -> [Event Manager] on the menu bar.
Evn
Registers and sets events.
Opens Event dialog box.
Same function as [Event] -> [Event...] on the menu bar.
Brk
Registers and sets break events.
Opens Break dialog box.
Same function as [Event] -> [Break...] on the menu bar.
Trc
Registers and sets trace events.
Opens Trace dialog box.
Same function as [Event] -> [Trace...] on the menu bar.
Tim
Registers and sets timer events.
Opens Timer dialog box.
Same function as [Event] -> [Timer...] on the menu bar.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
59
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Menu bar
The menu bar consists of the following menus:
(1) [File] menu
(2) [Edit] menu
(3) [View] menu
(4) [Option] menu
(5) [Run] menu
(6) [Event] menu
(7) [Browse] menu
(8) [Jump] menu
(9) [Window] menu
(10) [Help] menu
(1)
60
[File] menu
Open...
Loads a view file, source file, or text file.
Opens View File Load dialog box.
The operation differs depending on the extension of the file selected in the
dialog box.
Save As...
Saves the contents displayed on the current window to the file whose name is
specified.
Opens View File Save dialog box.
Close
Closes the current window.
Download...
Downloads a program.
Opens Download dialog box.
Load Module...
Lists the names of the files that have been downloaded.
Opens Load Module List dialog box.
Upload...
Uploads a program.
Opens Upload dialog box.
Project
Manipulates a project file.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2)
Open...
Opens a project file.
Opens Project File Load dialog box.
Save
Overwrites the current status to the project file currently being read to the
debugger.
Save As...
Saves the current status to a specified project file.
Opens Project File Save dialog box.
Debugger Reset...
Initializes the target CPU, symbols, and debugger.
Opens Reset Debugger dialog box.
Exit
Terminates the debugger.
Opens Exit Debugger dialog box.
(Open file)
Lists the names of the files opened.
[Edit] menu
Cut
Cuts a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer.
Copy
Copies a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the text cursor position.
Write in
Writes the modified contents to the target.
Restore
Cancels the modification.
Memory
Manipulates the memory contents.
Fill...
Initializes the memory.
Opens Memory Fill dialog box.
Copy...
Copies the memory.
Opens Memory Copy dialog box.
Compare...
Compares the memory.
Opens Memory Compare dialog box.
Modify...
Rewrites the memory contents in close to real time during user program
execution.
Opens DMM dialog box.
Edit Source
Opens the source file displayed in the active Source window with the editor
specified by the PM plus when the PM plus runs.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
61
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3)
[View] menu
This menu displays different items depending on the window that is active. The following items may be
displayed:
• Common items
• Source window-dedicated items
• Assemble window-dedicated items
• Memory window-dedicated items
• Watch window-dedicated items
• Register window-dedicated items
• IOR window-dedicated items
• Local Variable window-dedicated items, Stack Trace window-dedicated items
• Trace View window-dedicated items
• Coverage window-dedicated items
• Event Manager-dedicated items
Common items
62
Search...
Performs a search.
Opens the search dialog box corresponding to the current window.
Same operation as the <Search> button.
Move...
Moves the display position.
Opens the specification dialog box corresponding to the current window.
Quick Watch...
Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data.
Opens Quick Watch dialog box.
Add Watch...
Registers the specified data to the Watch window.
Opens Add Watch dialog box.
View Watch
Adds the selected data to the Watch window.
If the data is a symbol, it is added in accordance with the setting of Debugger
Option dialog box.
Change Watch...
Changes the data on the line selected by the Watch window.
Opens Change Watch dialog box.
This menu is valid only when a variable is selected in Watch window.
Delete Watch
Deletes the selected watch point from the Watch window. This menu is valid
only when a variable is selected in Watch window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Symbol...
Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the
specified symbol.
Opens Symbol To Address dialog box.
Source window-dedicated items
Create Break Event
Creates a break event by using the selected variable.
Break when Access
to this Variable
Creates a break event that can be accessed for read/write.
Break when Write to
this Variable
Creates a break event that can be accessed for write.
Break when Read
from this Variable
Creates a break event that can be accessed for read.
Clear
Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected variable.
Event?
Displays the event information of a line at the cursor position or a selected
variable name.
If an event is set, Event dialog box is opened.
Mix
Specifies whether the results of assembly are displayed in mixed display
mode, or not displayed.
Checked: Mixed display
Not checked: No display (default)
Assemble window-dedicated items
Event?
Displays the event information of the address at the cursor position.
If an event is set, Event dialog box is opened.
Memory window-dedicated items
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
63
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Bin
Displays binary numbers.
Oct
Displays octal numbers.
Dec
Displays decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays hexadecimal numbers (default).
Nibble
Displays in 4-bit units.
Byte
Displays in 8-bit units (default).
Half Word
Displays in 16-bit units.
Word
Displays in 32-bit units.
Ascii
Selects whether ASCII characters are displayed or not.
Checked: Displayed
Not checked: No display (default)
Little Endian
Displays in little endian (default).
Big Endian
Displays in big endian.
Watch window-dedicated items
Only "selected items" can be manipulated in the Watch window.
Create Break Event
Break when Access
to this Variable
Creates a break event that can be accessed for read/write.
Break when Write to
this Variable
Creates a break event that can be accessed for write.
Break when Read
from this Variable
Creates a break event that can be accessed for read.
Clear
Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected item.
Event?
64
Creates a break event by using the selected item.
Displays the event information of the variable selected. If an event is
set, Event dialog box is opened.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Bin
Displays binary numbers.
Oct
Displays octal numbers.
Dec
Displays decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays octal numbers.
String
Displays character strings.
Proper
Displays the default value of each variable.
Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of Debugger
Option dialog box (default).
Byte
Displays in 8-bit units.
Half Word
Displays in 16-bit units.
Word
Displays in 32-bit units.
Adaptive
Displays the default value of each variable.
Only this item is valid for a symbol in C language.
Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of Debugger
Option dialog box (default).
Up
Moves up one line.
Down
Moves down one line.
Compulsion Read
Forcibly reads the peripheral I/O registers that are disabled from being
read because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports
and I/O protect area added in Add I/O Port dialog box.
Register window-dedicated items
Bin
Displays binary numbers.
Oct
Displays octal numbers.
Dec
Displays decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays hexadecimal numbers (default).
Pick Up
Displays only the registers selected in Register Select dialog box.
Checked: Displays only the selected register.
Not checked: Displays all the registers (default).
Select...
Opens Register Select dialog box.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
65
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
IOR window-dedicated items
Bin
Displays binary numbers.
Oct
Displays octal numbers.
Dec
Displays decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays hexadecimal numbers (default).
Sort By Name
Displays in alphabetical order.
Sort By Address
Displays in address order (default).
Unsort
Does not sort.
Attribute
Displays or does not display an attribute field (Attribute).
Checked: Displayed (default)
Not checked: Not displayed
Pick Up
Displays only the registers selected in IOR Select dialog box.
Checked: Displays only the selected register.
Not checked: Displays all the registers (default).
Select...
Opens IOR Select dialog box.
Compulsion Read
Forcibly reads the peripheral I/O registers that are disabled from being
read because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports
and I/O protect area added in Add I/O Port dialog box.
Local Variable window-dedicated items, Stack Trace window-dedicated items
66
Bin
Displays binary numbers.
Oct
Displays octal numbers.
Dec
Displays decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays octal numbers.
String
Displays character strings.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Proper
Displays the default value of each variable (default).
Trace View window-dedicated items
Select...
Selects the contents to be displayed.
Opens Trace Data Select dialog box.
Pick Up
Performs the setting for pickup display.
Off
Does not pick up and display (default).
Search
Picks up and displays a frame that satisfies the search condition.
Snap
Picks up and displays a snap frame.
BRM1
Picks up and displays the first M1 fetch frame after a program branch.
Mix
Specifies whether the results of assembly are displayed in mixed display
mode, or not displayed.
Checked: Mixed display
Not checked: No display (default)
Window Synchronize
Sets linking between Trace window and the following windows.
A checked window is linked.
Source Text
Links Source window.
Assemble
Links Assemble window.
Memory
Links Memory window.
Coverage
Links Coverage window.
Coverage window-dedicated items
1Byte
Displays in 1-byte units (default).
64Bytes
Displays in 64-byte units.
1024Bytes
Displays in 1024-byte units.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
67
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Event Manager-dedicated items
(4)
68
Select All Event
Selects all the events registered to the Event Manager.
Delete Event
Deletes a selected event.
Sort By Name
Displays icons in the order of event names.
Sort By Kind
Displays icons in the order of event types.
Unsort
Does not sort icons (default).
Detail
Detailed display
Overview
List display (default)
[Option] menu
Tool Bar
Selects whether the tool bar is displayed (default) or not.
Status Bar
Selects whether the status bar is displayed (default) or not.
Button
Selects whether the buttons on each window are displayed (default) or not.
Source Mode
Executes step execution at the source level (in line units).
Instruction Mode
Executes step execution at the instruction level (in instruction units).
Auto Mode
Automatically selects step execution at the source level or step execution at
the instruction level (default).
Step execution is performed at the source level (in a mode other than mixed
display mode) if Source window is active. It is performed at the instruction
level if Assemble window is active. If neither window is active, step execution
is performed at the source level.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Configuration...
Sets the environment.
Opens Configuration dialog box.
Extended Option...
Sets extended functions.
Opens Extended Option dialog box.
Debugger Option...
Sets debugger options.
Opens Debugger Option dialog box.
Add I/O Port...
Adds user-defined I/O ports.
Opens Add I/O Port dialog box.
Trace Clear
Clears the trace data.
This item is displayed only when Trace window is active.
DMA Trace
Turns ON/OFF DMA trace (default: OFF).
If checked, DMA trace takes precedence.
* Displayed only when the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used.
Coverage
Opens the following dialog boxes related to coverage measurement.
Clear...
Clears the coverage measurement results.
Opens Coverage-Clear dialog box.
Select...
Selects the coverage measurement range as a space of 1 MB or more.
Opens Coverage-Address dialog box.
Condition...
Sets a coverage efficiency measurement condition.
Opens Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Efficiency...
Displays coverage efficiency.
Opens Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
Coverage ON
Turns ON/OFF coverage measurement (default: ON).
This item cannot be selected during user program execution.
Timer ON
Turns ON/OFF timer measurement (default: ON).
This item cannot be selected during user program execution.
The timer measuring Run-Break time cannot be stopped.
Tracer ON
Turns ON/OFF the tracer (default: ON).
This item cannot be selected during user program execution.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
69
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5)
70
[Run] menu
Restart
Resets the emulation CPU and executes the program.
Same operation as the ReGo button
Stop
Forcibly stops program execution.
Same operation as the Stop button
Go
Executes the program from the current PC.
Same operation as the Go button
Ignore break points and Go
Executes the program, ignoring break points being set.
Same operation as the GoN button
Return Out
The user program is real-time executed until execution returns.
Same operation as the Ret button
Note: This menu item is available only for a function described in C
language.
Step In
Executes the instructions in the program one by one (step execution).
If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are executed one by
one.
Same operation as the Step button
Next Over
Executes the instructions in the program one by one (Next step
execution).
If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are not executed on
a step-by-step basis.
Same operation as the Over button
Start From Here
Executes the program from the cursor position on Source window or
Assemble window (Start function).
Come Here
Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position in the
Source window or Assemble window (Come function).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Go & Go
Continues executing the program.
If a break occurs because a break condition is satisfied, the window is
updated and the program is executed again.
Each time a break has occurred, the same operation as clicking the
Go button is performed.
Slowmotion
Continues step execution.
Each time step execution has been performed, the window is updated
and then step execution is performed again.
Same operation as clicking the Step each time a break has occurred.
CPU Reset
Resets the emulation CPU.
Same operation as the Res button
Change PC
Sets the address at the cursor position in the Source window or
Assemble window to the PC.
Break Point
Sets or cancels a breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source
window or Assemble window.
Software Breakpoint
Sets or cancels a software breakpoint at the cursor position in the
Source window or Assemble window.
Delete All Breakpoints
Deletes all software breakpoints that are set.
Uncond. Trace ON
Validates unconditional trace so that trace can always be executed
during program execution (default).
The trace mode cannot be changed while the tracer is activated.
Cond. Trace ON
Validates conditional trace and traces in accordance with the trace
condition during program execution.
The trace mode cannot be changed while the tracer is activated.
Tracer Control Mode
Selects settings related to the tracer from the following menus:
Non Stop
Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the
oldestframe (default).
Full Stop
Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer.
Full Break
Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and program
execution
* Only IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A
Coverage Start/
Coverage Stop
Starts coverage measurement when it is stopped, or stops it when it is
in progress.
This item is invalid if the program is not being executed or if the
coverage function is OFF (if [Option] -> [Coverage ON] is not
checked). Immediately after program execution has been started with
the coverage function ON, coverage measurement is in progress.
Timer Start/
Timer Stop
Starts timer measurement when it is stopped, or stops it when it is in
progress.
This item is invalid if the program is not being executed, if a timer event
is not used, and if the timer function is OFF (if [Option] -> [Timer ON] is
not checked). Immediately after program execution has been started
with the timer function ON, timer measurement is in progress.
Tracer Start/
Tracer Stop
Starts the tracer when it is stopped, or stops it when it is in progress.
This item is invalid if the program is not being executed and if the trace
function is OFF (if [Option] -> [Tracer ON] is not checked).
Immediately after program execution has been started with the tracer
function ON, the tracer is executed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
71
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(6)
72
[Event] menu
Event Manager
Manages various event conditions.
Opens Event Manager.
Same operation as the Mgr button
Software Break Manager
Manages software break event conditions.
Opens the Software Break Manager.
Event...
Registers an event condition.
Opens Event dialog box.
Same operation as the Evn button
Event Link...
Registers an event link condition.
Opens Event Link dialog box.
Break...
Registers and sets a break condition.
Opens Break dialog box.
Same operation as the Brk button
Trace...
Registers and sets a trace event condition.
Opens Trace dialog box.
Same operation as the Trc button
Snap Shot...
Registers and sets a snap event condition.
Opens Snap Shot dialog box.
Stub...
Registers and sets a stub event condition.
Opens Stub dialog box.
Timer...
Registers and sets a timer event condition.
Opens Timer dialog box.
Same operation as the Tim button
Delay Count...
Sets a delay count and displays the delay value.
Opens Delay Count dialog box.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(7)
[Browse] menu
Source Text
Displays a source text.
Opens Source window.
Same operation as the Src button
If there is a Source Text window already open in the active status, it is
opened in the static status.
Assemble
Displays the disassemble results.
Opens Assemble window.
Same operation as the Asm button
If there is a Assemble window already open in the active status, it is
opened in the static status.
Memory
Displays the contents of the memory.
Opens Memory window.
Same operation as the Mem button
If there is a Memory window already open in the active status, it is
opened in the static status.
Watch
Displays the watch contents.
Opens Watch window.
Same operation as the Wch button
Register
Displays the register contents.
Opens Register window.
Same operation as the Reg button
I/O Register
Displays the contents of the Peripheral I/O registers.
Opens IOR window.
Same operation as the IOR button
Local Variable
Displays the local variable.
Opens Local Variable window.
Same operation as the Loc button
Stack Trace
Displays the stack trace results.
Opens Stack Trace window.
Same operation as the Stk button
Trace
Displays the trace results.
Opens Trace window.
Same operation as the TrW button
Coverage
Displays coverage measurement results.
Opens Coverage window.
Same operation as the Cov button.
Console
Opens Console window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
73
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Others
(8)
(9)
[Jump] menu
Source Text
Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value
selected in the current window as the jump destination address.
If no line information is at the jump destination address, however, you cannot
jump.
Opens Source window.
If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Assemble
Disassembles and displays the results from the jump destination address
specified by the data value selected in the current window.
Opens Assemble window.
If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
Memory
Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by
the data value selected in the current window.
Opens Memory window.
If an active Memory windowis open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Coverage
Displays coverage measurement results from the jump destination address
specified by the data value selected in the current window.
Opens Coverage window.
If an active Coverage windowis open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
[Window] menu
New Window
74
Displays other windows.
Displays a user-defined window list.
Opens a new window displaying the same contents as those of the current
window. This menu is valid only when the current window is Source window,
Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Cascade
Cascade display of the windows in the Main window.
Tile
Tile display of the windows in the Main window.
Arrange Icons
Rearranges the icons in the Main window.
Close All
Closes all windows, except the Main window.
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Active
Sets the window in the active status.
If the window is already in the active status, a check mark is shown on the left of
this item.
Static
Sets the window in the static status.
If the window is already in the static status, a check mark is shown on the left of
this item.
(Open Window)
Lists the windows that are open.
The window with the check mark shown on the side of the figure is the current
window. By selecting a window name, the selected window is used as the
current window.
(10) [Help] menu
ID850 Help
Displays the help of ID850 .
Command Reference
Opens the Help window of COMMAND REFERENCE.
Main Window Help
Displays the help of the Main window.
Current Window Help
Displays the help of the current window.
About...
Displays the version of the debugger.
Opens About dialog box.
Window display area
This area (at the center) displays various debug windows.
The displayed window can be changed in size or an icon can be created in this area.
Status bar
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the window and indicates the status of the debugger and Incircuit emulator.
While the user program is being executed, the status bar is displayed in red.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
75
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be selected by selecting [Option] -> [Status Bar] from the
menu bar.
Figure 7-4 Status Bar
(1) Program name
Displays the program file name indicated by the PC value.
Source name
Displays the source file name indicated by the PC value.
Line number
Displays the line number indicated by the PC value.
(2) Function name
Displays the function name indicated by the PC value.
(3) PC value
Displays the current PC value.
(4) CPU status
Displays the status of the CPU (target device).
(If there are two or more CPU statuses, they delimited with '|' and displayed.)
STANDBY...Stanby mode
RESET...Reset status
POW OFF...Power is not supplied to the target.
(5) IE status
Displays the status of the in-circuit emulator.
(If there are two or more the statuses, they delimited with '|' and displayed.)
RUN...User program execution in progress (the color of the status bar
changes).
STEP...Step execution in progress
TRC...Tracer operating
TIM..Timer operating
COV...Coverage operation in progress
BREAK...Break occurring.
(6) Break Cause
Displays Table 7-2 Break Cause.
(7) STEP mode
Displays the step execution mode.
Displays that the following modes are selected from the [Option] menu:
SRC...Source mode
INST...Instruction mode
AUTO...Automatic mode
(8) Key input mode
Displays the key input mode.
INS... Insertion mode
OVR...Overwrite mode
The Memory window is fixed to OVR mode.
Table 7-2 Break Cause
Display
76
Meaning
Manual Break
Forced break
Temporary Break
Temporary break
Event Break
Break by event
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-2 Break Cause
Display
Meaning
Software Break
Software break
Trace Full Break
Break due to trace full
* Other than IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A
Non Map Break
Non-mapped area is accessed.
Write Protect
An attempt has been made to write to a write-protected area.
IOR Illegal
An illegal access is made to a peripheral I/O register.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
77
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Configuration dialog box
This dialog box is used to display and set the operating environment of the in-circuit emulator.
This dialog box is automatically displayed after the debugger is started up.
To use the debugger, the operating environment of the in-circuit emulator must be first set in this dialog
box.
However, no setting is required to read a project as the results of reading the project file are reflected in
this dialog box.
For details of the mapping function, refer to "Mapping function".
Caution1 The following message may be displayed if the <OK> button on the Configuration dialog box
is clicked when the debugger is started up.
If no target is connected, click the <OK> button.
Caution2 Turn on the power to the target if even one of the following items is set in the Configuration
dialog box.
・ If Target is selected in Clock (CPU clock source selection area).
・ If mapping to Target is specified in Memory Mapping (mapping setting area).
In this case, a message prompting you to turn on the power is displayed. Turn on the power
to the target and click the <OK> button. If power is not turned on, the following message is
displayed and the Configuration dialog box is displayed again.
In this case, perform the setting again, press the reset button of the in-circuit emulator, and
click the <OK> button.
78
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 7-5 Configuration Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Setting of memory mapping
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• Changing the register values necessary for accessing the external memory
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Automatically when the debugger is started up
• Select [Option] -> [Configuration...] from the menu bar.
(or press Alt+O, and C in that order)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
79
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Configuration dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Chip (Emulation CPU selection area)
(2) Internal ROM/RAM (internal ROM/RAM setting area)
(3) Programmable I/O Area (programmable I/O area address setting area)
(4) Clock (CPU clock source selection area)
(5) Emulation Memory (wait selection area)
(6) Mask (mask setting area)
(7) Memory Mapping (mapping setting area)
(1)
Chip (Emulation CPU selection area)
This area is used to select the Emulation CPU.
Only the chip names registered to a registry by the DFINST utility are listed.
Specify a chip name from the drop-down list under Name.
A chip name can be specified only when the debugger is started up. The chip name selected at the
previous startup is selected by default. If the chip name is not stored, the top chip name that is
registered is selected by default.
(2)
Internal ROM/RAM (internal ROM/RAM setting area)
This area is used to set the size of the internal RAM and internal ROM of the emulation CPU.
The default value is automatically displayed with "*" suffixed, when Chip is selected.
To change the size of the internal RAM and internal ROM, select the size from the drop-down list under
Internal RAM and Internal ROM.
If the selected size cannot be implemented because of the constraints of the in-circuit emulator, the
debugger automatically adjusts the size (therefore, a size larger than that previously specified may be
displayed when the Configuration dialog box is displayed again).
The settable sizes are as follows:
80
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-3 Settable Sizes as Internal ROM/RAM
Emulator used
Internal ROM
Both Alignment and Settable Range
(KByte)
Internal RAM
Both Alignment and Settable Range
(Byte)
IE-703002-MC
0, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
1024, 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192,
10240, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576,
28672
IE-703102-MC
0, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
1024, 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192,
10240, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576,
28672, 36864, 45056, 53248, 61440
IE-V850E-MC or
IE-V850E-MC-A
IE-V850ES-G1
0, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024
4096, 12288, 28672, 61440
If the internal RAM size is changed, the internal RAM's start address shifts as shown below:
Table 7-4 Size of Internal RAM and Start Address
Types
V85X, V850/XXX
V850E/MS1
V850E other than
the above
Internal RAM Size (Bytes)
Start Address of Internal RAM
1 to 4096
0xFFE000
to 12288
0xFFC000
to 28672
0xFF8000
1 to 4096
0x3FFE000
to 12288
0x3FFC000
to 28672
0x3FF8000
to 61440
0x3FF0000
1 to 4096
Fixed to 0xFFFC000
to 12288
to 28672
to 61440
NB85E core
(64M model)
NB85E core
(256M model)
1 to 4096
0x3FFE000
to 12288
0x3FFC000
to 28672
0x3FF8000
to 61440
0x3FF0000
1 to 4096
0xFFFE000
to 12288
0xFFFC000
to 28672
0xFFF8000
to 61440
0xFFF0000
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
81
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-4 Size of Internal RAM and Start Address
Types
V850ES
Internal RAM Size (Bytes)
1 to 4096
Start Address of Internal RAM
Depends on the device
to 12288
to 28672
to 61440
(3)
Programmable I/O Area (programmable I/O area address setting area)
This area is used to specify usage of the programmable I/O area and the start address.
If programmable I/O is used for a device that supports the programmable I/O, the start address can be
specified via keyboard input when the check box is checked. The address is aligned to 16 KB.
If the device has an extended I/O area whose address is fixed, the address setting and the check are
executed automatically. To use the programmable I/O area or expansion I/O area, that area must be
mapped as Target.
(4)
Clock (CPU clock source selection area)
This area is used to select a clock source to be input to the emulation CPU. The clock source can be
selected only when the IE-V850ES-G1 is connected to the ID850. If the IE-703002-MC is connected to
the ID850, this area is always fixed to Internal and dimmed because the clock is changed by a jumper
setting.
Internal
Uses the clock on the in-circuit emulator as the CPU clock.
Target
Uses the clock of the target as the CPU clock.
If Target is selected and if the power to the target is OFF, "Wrong Target
Status (Power Off)" is displayed.
Text area (MHz)
Specify the number of clocks by inputting from the keyboard or selecting from the drop-down list.
The relationship between the system clock frequency (phi) and the clock frequency input to the
emulation CPU (fxx) is as follows:
Direct mode
82
phi = 1/2 x fxx
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
PLL mode
phi = 5 x fxx (multiplied by 5)
phi = fxx (multiplied by 1)
Specify the fcpu clock frequency for the V850/SA1 and V850/SBx.
(5)
Emulation Memory (wait selection area)
This area is used to select a wait signal when the emulation memory (in-circuit emulator alternate
ROM/RAM) is accessed.
This area can be used only when the IE-703002-MC is connected to the ID850.
For IE-703102-MC
Wait Types
Wait Mask
1 Wait Access
(default)
Target Wait
Emulation Memory Access
External Memory Access
Data wait
Fixed to 0 waits,
WAIT signal is masked.
Fixed to 0 waits,
WAIT signal is masked.
Idle state
Depends on the setting of the
BCC register.
Depends on the setting of
the BCC register.
Data wait
Fixed to 1 wait,
WAIT signal is masked.
Depends on the setting of
the DWC register and the
status of the WAIT signal.
However, the WAIT signal
can be masked.
Idle state
Depends on the setting of the
BCC register.
Depends on the setting of
the BCC register.
Data wait
Depends on the setting of the
DWC register and the status
of the WAIT signal.
Depends on the setting of
the DWC register and the
status of the WAIT signal.
Idle state
Depends on the setting of the
BCC register.
Depends on the setting of
the BCC register.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
83
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
For IE-V850E-MC, IE-V850E-MC-A, IE-V850ES-G1
Wait Types
0 Wait Access
1 Wait Access
(default)
DWC0, DWC1,
BCC
(6)
Emulation Memory Access
External Memory Access
Data wait
Fixed to 0 waits,
WAIT signal is masked.
Depends on the setting of the
DWC register. WAIT signal is
masked.
Idle wait
Fixed to 0 waits.
Depends on the setting of the
ASC or AWC register.
Idle state
Fixed to 0 waits.
Depends on the setting of the
BCC register.
Data wait
Fixed to 1 waits,
WAIT signal is masked.
Depends on the setting of the
DWC register and the status of
the WAIT signal. The WAIT
signal can be masked.
Idle wait
Fixed to 0 waits.
Depends on the setting of the
ASC or AWC register.
Idle state
Fixed to 0 waits.
Depends on the setting of the
BCC register.
Data wait
Depends on the setting of the
DWC register. 1wait when 0
waits are set, and WAIT is
masked.
Depends on the setting of the
DWC register and the status of
the WAIT signal.
Idle wait
Fixed to 0 waits.
Depends on the setting of the
ASC or AWC register.
Idle state
Depends on the setting of the
BCC register.
Depends on the setting of the
BCC register.
Mask (mask setting area)
This area specifies a mask for the signal sent from the target.
The signal of the masked pin is not input to the in-circuit emulator.
Only mask pins when the operation of the target is unstable at the debugging stage.
The maskable pins are NMI, RESET, WAIT, HLDRQ, STOP, MODE0, 1, and 2.
When the MODE 0, 1, 2 pin is masked, one of the operation modes described below can be selected.
The mode displayed depends on the definition in the device file.
Examples are as follows.
For V850
84
Single Chip Mode
Single-chip mode (V851/852/853)
Single-chip mode 1 (V854)
Single Chip Mode 2
Single-chip mode 2 (V851/852/853)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
ROM Less Mode 1
ROMless mode (V851/852/853)
ROMless mode(V854)
ROM Less Mode 2
ROMless mode 1 (V854)
For V850E/MS1
Single Chip Mode 0
Single-chip mode
Single Chip Mode 1
Single-chip mode
ROM Less Mode 1
ROMless mode with 8-bit external bus
ROM Less Mode 0
ROMless mode with 16-bit external bus
For V850E/MA1, V850E/IA1
(7)
Mode00
ROMless mode 0
Mode01
ROMless mode 1
Mode02
Single-chip mode 0
Mode03
Single-chip mode 1
Memory Mapping (mapping setting area)
This area is used to set mapping by specifying the access size, memory attribute, and address.
Access Size (selection of memory access size)
Selects memory access size.
Because these settings specify the access size of the debugger software, the hardware of the external
bus operates in accordance with the settings of the MODE pin or the I/O register.
8Bit
Accesses memory with ld.b instruction/st.b instruction.
16Bit
Accesses the memory with the ld.h instruction/st.h instruction.
32Bit
Accesses the memory with the ld.w instruction/st.w instruction.
Memory Attribute (mapping attribute specification)
The following mapping attributes can be selected. Select a mapping attribute according to the usage
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
85
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(refer to "Mapping function").
Emulation ROM
Selects the in-circuit emulator alternate ROM.
Emulation RAM
Selects the in-circuit emulator alternate RAM.
Target
Selects the target memory.
I/O Protect
Selects the I/O protect area.
This area can be set only inside the area which is set as Target.
Caution
The area set as I/O Protect cannot be read unless it has been registered as an I/O port in the
IOR window, or registered in the Watch window. If it is necessary to read this area, execute a
forcible read in these windows.
Mapping Address (mapping address specification)
Specify the address to be mapped.
Input the higher and lower addresses from the keyboard.
Setting of memory mapping
Specify Memory Attribute and Mapping Address and then click the <Add> button.
-> The attribute of Memory Attribute, address range of Memory Mapping, and memory mapping
corresponding to the data of the bus width are set and displayed on a list.
For mapping attributes other than I/O Protect, the mapping units are adjusted when the <Add> button
is clicked. If the mapping unit does not match, the minimum settable range including the specified
address is mapped.
The mapping unit is as follows:
Table 7-5 Mapping Unit in Configuration Dialog Box
Mapping Area
86
Mapping Unit
I/O Protect
1 byte
Target
For V85X, V850/XXX
Units of 1 MB inside the area of 0x100000 to 0xFFFFFF
For V850E/MS1
Units of 1 MB in the area of 0x100000 to 0x3FFFFF, excluding the
internal ROM area (1 MB) and the reserved area (32 MB).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-5 Mapping Unit in Configuration Dialog Box
Mapping Area
Emulation ROM
Emulation RAM
Caution
Mapping Unit
For V85X, V850/XXX
Units of 64 KB in one 1 MB area inside the Target area which is set in the
above area.
For ROMless products, or for when ROMless mode has been selected,
they can each be mapped in units of 64 KB in the 1 MB area of 0 to
0xFFFFFF, which is separate to the above 1 MB area.
For V850E/MS1
Units of 64 KB in two 1 MB areas inside the above area.
For ROMless products, or for when ROMless mode has been selected,
mapping can be performed in the same way in the area of 0 to
0x3FFFFFF, excluding the reserved area (32 MB).
For other V850E and V850ES
Each memory can be mapped in units of 1 MB in the area of 0 to
0x3FFFFFF, excluding the internal ROM area (1 MB) and the reserved
area (32 MB). (Max. 4)
For ROMless products, or for when ROMless mode has been selected,
mapping can be performed in the same way in the area of 0 to
0x3FFFFFF. However, the start address of mapping may vary
depending on the device.
When the external memory is mapped, change the register values necessary for accessing
the external memory (refer to "Changing the register values necessary for accessing the
external memory").
Deleting memory mapping
Select mapping to be deleted from the list and click the <Delete> button.
-> This deletes the selected mapping.
Function buttons
OK
Validates the current environment.
Sets the environment and closes this dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the previous environment settings status before this dialog box was
opened.
Project...
Opens the Project File Load dialog box. If an error occurs while a project file is being
opened or read, the debugger can no longer continue and is terminated.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
87
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Related operations
Changing the register values necessary for accessing the external memory
When the external memory is being mapped, change the register values necessary for accessing the
external memory using the IOR window or by hook procedure before downloading.
For details of changing register values by hook procedure, refer to "Hook Procedure" described in the
COMMAND REFERENCE.
The registers to be changed are as follows.
Table 7-6 Registers Necessary for Accessing External Memory
<When IE-703002-MC is used> (Operation mode of device is single-chip mode)
Register Name
MM
Caution
Setting
Sets memory extension mode
If the debugger is used with the IE-703017-MC-EM1 or IE-703037-MC-EM1, the MM register
cannot be set.
<When IE-703102-MC is used> (Operation mode of device is single-chip mode 0)
Register Name
Setting
MM
Sets memory extension mode
PMC8
Sets each of CS7/RAS7, CS6/RA6, CS5/RAS5/IORD, CS4/
RAS4/IOW, CS3/RAS3, CS2/RAS2, CS1/RAS1, CS0/RAS0
to output mode.
PMC9
Sets HLDRQ to input, and each of HLDAK, OE, BCYST, WE,
RD, UWR/UCAS, LWR/LCAS to output mode.
PMCX
Sets CLKOUT to output, WAIT to input, REFRQ to output
mode.
<When IE-V850E-MC(-A) is used> (Operation mode of device is single-chip mode 0)
Register Name
Setting
When device is used with IE-703116-MC-EM1
88
PMCAH
Sets A25 to A16 to output mode
PMCAL
Sets A15 to A0 to output mode
PMCDL
Sets D15 to D0 to output mode
PMCCS
Sets each CS7, CS6/RAS6, CS5/IORD, CS4/RAS4, CS3/
RAS3, CS2/IOWR, CS1/RAS1, CS0 to output mode.
PMCCT
Sets each of BCYST, OE, WE, RD, UCAS/UWR/UDQM,
LRAS/LWR/LQDM to output mode.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
<When IE-V850E-MC(-A) is used> (Operation mode of device is single-chip mode 0)
Register Name
Setting
PMCCM
Sets SELFREF to output, REFRQ to output, HLDRQ to input,
HLDAK to output, CLKOUT/BUSCLK to output, and WAIT to
input mode.
PMCCD
Sets each of UBE/SDRAS, LBE/SDCAS, SDCLK, SDCKE to
output mode.
When device is used with IE-703116-MC-EM1
PMCAH
Sets A25 to A16 to output mode.
PMCAL
Sets A15 to A0 to output mode.
PMCDH
Sets A25 to A16 to output mode.
PMCDL
Sets AD15 to AD0 to output mode.
PMCCT
Sets ASTB to output, RD to input, UWR to output, and LWR to
output mode.
PMCCM
Sets HLDRQ to input, HLDAK to output, CLKOUT to output,
and WAIT to input mode.
When downloading to external memory SDRAM
Register Name
Setting
SDRAM configuration register
SCR1, SCR3, SCR4, SCR6
Refresh control register
RFS1, RFS3, RFS4, RFS6
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
89
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Extended Option dialog box
This dialog box is used to display and set the extended options of the debugger.
Figure 7-6 Extended Option Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Option] ->[Extended Option...] from the menu bar.
(or press Alt+O, and X in that order.)
Explanation of each area
The Extended Option dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Trace Timetag Count Rate (trace time tag counter division ratio selection area)
(2) Timer Count Rate (timer count rate setting area)
(3) Add Up Timetag (total time tag specification area)
90
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) RAM Monitor (real-time RAM monitor setting area)
(5) Break condition (break mode setting area)
(6) On Mouse Click (default break selection area)
(7) Break Sound (beep sound specification area)
(8) Verify Check (verify specification area)
(9) Flash Self Mode (Flash self mode setting area)
(1)
Trace Timetag Count Rate (trace time tag counter division ratio selection area)
This area is used to set the division ratio of the counter used for time tag display in Trace window.
If the division ratio is set, the number of clocks necessary for counting up the counter displayed for time
tag is changed.
The division ratio differs depending on the IE connected.
Connected IE
(2)
Division Ratio
IE-703002-MC
1(default value), 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1K, 4K,
8K,16K, 64K, 256K, 1M
IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or
IE-V850E-MC-A,
IE-V850ES-G1
1(default value), 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1K, 2K, 4K,
8K, 16K, 32K, 64K, 128K, 256K, 512K, ,1M, 2M, 4M, 8M,
16M, 32M, 64M, 128M, 256M, 512M, 1G, 2G
Timer Count Rate (timer count rate setting area)
This area is used to set the timer count rate.
The rate may be 1 (default), 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32.
Note that if IE-703102-MC is used, "32" is not displayed by the restriction of the in-circuit emulator
(3)
Add Up Timetag (total time tag specification area)
This area is used to specify whether time tags of trace data are totaled or not.
This check box is not checked by default, and the time tags are not totaled.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
91
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4)
RAM Monitor (real-time RAM monitor setting area)
Realtime Readout (dummy real-time RAM monitor specification)
Specifies whether the RAM is monitored in real time or dummy real time (refer to"Real-Time RAM
Sampling Function").
Checked
Monitors the RAM in real time (default).
Specify a start address in Start Address.
Not checked
Monitors the RAM in dummy real time.
Specify a sampling range in Area.
Area (real-time RAM sampling range specification)
Specify the address range in which dummy real-time RAM sampling is to be performed.
The variables and data allocated to this range can be displayed in close to real time in the Watch
window and Memory window.
Whole
Whole memory space.
If this is specified, the user program is stopped for a long time if many
windows are open because the ranged memory read is wide.
IRAM+IOR
Internal RAM area and peripheral I/O register area
Start Address (real-time internal RAM sampling range specification)
Specify the start address of real-time internal RAM sampling.
For the range in which real-time sampling can be performed, refer to "Table 7-7 Address Range and
Valid Size".
The variables and data allocated to this range can be displayed in close to real time in the Watch
window and Memory window.
The address range, valid size, and start address are as follows:
Table 7-7 Address Range and Valid Size
Connected ID
Area
Alignment of Start
Address
Valid Size
IE-703002-MC, or IE703102-MC
Internal RAM only
1KB
1 KB alignment
IE-V850E-MC or IEV850E-MC-A,or IEV850ES-G1
Unlimited
1KB
1 KB alignment
Redraw Interval (real-time internal RAM sampling time specification)
92
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
This area is used to specify the sampling time (msec) for real-time internal RAM sampling.
Any 1 KB in the internal RAM area can be sampled in real time during emulation (the display range is
specified by Start Address).
The variables and data allocated to this range can be displayed in close to real time in the Watch
window and Memory window.
The sampling time can be specified in a range of 0 to 65500 and in units of 100 msec. If 0 is specified,
or if this area is blank, the sampling time is not displayed in real time.
(5)
Break condition (break mode setting area)
This area is used to select whether a break occurs before or after the instruction of a breakpoint is
executed. This setting affects only hardware breaks. This area is invalid if the IE-V850E-MC or IEV850E-MC-A is connected.
(6)
Before
Sets a Run event as an event before executing (default).
The event occurs before the instruction is executed.
After
Sets a Run event as an event after executing.
The event occurs after the instruction is executed.
On Mouse Click (default break selection area)
This area is used to select whether a software breakpoint or hardware breakpoint is set as the default
breakpoint if a breakpoint is set in the point mark area by clicking the mouse button in the Source
windowor Assemble window.
(7)
Break Sound (beep sound specification area)
This area is used to specify whether a beep sound is issued upon the occurrence of a break.
If the check box is checked, a beep sound is issued when a break occurs (default).
(8)
Verify Check (verify specification area)
This area is used to specify whether a verify check is performed when data has been written to
memory.
If the check box is checked, a verify check is performed when download, memory fill, or memory copy
is executed (default). A verify check is also performed when a variable or data is changed in Watch
window or Memory window and is written to memory.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
93
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(9)
Flash Self Mode (Flash self mode setting area)
This area is used to set the flash self mode (default: Off).
In the flash self mode, since one access event, one execution event, and one event link are reserved,
the number of the events which can be used decreases.
When "On" is checked, all events will once become invalid, if at least one event is valid.
Function buttons
94
OK
Validates the settings and closes this dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Debugger Option dialog box
This dialog box is used to display and set the extended options of the debugger.
Figure 7-7 Debugger Option Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Option] -> [Debugger Option...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+O, and G in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Debugger Option dialog box consists of the following areas:
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
95
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Source Path (source path specification area)
(2) Default Extension (default extension specification area)
(3) Open File History (open file history setting area)
(4) Font (display font setting area)
(5) Project File (project file setting area)
(6) Tool Bar Pictures (toolbar display button setting area)
(7) Kanji (Kanji code setting area)
(8) Tab Size (tab size setting area)
(9) Startup Routine (start-up symbol setting area)
(10) DisAssemble (offset display setting area)
(11) Watch Default (watch symbol setting area)
(1)
Source Path (source path specification area)
This area is used to specify the directory in which a source file or text file is searched.
A path can be input from the keyboard or set by the <Browse...> button. A relative path can also be
specified.
The directory that is the basis of a relative path is displayed on the right of Base:. The base directory is
determined in the following sequence:
• Directory to which the project file has been loaded
• Directory to which a load module or hex file has been loaded last
• Current directory of Windows
To delimit paths, use ";" (semicolon) or "," (comma).
Japanese characters can be specified in a source path (Japanese version only).
Example: If a source is in the following directory
B:\src
C:\asm
The source path is specified as follows:
B:\src; C:\asm
Clicking the <Browse...> button displays the Add Source Path dialog box shown in Figure 7-8, and a
source path can be added.
Reference Immediately after the Debugger Option dialog box has been opened, the base directory is
selected and opened
If the selected directory has already been set for the source path, a source path is not added.
96
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 7-8 Add Source path Dialog Box
(2)
Default Extension (default extension specification area)
Delimit extensions with " " (blank),";" (semicolon) or "," (comma).
(3)
Source File
Set the extension of a source file that is displayed when the Browse
dialog box is opened by selecting [File] -> [Open...] from the menu
bar.
The default extension is "*.C, *.S".
Load Module
Set the extension of a load module that is displayed when Download
dialog box is opened.
The default extension is "*.OUT".
Open File History (open file history setting area)
This area is used to set the number of histories (0 to 10) of the open file displayed in the bottom field of
the [File] menu. If 0 is set, no history is displayed on the menu.
The default value is 4.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
97
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4)
Font (display font setting area)
This area is used to specify the font displayed on the Source window. Clicking the <Font> button
opens the Font dialog box in which the font to be displayed and its size can be set.
(5)
Project File (project file setting area)
This area is used to set automatic saving and loading of the project file.
Auto save
Sets whether the project file is automatically saved at the ID850 termination.
On
Automatically saves the project file at the ID850 termination.
Off
Does not automatically save the project file at the ID850 termination.
Query
Displays the Exit Debugger dialog box at the ID850 termination
(default).
Auto Load
Sets whether the project file is automatically loaded at the ID850 start up.
On
Automatically loads the project file at the ID850 start up.
Sets whether the Load Project File is automatically loaded
Off
Does not automatically loads the project file at the ID850 start up.
(default)
Load Project File
Specify the project file to be loaded automatically.
This item can be specified only when On is specified for Auto Load.
Set a project file name by inputting from the keyboard or clicking the <Browse...> button. Clicking the
<Browse...> button displays Browse dialog box.
98
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(6)
Tool Bar Pictures (toolbar display button setting area)
This area sets the buttons to be displayed on the toolbar.
(7)
Pictures and Text
Displays a button on which a graphic and character are displayed.
Pictures only
Displays a button with only graphic (default).
Kanji (Kanji code setting area)
This area is used to specify Kanji codes to be displayed in the Source window and Trace window.
Kanji codes can be specified only on the Japanese Windows.
(8)
Sjis
Uses SJIS as Kanji codes (default).
Euc
Uses EUC as Kanji codes.
Tab Size (tab size setting area)
This area is used to set the tab size for each extension when files are displayed.
Extension
Set an extension. Input an extension from the keyboard, or select one from the drop-down list.
Tab Size
Select the tab size. Select how many spaces are displayed as a tab code.
2
Displays two spaces.
4
Displays four spaces.
8
Displays eight spaces.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
99
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Tab List
Displays the tab size set for each extension.
To change the tab size setting,
select Extension and Tab Size and click the <Add> button.
The selected tab size is changed to the tab size set in Extension.
To delete the tab size setting,
select the setting to be deleted from Tab List and click <Delete> button.
The setting of the extension currently selected will be deleted.
(9)
Startup Routine (start-up symbol setting area)
This area is used to specify the first address and end address of the text area (code area) of the startup routine by symbols.
Specify the symbol of the first address as Begin label, and the symbol of the last address as End label.
In this way, the source file can be automatically opened if an object file in the load module format is
downloaded in Download dialog box. Specify the source file to be displayed at this time as main( )
label, as a display start symbol.
If the specified symbol is not correct, the source file cannot be opened until the PC reaches the
address range of the corresponding source file. In addition, the start-up routine cannot be skipped by
step execution.
Begin label
Symbol of first address (default: _start)
End label
Symbol of end address (default: _startend)
main() label
Display start symbol (default: _main)
Caution
Be sure to specify this area. If this area is blank, the dialog box cannot be closed.
(10) DisAssemble (offset display setting area)
Performs the setting for disassemble display.
Show Offset
Specifies whether an offset (symbol + offset) is displayed during disassemble display.
When the offset is not displayed, only a symbol that matches a numeric value is displayed, if any. If no
matching symbol is found, the numeric value is displayed as a hexadecimal number unchanged.
100
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Label
Specifies whether the offset is displayed in the Label field.
This check box is not checked in the default condition, and the offset
is not displayed.
Mnemonic
Specifies whether the offset is displayed in the Mnemonic field.
This check box is checked in the default condition, and the offset is
displayed.
Register Name (register name display selection area)
This area is used to select the method of displaying register names in mnemonics during disassemble
display.
Function Name
Displays register names as function names or nicknames.
Absolute Name
Displays register names as absolute names.
(11) Watch Default (watch symbol setting area)
This area is used to specify a symbol to be watched.
Size (default size specification)
Sets the display size of data if [Adaptive] is selected in Watch window.
Byte
8-bit display(default)
Half Word
16-bit display
Word
32-bit display
Radix (default radix specification)
Sets the default radix in which data is to be displayed if [Proper] is specified in Watch window.
Hex
Displays data in hexadecimal numbers (default).
Dec
Displays data in decimal numbers.
Oct
Displays data in octal numbers.
Bin
Displays data in binary numbers.
String
Character string
Show Variable Type (display/non-display of variable type)
Selects whether the type of a variable is displayed or not.
On
Displays the type of a variable.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
101
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Off
Does not display the type of a variable (default).
Language (display/non-display of type of variable)
Selects the display format of the base number.
With the V800, the display format is fixed to C-like and cannot be selected.
C
Displays a C-like base number (default).
ASM
Displays an assembly language-like base number.
Function buttons
102
OK
Validates the settings and closes this dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Font dialog box
This dialog box is used to select the font to be displayed in the Source window.
Figure 7-9 Font Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Click the <Font> button in Debugger Option dialog box.
Explanation of each area
The Font dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Font Face: (font name specification area)
(2) Size: (font size specification area)
(3) Sample (sample display area)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
103
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Font Face: (font name specification area)
This area is used to select a font from the fonts currently usable.
Only fonts with equal width (fonts with a constant stroke width and a fixed pitch) are enumerated.
When a font name is selected from the list, the font name is displayed in the text box, and the font size
that can be used with that font is displayed under Size.
(2)
Size: (font size specification area)
This area is used to specify the font size.
On the drop-down list, the font size usable for the font specified in Font Face is displayed in point units.
When the font size is selected from the drop-down list, the selected font size is displayed in this area.
The font size can also be directly input to the text box from the keyboard.
(3)
Sample (sample display area)
This area displays a sample character string of the specified font and size.
Function buttons
104
OK
Changes the font and its size in the Source window as specified, and closes
this dialog box.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without changing the font.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Project File Save dialog box
Saves the debug environment.
It is used to save a new project file or an existing file with the file name changed (refer to "Setting
Debugging Environment").
When a file is saved, the size and position of the window that has been displayed are also saved.
Figure 7-10 Project File Save Dialog Box
The following contents are saved to the project file:
Table 7-8 Contents Saved to Project File
Window Name
Set Data
Configuration dialog box
All items (target device, clock setting, pin mask setting,
mapping information)
Main window
Display position, tool bar/status bar/button display
information, execution mode, information, trace on/off
information, coverage on/off information
Download dialog box
File information to be downloaded
Extended Option dialog box,
Debugger Option dialog box
Set information
Source window
Display information, font information of window
Assemble window,
Memory window
Display information of window, display start address
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
105
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-8 Contents Saved to Project File
Window Name
Set Data
Stack Trace window,
IOR window,
Local Variable window,
Trace window,
Event Manager,
Coverage window,
Console window,
Expansion window
Display information of window
Event dialog box
Display information of window, event information
Event Link dialog box
Display information of window, link event information
Break dialog box
Display information of window, break event information
Trace window
Display information of window, trace event information
Snap Shot dialog box
Display information of window, snap event information
Stub dialog box
Display information of window, stub event information
Timer dialog box
Display information of window, timer event information
Register window
Display information of window, display bank information
Watch window
Display information of window, watch registration information
Add I/O Port dialog box
Added I/O port information
DMM dialog box
DMM information
Delay Count dialog box
Delay count value
Software Break Manager
Display information of window, software break information
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To automatically save a project file
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [File] -> [Project] -> [Save As...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+F, J and A in that order).
To save a file of same name as a project file previously loaded or saved
• Select [File] -> [Project] -> [Save...] on the menu bar
(or press Alt+F, J and S in that order).
106
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Project File Save dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Save in:, File name: (file selection area)
(2) Save as type: (extension selection area)
(1)
Save in:, File name: (file selection area)
This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or
selected from the list at the upper part of this area.
Up to 64 character string with a extension can be specified.
(2)
Save as type: (extension selection area)
This area is used to specify the extension (.PRJ) of the project file to be loaded.
If the extension is omitted, .PRJ is appended as the default extension.
Function buttons
Save
Saves the project information to the selected file. After saving, the dialog box is
closed.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box without saving the file.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Related operations
To automatically save a project file
Use Project File (project file setting area) in Debugger Option dialog box that is opened when [Option]
-> [Debugger Option...] is selected from the menu bar.
Select On for Auto Save in this area. The current environment will be automatically saved to the
project file when the dialog box is closed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
107
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Project File Load dialog box
This dialog box is used to return the debug environment to the previous environment.
After a file has been loaded, the size and position of the window is returned to the previous status (status
saved to a project file) (refer to "Setting Debugging Environment").
After a project file has been loaded, it is displayed on the top of an active Source window if any.
By loading the project file, the items to be saved in Table 7-8 Contents Saved to Project File are set.
Caution
If a project file different from the target device after the debugger has been loaded is loaded,
the debugger loads the project file after it has been reset (the debugger is then used as the
target device specified by the project file).
Figure 7-11 Project File Load Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To automatically load a project file
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
108
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Click the Proj button.
• Select [File] -> [Project] -> [Open...] on the menu bar
(or press Alt+F, J and O in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Project File Load dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Look In: , File name: (file selection area)
(2) Files of type: (extension selection area)
(1)
Look In: , File name: (file selection area)
This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or
selected from the list at the upper part of this area.
Up to 64 character string with a extension can be specified.
(2)
Files of type: (extension selection area)
This area is used to specify the extension (.PRJ) of the project file to be loaded.
Function buttons
Open
Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box without loading the file.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Related operations
To automatically load a project file
Use Project File (project file setting area) in Debugger Option dialog box that is opened when [Option]
-> [Debugger Option...] is selected from the menu bar.
Select On for Auto Load in this area and specify the name of the project file to be loaded automatically
in the Load Project File area. The specified project file will be automatically loaded when the system is
started next time.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
109
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
View File Save dialog box
This dialog box is used to save the contents of the current window to a view file or event setting file when
a dialog box is opened.
Figure 7-12 View File Save Dialog Box
View File Save Dialog Box (Example: to Save Assemble Window)
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• When the window to be saved is the current window
Select [File] -> [Save As...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+F and A in that order).
110
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
This dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Save in:, File name: (file selection area)
(2) Save as type: (extension selection area)
(3) Save range (save range setting area)
(1)
Save in:, File name: (file selection area)
This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or
selected from the list at the upper part of this area.
(2)
Save as type: (extension selection area)
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file.
The extension of the file corresponding to the current window is displayed as follows:
Table 7-9 Extension Corresponding to Current Window
File Type (Extension)
(3)
Current Window Name
Source Text (*.SVW)
Source window
Assemble (*.DIS)
Assemble window
Memory (*.MEM)
Memory window
Watch(*.WCH)
Watch window
Register (*RGW)
Register window
I/O Register (*.IOR)
IOR window
Local Variable (*.LOC)
Local Variable window
Stack Trace (*.STK)
Stack Trace window
Trace (*.TVW)
Trace window
Coverage (*.COV)
Coverage window
Event(*.EVN)
Event Manager
Console (*.LOG)
Console window
All (*.*)
All files
Save range (save range setting area)
This area is displayed if the current window to be saved is the Assemble window, Memory window,
Coverage window, Source window, or Trace window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
111
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Specify the range of data to be saved by selecting any of the following:
All
Saves the entire range, from the first line to the last line.
Screen shot
Saves the area visible on the screen, from the top line on the screen to
the bottom line. If the Source window is in the mixed display mode,
however, the window contents are saved from the source line that
includes the area visible on the screen.
Specify Line
Specify Frame
Specify Address
above any
Specify the start line and end line of the area to be saved. If the start line
and end line are omitted, the first line and last line are assumed. For
details, it is as follows.
Specify Line (if current window is Source window)
Specify the range of the line numbers to be saved. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is
decimal.
If the Source window is in the mixed display mode, the mixed displayed part on the specified line is
also saved.
If a range of 100 lines or more is specified, a message dialog box is displayed to indicate the progress
of saving. To stop saving midway, click the <Stop> button in the message dialog box.
Specify Frame (if current window is Trace window)
Specify the range of trace frames to be saved (for how to specify, refer to "Trace Move dialog box").
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
If a range of 100 frames or more is specified, a message dialog box is displayed to indicate the
progress of saving. To stop saving midway, click the <Stop> button in the message dialog box.
Specify Address (if current window is Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window)
This area is used to specify the address range in which data is to be saved to the file. An address can
be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying Symbols"). The default
radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
If a range of 256 bytes or more is specified, a message dialog box is displayed to indicate the progress
of saving. To stop saving midway, click the <Stop> button in the message dialog box.
112
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Save
Saves the information of the current dialog box to the selected file. After
saving, the dialog box is closed.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box without saving the file.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Restore
Restores the status before this dialog box was opened.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
113
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
View File Load dialog box
This dialog box is used to read the view file, source file, text file, event setting file, watch setting file, or
peripheral I/O register setting file saved in the View File Save dialog box, and open a window.
The window to be opened and its status differ as follows, depending on the file to be loaded.
Loading source file to which symbol information has been read
If there is a Source window in the active status, it is opened in the static status; otherwise, the Source
window is opened in the active status.
Loading source file to which symbol information has not been read, or view file
A window of text-format files is opened in the Source window in the static status.
Loading event setting file
The Event Manager is opened, and the event setting contents will return to the previous environment.
Loading watch setting file
The Watch window is opened, and the watch setting contents will return to the previous environment.
Loading peripheral I/O register setting file
The IOR window is opened, and the peripheral I/O register setting contents will return to the previous
environment.
Figure 7-13 View File Load Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
114
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Click the Open button.
• Select [File] -> [Open...] on the menu bar
(or press Alt+F and O in that order, or press Ctrl+O).
Explanation of each area
This dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Look In: , File name: (file selection area)
(2) Files of type: (extension selection area)
(1)
Look In: , File name: (file selection area)
This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or
selected from the list at the upper part of this area.
Up to 64 character string with a extension can be specified.
(2)
Files of type: (extension selection area)
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be loaded.
Table 7-10 Type of File That Can Be Loaded on View File Load Dialog Box
File Type (Extension)
Meaning
Source (*.C, *.S)
Source file
The extension of the source (c, s) can be changed in
Debugger Option dialog box.
Text (*.TXT)
Text file
Source Text (*.SVW)
Source windowView files
Assemble (*.DIS)
Assemble window view files
Memory (*.MEM)
Memory window view files
Watch (*.WCH)
Watch window setting files
Register (*.RGW)
Register window view files
I/O Register (*.IOR)
IOR window setting files
Local Variable (*.LOC)
Local Variable window view files
Stack Trace (*.STK)
Stack Trace window view files
Trace (*.TVW)
Trace window view files
Coverage (*.COV)
Coverage window view files
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
115
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-10 Type of File That Can Be Loaded on View File Load Dialog Box
File Type (Extension)
Meaning
Event (*.EVN)
Event setting file
Console (*.LOG)
Console window
All (*.*)
All files
Function buttons
116
Open
Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box without loading the file.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Download dialog box
This dialog box is used to select the name and format of a file to be downloaded, and downloads memory
contents or coverage results to the in-circuit emulator or the target.
If an object file in the load module format has been downloaded, the corresponding source file is
searched, and Source window is automatically opened.
Up to 20 load module files can be downloaded.
To check the loaded files, use Load Module List dialog box that is opened when [File] -> [Load Module] is
selected from the menu bar.
Format of file that can be downloaded
• NEC load module format (ELF (.OUT))
• Intel Hex format (standard, extended)
• Motorola Hex format S type (S0, S2, S3, S7, S8)
• Extended Tektronix Hex format
• Binary data format
• Coverage result
Caution
If a file other than an object file in the load module format is loaded, source debugging cannot
be executed.
Figure 7-14 Download Dialog Box
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
117
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
• Cancel processing
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Click the Load button.
• Select [File] -> [Download...] on the menu bar
(or press Alt+F, and D in that order).
Explanation of each area
(1) Look In: , File name: (file selection area)
(2) Files of type: (extension selection area)
(3) Offset Address: (offset setting area)
(4) Load (load condition specification area)
(5) Reset (reset condition specification area)
(1)
Look In: , File name: (file selection area)
This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or
selected from the list at the upper part of this area.
Two or more files can be specified in this dialog box. To specify two or more files, delimit each file
name with " " (double quotation mark). Files can also be specified by clicking the mouse button while
holding down the Shift or Ctrl key.
Up to 64 character string with a extension can be specified.
(2)
Files of type: (extension selection area)
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be downloaded.
The contents displayed on the drop-down list are as follows:
Table 7-11 Type of File That Can Be Downloaded
Contents (extension)
118
Format
Load Module(*.OUT)
Load module format
Hex Format(*.HEX)
Hex format (automatic format identification)
Binary Data(*.BIN)
Binary data format
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-11 Type of File That Can Be Downloaded
Contents (extension)
Coverage (*.CVB)
Format
Coverage result
Reference These are default extensions; other extensions can also be used.
The default extension of the displayed load module can also be specified under Default
Extension (default extension specification area) in Debugger Option dialog box.
(3)
Offset Address: (offset setting area)
This area is used to specify the offset address that is used when a file is loaded (for binary data,
specify the start address). An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table
7-15 Specifying Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
(4)
Load (load condition specification area)
This area is used to set a load condition.
This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified.
(5)
Symbol
Specifies whether symbol information is read (when checked, default) or not.
The memory capacity can be saved by not reading symbol information when a
program consisting of two or more load module files is to be debugged and if the
symbol information of some modules does not have to be read.
Object
Specifies whether object information is read (when checked, default) or not.
Reset (reset condition specification area)
This area is used to set a reset condition.
This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
119
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Symbol
Specifies whether symbol information is reset (when checked, default) or not.
When debugging a program consisting of two or more load module files, load
each one of the load module files without resetting the symbol information.
When downloading two or more load module files, take care that location
addresses do not overlap.
CPU
Specifies whether the CPU is reset or not (not checked, default).
Function buttons
Open
Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box without loading the file.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Cancel processing
The following dialog box appears while downloading and the downloading can be cancelled at any time.
The progress of the download is displayed in the dialog box.
This dialog box is closed automatically after completing downloading.
If an error occurs during the download, an error message will be displayed in a new window.
Figure 7-15 The Progress of Download
120
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Upload dialog box
This dialog box is used to set the name and format of the file to which memory contents or coverage
results are to be saved.
Format of specifiable file
• Intel Hex format (extended ... 20-bit address)
• Motorola Hex format (S0, S3, S7 ... 32-bit address)
• Extended Tektronix Hex format
• Binary data format
• Coverage result
Figure 7-16 Upload Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
121
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Select [File] -> [Upload...] on the menu bar
(or press Alt+F, and U in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Upload dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Save in:, File name: (saved file name specification area)
(2) Save as type: (extension selection area)
(3) Save Address: (save range setting area)
(1)
Save in:, File name: (saved file name specification area)
This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or
selected from the list at the upper part of this area.
Up to 64 characters can be specified including the extension.
(2)
Save as type: (extension selection area)
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file. The format of the data to be saved to the
file is determined by the extension.
If "All (*. *)" is selected, however, the default Intel extended Hex format is selected. The contents
displayed on the drop-down list are as follows:
Table 7-12 Type of File That Can Be Uploaded
Contents (extension)
Format
Intel Hex (*.HEX)
Intel extended Hex format
Motorola Hex (*.HEX)
Motorola Hex format
Tektro Hex (*.HEX)
Extended Tektronix Hex format
Binary Data (*.BIN)
Binary data format
Coverage (*.CVB)
Coverage result
All (*.*)
All files
Reference These are default extensions; other extensions can also be used.
(3)
Save Address: (save range setting area)
This area is used to specify the address range in which data is to be saved to the file. An address can
be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying Symbols").
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
122
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Save
Saves data in the specified address range to the specified file and closes this
dialog box.
Closes this dialog box. The font of the Source window is changed to the
specified font face and font size, and then the dialog box is closed
Cancel
Closes this dialog box without saving the data to the file.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
123
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Load Module List dialog box
This dialog box can be used to check the file name and file path name of a load module that has already
been downloaded. By using the <Download> button, The Download dialog box can be opened and a load
module can be downloaded.
Figure 7-17 Load Module List Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [File] -> [Load Module...] on the menu bar
(or press Alt+F, and L in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Load module list dialog box consists of the following items:
(1) Module list (file name display area)
(2) Add Path (path name addition check box)
124
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Module list (file name display area)
This area displays the names of the load module files that have already been downloaded.
The numbers displayed in the "No." field indicate the sequence in which the load module file names
were read. The file names are displayed with the full path if the path name addition check box is
checked; otherwise, only the file names will be displayed.
If the file names do not fit in the screen, the screen can be scrolled by using the mouse or the arrow
keys of the keyboard. If symbol information has been reset in the Reset Debugger dialog box box, or if
symbol information has been reset in the Download dialog box, the load module file names
downloaded before that are cleared.
(2)
Add Path (path name addition check box)
This area is used to specify whether load module file names are displayed with the path (checked) or
only file names are displayed (not checked, default) in the file name display area.
Function buttons
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Download...
Opens Download dialog box.
A new load module can be downloaded. The file name of the newly
downloaded module will be added to the file name display area when the
Download dialog box is closed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
125
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Browse dialog box
This dialog box is used to select the file to be set in the Source Search dialog box or the Source Text
Move dialog box.
Reference If this dialog box is opened for the first time after the system has been started up, the
directory first specified by the source path is displayed. When the dialog box is opened the
second and subsequent times, the previously displayed directory is recorded and displayed
again. If the <Cancel> button is pressed, however, the previously displayed directory is not
recorded.
Figure 7-18 Browse Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Click the <Browse...> button in the Source Search dialog box or the Source Text Move dialog box.
126
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Browse dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Look In: , File name: (file selection area)
(2) Files of type: (extension selection area)
(1)
Look In: , File name: (file selection area)
This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or
selected from the list at the upper part of this area.
Up to 64 character string with a extension can be specified.
(2)
Files of type: (extension selection area)
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be opened.
Table 7-13 Type of File That Can Be Displayed in Browse Dialog Box
File Type (Extension)
Meaning
Source (*.C, *.S)
Source file
The extension of the source (c, s) can be changed in Debugger Option
dialog box.
Text(*.TXT)
Text file
All(*.*)
All files
Function buttons
Open
Sets the selected file. After setting the file, closes this dialog box.
Cancel
Does not set the file and closes this dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
127
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Address Move dialog box
This dialog box is used to specify the address from which displaying memory contents, results of
disassembly, results of coverage, or I/O registers are to be displayed. This dialog box is displayed if [View]
-> [Move] is selected from the menu bar while the Memory window, the Assemble window, the Coverage
window, or the IOR window is opened, and enables the display start address of data to be changed.
Figure 7-19 Address Move Dialog Box
(Example: When Memory Window Is Open)
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When the Memory window, Assemble window, Coverage window, or IOR window is opened
• Select [View] -> [Move...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+V and V in that order, or press Ctrl+J).
Explanation of each area
The Address Move dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) To (address specification area)
(1)
To (address specification area)
This area is used to specify an address. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that
called this dialog box, the current PC value (Memory window, Assemble window, Coverage window),
128
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
or blank (IOR window) is displayed.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused.
Up to 16 input histories can be recorded.
Function buttons
OK
Displays the memory contents, results of disassembly, results of coverage, or I/O
registers.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
129
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Text Move dialog box
This dialog box is used to specify a file to be displayed in the Source window and the position from which
displaying the file is to be started.
This dialog box is selected if [View] -> [Move...] is selected from the menu bar while the Source window is
open, and enables the display start position of a file to be changed (a new window is not opened).
Figure 7-20 Source Text Move Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Specifying
• Specifying a display start position by an address (or symbol).
• Specifying a file to be displayed in the Source window
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When the Source window is active
• Select [View] -> [Move...]
(or press Alt+V and V in that order, or press Ctrl+J).
Explanation of each area
The Source Move dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Option (input mode selection area)
(2) To (file/address specification area)
130
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Option (input mode selection area)
This area is used to select the input mode when the display start position is specified.
(2)
Address/Symbol
If the display start position is specified by an address (or symbol)
Line/File
If the display start position is specified by a line number (or file name)
To (file/address specification area)
This area is used to specify the file name or address to be displayed. In the default condition, the
character string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed in this area. If no
character string has been selected, the first character string of the input history is displayed. If no input
history is available, the current PC is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed in this
area can be changed by directly inputting a character string from the keyboard.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
Specifying
On this dialog box, the following two items can be specified.
• Specifying a display start position by an address (or symbol).
• Specifying a file to be displayed in the Source window
Specifying a display start position by an address (or symbol).
Select Address/Symbol under Option and specify the address from which display is to be started for
To.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Clicking the <OK> button displays the source text so that the source line corresponding to the specified
address value can be viewed.
Specifying a file to be displayed in the Source window
Select Line/File under Option and specify the name of the file to be displayed in the Source window for
To. Specification can be mode using only the file name, or using an absolute path or relative path.
If only the file name is specified, or if a relative path is specified, the files in the directory of the source
path specified in Debugger Option dialog box are sequentially searched. The file that is found first as
a result of searching is displayed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
131
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
In addition to a file name, a line number can be also specified as follows:
<<path name>file name#>line number
Delimit the file name from the line number with "#". Specify the line number in decimal. The file name
may be omitted. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Clicking the <OK> button displays the specified file with the specified line number as the first line. If
the file name omitted, the file being displayed is displayed starting from the specified line. If the line
number is omitted, the file is displayed starting from its first line.
Function buttons
132
Browse...
Opens the Browse dialog box.
OK
Starts displaying the source text from the specified position.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Move dialog box
This dialog box is used to specify the position from which displaying the Trace window is started.
This dialog box is displayed if [View] -> [Move...] is selected from the menu bar while the Trace window is
open, and enables the display start position of the trace results to be changed.
Figure 7-21 Trace Move Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When the Trace window is displayed
• Select [View] -> [Move...]
(or press Alt+V and V in that order, or press Ctrl+J).
Explanation of each area
The Trace Move dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Frame selection area
(2) Frame number specification area
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
133
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Frame selection area
This area is used to specify the frame at the destination.
(2)
1st frame of last block
Moves the display start position to the to first frame in the newest
block of trace data. The display start position is moved to the first
frame of the trace data when using an in-circuit emulator without a
block frame.
Trigger frame of last block
Moves the display start position to a trigger frame in the newest
block frame of trace data.
Last frame of last block
Moves the display start position to the last frame of trace data.
Frame No.
Moves the display start position to the specified frame number.
If 0 is specified, the display start position is moved to the first frame
of trace data.
If this item is checked, the focus moves to the text box on the side.
Frame number specification area
This area is used to specify a frame number if Frame No. is selected in the frame selection area. In the
default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box or "Last" is
selected. As necessary, however, this can be changed by directly inputting a character string from the
keyboard.
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
A frame number can also be specified in the following format. The uppercase and lowercase
characters of the input character string are not distinguished. In addition, a frame number can also be
specified in abbreviated form.
Table 7-14 Frame Number Specification Format
Specification
134
Abbreviation
Contents
+numeric value
None
Moves backward (downward on screen) the display start
position from the frame at the cursor by the specified number
of frames (numeric value).
-numeric value
None
Moves forward (upward on screen) the display start position
from the frame at the cursor by the specified number of
frames (numeric value).
Top
O
Moves the display start position to the first frame of trace
data.
First
S
Moves the display start position to the first frame of the
current trace block. (Same as when Top is specified when
using an in-circuit emulator without a block frame.)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-14 Frame Number Specification Format
Specification
Abbreviation
Contents
Trigger
T
Moves the display start position to the trigger frame of the
current trace block.
Last
L
Moves the display start position to the last frame of the
current trace block. (Same as when Bottom is specified
when using an in-circuit emulator without a block frame.)
Bottom
B
Moves the display start position to the last frame of trace
data.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
Function buttons
OK
Starts trace display from the specified position.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
135
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Symbol To Address dialog box
Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol.
Figure 7-22 Symbol To Address Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [View] -> [Symbol...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+V and Y in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Symbol To Address dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Symbol: (symbol specification and conversion result display areas)
(2) Radix (display radix specification area)
(1)
Symbol: (symbol specification and conversion result display areas)
The upper area (symbol specification area) is used to specify the variable, function name, symbol
name, or line number to be converted.
In addition, an I/O port name, peripheral I/O register name, register name, PSW flag name, or
expression can be also specified.
136
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
In the lower area (conversion result display area), the variable, address of the function, value of the
symbol, address of the line number, or value of the expression specified under Symbol is displayed.
The address value of an I/O port name or peripheral I/O register name, the register contents of a
register name, or flag value of a PSW flag name is displayed. The specification method is indicated
below.
Table 7-15 Specifying Symbols
Conversion Target
Specification Method
Variable
var
file#var (to specify a static function with file name)
func#var (to specify a static function with function name)
file#var (to specify a static function with file name and function name)
Function
func
file#func (to specify a static function with file name)
Label
label
file#label(to specify a local label with file name)
Line number of source file
prog$file#var
file#no
I/O Port
portname
I/O Register
I/O regname
Register
regname
PSW Flag
pswname
Remark
var: Variable name, func: Function name, file: File name, label: Label name, bitsym: Bit
symbol name, portname: I/O port name, I/O regname: Peripheral I/O register name,
regname: Register, pswname: PSW flag name, no: Line number of source file
"#" is used as a separator for file names, variables, function names, and line numbers.
If a specified symbol is not found in the scope, all symbols (static variables, static functions, local
labels) are searched.
In the default status, a symbol name takes precedence. To temporarily change the priority, prefixing
"$" to a symbol gives the priority to a register name.
To specify a load module name when two or more load modules are read, use "$" as a separator to
delimit the load module name from a file name, variable, function name, or symbol name.
In the default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box is
displayed. As necessary, input data from the keyboard to change the character string. The default
radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal.
To change the contents of the symbol specification area, click the <OK> button. The conversion result
will be displayed in the conversion result display area.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
137
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2)
Radix (display radix specification area)
This area is used to specify the radix of the data to be displayed in the conversion result display area.
Hex
Hexadecimal number (default).
Dec
Decimal number
Oct
Octal number
Bin
Binary number
Function buttons
138
OK
If the contents of the symbol specification area have been changed, converts
the symbol.
After conversion, closes the dialog box if the contents of the symbol
specification area have not been changed.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
If the <OK> button has already been clicked, the data is restored to the status
immediately after the <OK> button was clicked.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Source window
This window displays source files or text files.
In Mixed display mode, the program can be disassembled and displayed and online assembly can be
executed while source files are being displayed.
The Source window that is displaying the source file to which symbol information is read may be in two
statuses: Active Status and Static Status.
Caution If program codes is described in an include file and these codes are included in multiple files,
the line numbers and addresses do not correspond on a one-to-one bases. In such an include
file, function that indicates the correspondence relationship between line numbers and
addresses dose not correctly operate.
Figure 7-23 Source Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Breakpoint setting/deletion function
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
139
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• Related operations
Concerning display
• Mixed display mode
• To set a source path
• To change the display start position
• To display another source file
• To specify the default extension of a source file
• To convert a symbol
• To specify the symbol of a start-up routine
• To set an opened file history
• To set a beep sound to be issued upon break
• To change the displayed font
• To change the displayed tab size
Concerning operation
• Start function
• Come function
• Program counter setting function
• Jump function
• To change disassembled contents
• Watch function (referencing data value)
• To search in a source program
• To set a default breakpoint
• To set event after execution
• Drag & drop function (line/address)
• Drag & drop function (character string)
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• This window is automatically opened if the corresponding source file exists after the download module
file has been downloaded.
• Click the Src button.
• Select [Browse] -> [Source] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+B, and S in that order).
• Select [Jump] -> [Source] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+J and S in that order, or press Ctrl+U).
• Click the <Open> button with selecting a source file or text file in the View File Load dialog box.
140
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Source window consists of the following areas:
(1) Point mark area
(2) Current PC mark area
(3) Line number/address display area
(4) Source text display area
(1)
Point mark area
This area displays the Breakpoint setting/deletion function, Event setting status, and Program code.
Breakpoint setting/deletion function
By clicking this area with the mouse, a breakpoint can be set or deleted. Whether a hardware
breakpoint or software breakpoint is to be set or deleted can be selected by the right-click menu of this
area (or by On Mouse Click in the Extended Option dialog box).
Setting a breakpoint
A breakpoint can be set on a line for which "*" is displayed in the point mark area (if "*" is not displayed
for the line, the breakpoint is set on the line above or below the line, whichever has "*" displayed).
When a breakpoint has been set, 'B (blue: software breakpoint)' or 'B (red: hardware breakpoint)' is
displayed.
If a breakpoint is set on a line on which an event breakpoint has already been set, "A" indicating that
multiple events have been set is displayed.
Caution
A software breakpoint cannot be set in an externally mapped ROM area.
Deleting a breakpoint
Click the position at which the breakpoint to be deleted is set.
If right-click menu -> [Software Breakpoint] is selected, 'B (blue: software breakpoint' is deleted. If
[Hardware Breakpoint] is selected, 'B (red: hardware break)' is deleted. If another event remains,
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
141
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
however, the mark of that event is displayed.
Table 7-16 Details of Setting/Deleting Breakpoint
Display Status of Line
On Mouse Click
[right-click menu]
Blank or with mark other
than B
Soft Break
[Software Breakpoint]
Sets a software breakpoint.
Blank
-> Displays B(blue) mark
Other than B mark
-> Displays A mark (indicating setting
of two or more events)
Hard Break
[Breakpoint]
Sets a hardware breakpoint
Blank
-> Displays B(red) mark
Other than B mark
-> Displays A mark (indicating setting
of two or more events)
With B(blue) mark
(Software breakpoint
setting status)
Soft Break
[Software Breakpoint]
Deletes a software breakpoint
-> Blank
Hard Break
[Breakpoint]
Sets a hardware breakpoint
-> Displays A mark (indicating setting
of two or more events)
With B(red, green, black)
mark
(Hardware breakpoint
setting status)
Soft Break
[Software Breakpoint]
Sets a software breakpoint.
-> Displays A mark (indicating setting
of two or more events)
Hard Break
[Breakpoint]
Sets a software breakpoint
-> Blank
Operation on clicking
The 'B' mark is displayed in the following colors, depending on the type and status of the breakpoint.
A breakpoint becomes valid as soon as it has been set in the point mark area.
Table 7-17 Display Color of Breakpoint and Its Meaning
Display Color
Meaning
B(blue)
Software breakpoint is set.
B (red)
Valid hardware breakpoint (after execution) is set.
B (green)
Valid hardware breakpoint (before execution) is set.
* This breakpoint is set, taking precedence over the hardware breakpoint after
execution.
B (black)
Invalid hardware breakpoint is set.
This hardware breakpoint can be validated on the Event Manager or in the
Break dialog box.
Event setting status
The setting status of various events can be displayed.
If an execution event or access event is set on the corresponding line, a mark corresponding to the
type of event is displayed.
If an address range is specified as the address condition of the event, the lower addresses of the range
are displayed.
142
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
The mask specification of the address condition is not reflected.
Table 7-18 Meaning of Event Display Mark
Mark
Meaning
E
Setting of event condition
L
Setting of event for event link condition
B
Setting of break event
T
Setting of trace event
Ti
Setting of timer event
S
Setting of snapshot event
U
Setting of stub event
A
Setting of multiple events
Program code
The line marked '*' in the point mark area indicates that a program code corresponding to the line
number exists. This program code is displayed only if a load module has been downloaded and
symbol information has been read.
(2)
Current PC mark area
The mark '>', which indicates the current PC value (PC register value), is displayed in this area.
Clicking this mark with the mouse displays a pop-up window that shows the PC register value.
By double-clicking the current PC mark area, the program can be executed up to a specified line.
(3)
Line number/address display area
This area displays the line numbers of a source file or text file.
If a Program code corresponding to a line number of the source file exists, the character of the line
number is displayed in red. If a program code does not exist, the character of the line number is
displayed in black.
In the mixed display mode, disassembled addresses are displayed. The characters of an address are
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
143
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
displayed in gray.
In this area, any position can be selected (highlighted) by clicking the mouse button. The selected line
number of an address can be dragged to another window or area, so that its variable value can be
displayed or the line number of the address can be specified as an event condition (refer to "Drag &
drop function (line/address)").
(4)
Source text display area
This area displays source files or text files. In the mixed display mode, disassemble display and online
assemble can also be executed (refer to "To change disassembled contents").
A data value can be temporarily displayed by selecting (highlighting) a character string and placing the
mouse cursor over it (Balloon watch function).
The current PC line and the line on which a breakpoint is set are emphasized for display, as follows:
Current PC line
(Yellow)
This line is the source line or disassemble display line corresponding
to the current PC value (indicated by '>').
Breakpoint setting line
(red)
This line is the source line or a disassemble display line on which a
valid breakpoint is set (indicated by a 'B' mark in red, green or blue).
In the mixed display mode, the color of only the disassemble display line is changed (the source line is
displayed in the normal color).
In this area, the following functions can be used on the line or address on which the cursor is placed
(start address of program code):
-> Start function
-> Come function
-> Program counter setting function
-> Jump function
Caution If a Program code does not exist on the source line, the top address of the line above or below
the line on which a program code exists is manipulated by these functions.
These functions cannot be performed in the following cases. The corresponding menu will be
dimmed and cannot be selected.
If a file other than a source file is displayed
While the user program is being executed
A character string selected in this area can be dragged and dropped to another window or dialog box
(refer to "Drag & drop function (character string)").
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
144
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
procedure.
Move...
Moves the display position.
Opens the Source Text Move dialog box.
Mix
Turns on/off mixed display of disassembly.
Checked: Mixed display
Not checked: No display (default)
Add Watch
Adds the specified data to the Watch window.
Opens the Add Watch dialog box.
Symbol
Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of
the specified symbol.
Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box.
Break when Access to
this Variable
Creates a break event for a read/write access.
Break when Write to this
Variable
Creates a break event for a write access.
Break when Read from
this Variable
Creates a break event for a read access.
Clear
Deletes the selected break event condition.
Come Here
Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position (Come
function).
Break Point
Sets or deletes a breakpoint at the cursor position.
Change PC
Sets the address at the cursor position to the PC.
Software Break Point
Sets a software break point at the cursor position.
Assemble
Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address
specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Assemble window.
If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the
forefront (so that it can be manipulated).
Memory
Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address
specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Memory window.
If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the
forefront (so that it can be manipulated).
Coverage
Displays the coverage measurement results starting from the jump
destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Coverage window.
If an active Coverage window is open, that window is displayed in the
forefront (so that it can be manipulated).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
145
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Search...
Opens the Source Search dialog box and searches a character string of the
source text.
If a character string is selected in the source text display area, the Source
Search dialog box is opened to search the character string. If no character
string is selected, the Source Search dialog box is opened with nothing
specified to be searched.
Specify a search method in the Source Search dialog box. The result of search
is highlighted in the Source window.
This is the same operation as selecting [View] -> [Search...] from the menu bar.
This button is invalid while the user program is executed.
<<
Searches forward (upward on screen) for the text that satisfies the search
condition set in the Source Search dialog box, starting from the address at the
cursor position.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button during a search.
This button is invalid while the user program is executed.
>>
Searches backward (downward on screen) for the text that satisfies the search
condition set in the Source Search dialog box, starting from the address at the
cursor position.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button during a search.
This button is invalid while the user program is executed.
Stop
(during search)
Stops searching.
Watch
Adds the variables selected in the source text display area to the Watch
window. If the Watch window is not opened, it is opened.
If no text is selected in the source text display area, the Watch window is only
opened.
This is the same operation as selecting [View] -> [View Watch] from the menu
bar.
Quick...
Temporarily displays the contents, such as a variable, selected in the source
text display area in the Quick Watch dialog box. Opens the Quick Watch dialog
box. If no text is selected in the source text display area, the Quick Watch
dialog box is only opened.
This is the same operation as selecting [View] -> [Quick Watch] from the menu
bar.
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close
Closes this window.
Related operations
Mixed display mode
The normal display mode and mixed display mode can be alternately selected by selecting [View] ->
[Mix] from the menu bar.
Normal display mode
146
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
In the normal display mode, general text files can be displayed as well as source files.
Mixed display mode
In the mixed display mode, disassembly of programs combined with source files is displayed and
online assembly is carried out. (This mode is valid only when a load module is being downloaded and
symbol information is being read, and the source file that corresponds to the downloaded load module
is displayed).
If a program code corresponds to the line of the displayed source file, the disassembly line is displayed
next to the source line. In the disassembly line, an address label, a code data, and a disassembled
mnemonic are displayed (the starting position for display of the mnemonic can be adjusted by the tab
size setting value).
To execute online assembly, move the cursor to a mnemonic. The results of online assembly are also
reflected in the Memory window.
The contents displayed in the mixed display mode can be saved as a view file.
To set a source path
Set a source path under Source Path (source path specification area) in the Debugger Option dialog
box that is opened by selecting [Option] -> [Debugger Option] from the menu bar.
To change the display start position
Change the display start position in the Source Text Move dialog box that is opened when right-click
menu -> [Move...] is selected in the Source window.
To display another source file
Select [File] -> [Open] from the menu bar and specify a file.
To specify the default extension of a source file
Set a source path under Default Extension (default extension specification area) in the Debugger
Option dialog box that is opened by selecting [Option] -> [Debugger Option] from the menu bar.
To convert a symbol
Convert symbols in the Symbol To Address dialog box that is opened when right-click menu ->
[Symbol...] is selected in the Source window.
To specify the symbol of a start-up routine
Specify the symbol of a start-up routine under Startup Routine (start-up symbol setting area) in the
Debugger Option dialog box that is opened by selecting [Option] -> [Debugger Option...] from the
menu bar. If the setting in this area is wrong, the source file cannot be opened.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
147
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
To set an opened file history
Set an opened file history under Open File History (open file history setting area) in the Debugger
Option dialog box that is opened by selecting [Option] -> [Debugger Option...] from the menu bar. The
number of a history display of the opened files can be specified in this area.
To set a beep sound to be issued upon break
Set the beep sound under Break Sound (beep sound specification area) in the Extended Option dialog
box that is opened by selecting [Option] -> [Extended Option...] from the menu bar.
To change the displayed font
Change the displayed font in the Font dialog box that can be opened by clicking the <Font...> button in
the Debugger Option dialog box that is opened when [Option] -> [Debugger Option...] is selected from
the menu bar.
To change the displayed tab size
The displayed tab size can be specified for each file extension under Tab Size (tab size setting area) in
the Debugger Option dialog box that is opened when [Option] -> [Debugger Option...] is selected from
the menu bar.
Start function
This function is used to execute the user program from the line on which the cursor is placed.
Method
Move the cursor to the line from which the program is to be executed, and select right-click menu ->
[Start From Here].
Come function
This function is used to execute the user program to the line on which the cursor is placed (while the
user program is being executed in this mode, the break event currently set does not occur).
Method
Move the cursor to the line on which the break is to occur, and select right-click menu -> [Come Here].
Program counter setting function
This function is used to set the address of the line on which the cursor is placed to the program counter
(PC).
Method
Move the cursor to the line that is to be set to the PC, and select [Run] -> [Change PC] from the menu
bar.
Jump function
This function is used to jump to the Memory window,using the selected variable as a jump pointer.
The jump destination window will be displayed from the vicinity of the jump pointer.
1
Select the name of variable as a jump pointer with the mouse.
2
In the Main window, to jump to the Memory window
Select [Jump] -> [Memory] from the menu bar.
(or press Alt+J and E in that order, or press Ctrl+M).
148
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• To jump from the Trace window to the Memory window or Coverage window, the jump source address
differs as follows, depending on the cursor position in the trace result display area:
If the cursor is at an access address, access data, or access
status
-> Access address
Other than above
-> Fetch address
To jump to the Source window or Assemble window
-> Fetch address
• To jump from the Register window, move the cursor to a register value.
• To jump from the Stack Trace window, the jump destination is as follows:
[With current function]
- If the jump destination is the Source window
-> Jumps to the current PC line.
- If the jump destination is a window other than the Source window
-> Jumps to the current PC address.
[With function other than current function]
- If the jump destination is the Source window
-> Jumps to the line that calls a nested function.
- If the jump destination is a window other than the Source window
-> Jumps to the address next to the instruction that calls a nested function.
To change disassembled contents
To change the disassembled contents, move the cursor to the mnemonic field (the overwrite and
insertion modes are alternately selected by pressing the Insert key).
If an attempt is made to move the cursor to another line after the disassembled contents have been
changed in the mnemonic field, the new contents are checked. If the new contents are illegal. the code
data on the line where the contents have been changed is indicated as '*'. In this case, the new
contents are not written to memory even if the cursor is moved to another line.
The contents changed in the mnemonic field are written into the memory by pressing the Enter key.
When the Enter key is pressed, the new contents are checked and, if they are illegal, the code data on
the illegal line is indicated by '*'. If even one line is illegal, the new contents are not written into the
memory.
In this case, correct the contents. To discard the contents, press the ESC key. If the contents are
correct and if the Enter key is pressed, the contents are written into the memory, and then the cursor
moves to the next line in the mnemonic field, so that the data on the next line can be changed.
Watch function (referencing data value)
Data values can be displayed as follows:
To temporarily display a value
The following two methods can be used:
• Select (highlight) a character string and put the mouse cursor on it then the data value is displayed
(Balloon watch function).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
149
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Select (highlight) a character string and click the <Quick> button. The Quick Watch dialog box will
be opened to display the data value.
To trace the change of a data value
Register a variable or symbol to the Watch window in either of the following ways:
• Select (highlight) the character string whose data value is to be displayed, click the <Watch> button,
or drag the character string to the Watch window and register it to the window (Drag & drop function
(character string)).
• Select (highlight) the character string whose a data value is to be displayed and register the data
value from the Add Watch dialog box that is opened when right-click menu -> [Add Watch] is
selected.
To search in a source program
Use the Source Search dialog box that is opened by clicking the <Search...> button in the Source
window.
If the character string to be searched exists in the window, select that character string and click the
<Search...> button. The selected character string will be opened in the specified format.
To set a default breakpoint
Set a default breakpoint under On Mouse Click (default break selection area) in the Extended Option
dialog box that is opened when [Option] -> [Extended Option...] is selected from the menu bar. In this
way, a default breakpoint that is assumed when the point mark area is clicked can be set.
To set event after execution
Set an event after execution under Break condition (break mode setting area) in the Extended Option
dialog box that is opened by selecting [Option] -> [Extended Option...] from the menu bar. If a normal
hardware breakpoint is set after this setting was performed, the hardware breakpoint is set as an event
after execution. This setting only affects hardware breakpoints. In the default condition, an event
before execution is set.
Drag & drop function (line/address)
The line number or address selected and highlighted can be dragged to another window or area.
If the position of the line number or address selected in this area is dragged with the left mouse button,
the shape of the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to '-'. When the cursor is moved to the window
or area in which they can be dropped, the mouse cursor changes to 'OK'.
In the window in which the line number of the address has been dropped, an operation is performed on
the dropped address or the address that is obtained from the dropped line number. The operation to
be performed after dropping the line number or address differs, depending on the window or area in
which the line number or address has been dropped.
150
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-19 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Line/Address)
Window/Area to Drop to
Operation After Drop
The Event Manager or the event
manager area in each various
event setting dialog box
Automatically creates an execution event condition by using
the dropped line number or address as an address condition.
Event condition names are automatically created as
Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. An external sense data
condition and path count are not specified.
The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the
format of symbol name + offset value.
Condition setting area in each
various event setting dialog box
(other than address and data
setting areas)
Automatically creates an execution event condition by using
the dropped line number or address as an address condition.
The automatically created event condition is set in each
condition setting area in which the line number or address has
been dropped.
Event condition names are automatically created as
Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. An external sense data
condition and path count are not specified.
The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the
format of symbol name + offset value.
Condition setting area in each
various event setting dialog box
(address and data setting areas)
The text of the dropped line number or address is set in the
area in which the line number or address has been dropped.
The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the
format of symbol name + offset value.
Caution The various event setting dialog boxes includes the Event dialog box, Event Link dialog box,
Break dialog box, Trace dialog box, Snap Shot dialog box, Stub dialog box, and Timer dialog
box.
Drag & drop function (character string)
A selected text can be moved to another window or area by dragging and dropping.
1
If the selected text is dragged by using the left mouse button, the shape of the mouse cursor
changes from an arrow to '-'.
2
When the cursor is moved to the window or area in which the text can be dropped, the mouse
cursor changes to 'OK'.
The operation to be performed after dropping the text differs, depending on the window or area in
which the text has been dropped.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
151
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-20 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Character String)
Window/Area to Drop to
Operation After Drop
The Event Manager or the event
manager area in each various
event setting dialog box
If the dropped text can be converted as a symbol into an
address value, an event condition in the Access status (all
access statuses) or Execute status is automatically created,
using the converted address value as an address condition.
Event condition names are automatically created as
Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. An external sense data
condition and path count are not specified.
The address condition is set by the dropped text.
The relationship between the event condition to be created
and the symbol is as follows:
Symbol
Status
Variable
Access(R/W)
Function
Execute
Symbol in the data section
Access(R/W)
Symbol in the code section
Execute
Other
Access(R/W)
Condition setting area in each
various event setting dialog box
(other than address and data
setting areas)
If the dropped text can be converted as a symbol into an
address value, an event condition in the Access status (all
access statuses) or Execute status is automatically created,
using the converted address value as an address condition.
The automatically created event condition is set in each
condition setting area in which the line number or address has
been dropped.
Event condition names are automatically created as
Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. An external sense data
condition and path count are not specified.
The address condition is set by the dropped text.
The relationship between the event condition to be created
and the symbol is as follows:
Symbol
Status
Variable
Access(R/W)
Function
Execute
Symbol in the data section
Access(R/W)
Symbol in the code section
Execute
Other
Access(R/W)
Condition setting area in each
various event setting dialog box
(address and data setting areas)
The dropped text is set in the area.
Watch window
If the dropped text is recognizable as a symbol, the contents
of the symbol are displayed.
Caution The various event setting dialog boxes includes the Event dialog box, Event Link dialog box,
Break dialog box, Trace window, Snap Shot dialog box, Stub dialog box, and Timer dialog box.
152
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Search dialog box
This dialog box is used to search for the character string in the Source window.
By setting each item and then clicking the <Find Next> button, searching can be started.
By clicking the <Set Find> button, the direction buttons ("<<" and ">>") in the Source windowcan be used
for the search.
Figure 7-24 Source Search Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When Source window is displayed
• Click the <Search> button.
(or press Ctrl and G in that order).
• Select [View] -> [Search...]
(or press Alt+V, and S in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Source Search dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Find What (search data specification area)
(2) Match Case (search condition specification area)
(3) Direction (search direction specification area)
(4) File (search file specification area)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
153
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Find What (search data specification area)
This area is used to specify the data to be searched.
In the default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box is
displayed. As necessary, input data from the keyboard to change the character string.
Up to 256 character string can be specified.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
(2)
Match Case (search condition specification area)
This area is used to specify whether uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished, before
searching is started.
(3)
Checked
Distinguished (default)
Not checked
Not distinguished
Direction (search direction specification area)
This area is used to specify the direction of the search.
(4)
Up
Forward search.
Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position
of the cursor.
Down
Backward search (default).
Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current
position of the cursor.
File (search file specification area)
This area is used to specify the file to be searched.
If no file is specified, searching is executed in the window that called this dialog box.
154
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition.
If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted.
To continue searching, click this button again.
Set Find
Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box.
Stop
(during search)
Stops searching.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button while data is being searched.
Browse...
Opens Browse dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
155
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Assemble window
This window is used to disassemble and display programs. It is also used to execute online assembly.
To execute online assembly, move the cursor to a mnemonic. The results of online assembly are also
reflected in the Memory window.
The Assemble window has two statuses: Active Status and Static Status.
Figure 7-25 Assemble Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• Related operations
Concerning display
• To change the display start position
• To change the displayed offset and register name
Concerning operation
• Start function
• Come function
• Program counter setting function
• Jump function
• To change the disassembled contents
156
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Watch function (referencing data value)
• To search in the Assemble window
• To set a default breakpoint
• To set event after execution
• Drag & drop function (line/address)
• Drag & drop function (character string)
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the Asm button.
• Select [Browse] -> [Assemble] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+B, and A in that order).
• Select [Jump] -> [Assemble] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+J and A in that order, or press Ctrl+D).
Explanation of each area
The Assemble window consists of the following areas:
(1) Point mark area
(2) Current PC mark area
(3) Address specification area
(4) Disassemble display area
(1)
Point mark area
This area is displayed the Breakpoint setting/deletion function and the Event setting status.
(2)
Current PC mark area
The mark '>', which indicates the current PC value (PC register value), is displayed in this area.
By double-clicking the current PC mark area, the program can be executed up to a specified line.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
157
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3)
Address specification area
This area displays the disassembly start address. When this area is clicked, an address highlighted
and selected.
This area has the Drag & drop function (line/address) and the Trace Result with Linking Window
function.
(4)
Disassemble display area
This area displays the labels and code data of addresses, and disassembled mnemonics.
The current PC line and breakpoint setting line are displayed in different colors for emphasis (refer to
"Source text display area").
The disassembled mnemonics displayed in the mnemonic field can be changed (refer to "To change
disassembled contents").
If the number of new instruction bytes is less than the number of previous instruction bytes as a result
of changing, as many 'NOP' instructions as necessary are inserted. If the number of new instruction
bytes is more than the number of previous instruction bytes, the next instruction is overwritten. In this
case also, as many 'NOP' instructions as necessary are inserted. The same applies to instructions
that straddle over source lines.
In this area, the following functions can be used on the line or address on which the cursor is placed
(start address of program code):
-> Start function
-> Come function
-> Program counter setting function
-> Jump Function
A character string selected in this area can be dragged and dropped in another window or dialog box
(refer to "Drag & drop function (character string)").
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
158
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
Move...
Moves the display position.
Opens the Address Move dialog box.
Add Watch
Adds the specified data to the Watch window.
Opens the Add Watch dialog box.
Symbol
Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the
specified symbol.
Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box.
Come Here
Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position (Come
function).
Change PC
Sets the address at the cursor position to the PC.
Break Pont
Sets or deletes a breakpoint at the cursor position.
Software Break Point
Sets or cancels a software break point at the cursor position.
Source Text
Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value
at the cursor position as the jump destination address.
If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you
cannot jump.
Opens the Source window.
If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
Memory
Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address
specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Memory window.
If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
Coverage
Displays the coverage measurement results starting from the jump
destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Coverage window.
If an active Coverage window is open, that window is displayed in the
forefront (so that it can be manipulated).
Function buttons
Search...
Opens the Assemble Search dialog box and searches for a character string of
mnemonics.
If a character string is selected in the disassemble display area, the Assemble
Search dialog box is opened to search for the character string. If no character
string is selected, the Assemble Search dialog box is opened with nothing
specified to be searched.
Specify a search method in the Assemble Search dialog box. The result of
search is highlighted in the Assemble window.
This is the same operation as selecting [View] -> [Search...] from the menu bar.
<<
Searches forward (upward on screen) for the contents that satisfy the search
condition set in the Assemble Search dialog box, starting from the address at the
cursor position.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button during a search.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
159
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
>>
Searches backward (downward on screen) for the contents that satisfy the search
condition set in the Assemble Search dialog box, starting from the address at the
cursor position.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button during a search.
Stop
(during search)
Stops searching.
Watch
Adds the symbols selected in the disassemble display area to the Watch window.
If the Watch window is not opened, it is opened.
If no text is selected in the disassemble display area, the Watch window is only
opened.
This is the same operation as selecting [View] -> [View Watch] from the menu bar.
Quick...
Temporarily displays the contents, such as symbols, selected in the disassemble
display area on the Quick Watch dialog box. Opens the Quick Watch dialog box.
If no text is selected in the disassemble display area, the Quick Watch dialog box
is only opened.
This is the same operation as selecting [View] -> [Quick Watch...] from the menu
bar.
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close
Closes this window.
Related operations
To change the display start position
Change the display start position in the Address Move dialog box, which is opened when right-click
menu -> [Move...] is selected in the Assemble window.
To change the displayed offset and register name
Change the display offset or register name under DisAssemble (offset display setting area) in the
Debugger Option dialog box that is opened when [Option] -> [Debugger Option...] is selected from the
menu bar. A function name or an absolute name can be selected as a register name.
Start function
For the operation, refer to "Start function" in the Source window.
Come function
For the operation, refer to "Come function" in the Source window.
Program counter setting function
For the operation, refer to "Program counter setting function" in the Source window.
Jump function
For the operation, refer to "Jump function" in the Source window.
To change the disassembled contents
For the operation, refer to "To change disassembled contents" in the Source window.
Watch function (referencing data value)
For the operation, refer to "Watch function (referencing data value)" in the Source window.
160
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
To search in the Assemble window
Use the Assemble Search dialog box, which can be opened by clicking the <Search...> button in the
Assemble window. If the character string to be searched is existed in the window, select that character
string and click the <Search...> button. The selected character string is opened in the specified format.
To set a default breakpoint
For details, refer to "To set a default breakpoint" described in the Source window.
To set event after execution
For the operation, refer to "To set event after execution" in the Source window.
Drag & drop function (line/address)
For the operation, refer to "Drag & drop function (line/address)" in the Source window.
Drag & drop function (character string)
For the operation, refer to "Drag & drop function (character string)" in the Source window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
161
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Assemble Search dialog box
This dialog box is used to search the contents of Assemble window.
Successive character strings included in an input character string and disassembler character string are
compared as one blank character.
By setting each item and then clicking the <Find Next> button, searching can be started.
By clicking the <Set Find> button, the direction buttons ("<<" and ">>") in the Assemble windowcan be
used for the search.
Figure 7-26 Assemble Search Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When Assemble windowis the current window
• Click the <Search> button.
(or press Ctrl+G).
• Select [View] -> [Search...]
(or press Alt+V, and S in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Assemble Search dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Find What (search data specification area)
(2) Match Case (search condition specification area)
(3) Scan Whole Region (search condition specification area)
(4) Direction (search direction specification area)
162
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Address (search range specification area)
(1)
Find What (search data specification area)
This area is used to specify the data to be searched.
In the default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box is
displayed. As necessary, input data from the keyboard to change the character string.
Up to 256 character string can be specified.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
(2)
Match Case (search condition specification area)
This area is used to specify whether uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished, before
searching is started.
(3)
Checked
Distinguished (default)
Not checked
Not distinguished
Scan Whole Region (search condition specification area)
This area is used to specify whether the specified range is fully searched or not.
(4)
Checked
Searches the entire range.
Not checked
Searches the remaining part of the range (default)
Direction (search direction specification area)
This area is used to specify the direction of the search.
Up
Forward search.
Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position
of the cursor.
Down
Backward search (default).
Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current
position of the cursor.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
163
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5)
Address (search range specification area)
This area is used to specify the address to be searched.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Function buttons
164
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition.
If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted.
To continue searching, click this button again.
Set Find
Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box.
Stop
(during search)
Stops searching.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button while data is being searched.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory window
This window is used to display and change the memory contents.
The display start position when the Memory window is opened is as follows:
First time
Display starts from the first address of the real-time RAM sampling area.
Second and subsequent
times
Display starts from the address at which an active status window was
closed
(if an active status window has never been closed, display starts from
the first display start position).
Even while the program is being executed, the range set in the Extended Option dialog box can be
displayed in real time.
The Memory window has two statuses: Active Status and Static Status.
Figure 7-27 Memory Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To change the memory contents
• To change the display start position
• To search in the Memory window
• To display ASCII characters
• To initialize the memory contents with a specified code
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
165
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• To copy the memory contents
• To compare the memory contents
• To verify and check a memory write
• To change the memory contents in real time during program execution (DMM function)
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the Mem button.
• Select [Browse] -> [Memory...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+B, and M in that order).
• Select [Jump] -> [Memory...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+J, and M in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Memory window consists of the following areas:
(1) Addr (address display area)
(2) +0 +1 +2....(memory display area)
(3) 0 1 2 3.... (ASCII display area)
(1)
Addr (address display area)
This area displays memory addresses.
(2)
+0 +1 +2....(memory display area)
This area is used to display and change the memory contents.
Data into which the current memory contents are to be changed is displayed in red and is actually
written to the target when the Enter key is pressed. The contents (displayed in red) can be canceled
by the ESC key. Up to 256 bytes can be specified at one time.
166
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
This area is also used as a jump pointer of the jump function. In addition, it also has the Trace Result
with Linking Window function.
(3)
0 1 2 3.... (ASCII display area)
This area is used to display and change the memory contents in ASCII characters.
This area is displayed when right-click menu -> [Ascii] is selected. Display of this area can be turned
on/off by this menu item.
Data can be changed in this area in the same manner as in the memory display area.
This area is also used as a jump pointer of the jump function.
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
Move...
Moves the display position.
Opens the Address Move dialog box.
Bin
Displays binary numbers.
Oct
Displays octal numbers.
Dec
Displays decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays hexadecimal numbers (default).
Nibble
Displays in 4-bit units.
Byte
Displays in 8-bit units (default).
Half word
Displays in 16-bit units.
Word
Displays in 32-bit units.
Ascii
Turns on/off display of ASCII characters.
Checked: Displayed
Not checked: No display (default)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
167
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Search...
Opens the Memory Search dialog box and searches for character strings from
the displayed memory contents, or memory contents.
Selected data (a memory value) is displayed in the Memory Search dialog box
as data to be searched. If the Memory Search dialog box is opened without
data specified, specify data from the keyboard.
The result of the search is highlighted in the Memory window.
<<
Searches the memory contents satisfying the search condition set in the
Memory Search dialog box, forward (upward on screen) from the address at the
cursor position.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button during a search.
>>
Searches the memory contents satisfying the search condition set in the
Memory Search dialog box, backward (downward on screen) from the address
at the cursor position.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button during a search.
Stop
(during search)
Stops searching.
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Modify...
Opens the DMM dialog box.
This button is invalid at a break.
Close
Closes this window.
Related operations
To change the memory contents
To change the memory contents, move the cursor to the memory display area or ASCII display area in
the window, and write data directly from the keyboard. The amount of memory contents that can be
changed at one time is 256 bytes or less. To set the change, press the return key. To cancel the
change, press the ESC key.
To change the display start position
Use the Address Move dialog box, which can be opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Move] in the
Memory window.
To search in the Memory window
Use the Memory Search dialog box, which can be opened by clicking the <Search...> button in the
Memory window. If the character string to be searched exists in the window, select that character
string and click the <Search...> button. The selected character string is opened in the specified format.
Non-mapped, peripheral I/O register, and I/O protect areas are not searched.
To display ASCII characters
The memory contents are displayed in ASCII characters when right-click menu -> [Ascii] is selected in
the Memory window.
168
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
To turn off display of ASCII characters, select [Ascii] again to remove the check mark.
To initialize the memory contents with a specified code
Initialize the memory contents with a specified code in the Memory Fill dialog box, which can be
opened by selecting [Edit] -> [Memory] -> [Initialize] from the menu bar.
If verify check is enabled in the Extended Option dialog box, verify check is executed after initialization.
To copy the memory contents
Copy the memory contents in the Memory Copy dialog box, which can be opened by selecting [Edit] ->
[Memory] -> [Copy] from the menu bar.
If verify check is enabled in the Extended Option dialog box, verify check is executed after copy.
To compare the memory contents
Compare the memory contents in the Memory Compare dialog box, which can be opened by selecting
[Edit] -> [Memory] -> [Compare] from the menu bar.
If a difference is found as a result of comparison, the Memory Compare Result dialog box is opened
and the details are displayed in this dialog box.
To verify and check a memory write
Use the Extended Option dialog box, which is opened by selecting [Option] -> [Extended Option] from
the menu bar. To execute a verify check, check the [Verify] check box.
To change the memory contents in real time during program execution (DMM function)
Set addresses and data for DMM (Dynamic Memory Modification) in the DMM dialog box, which can
be opened by selecting [Edit] -> [Memory] -> [Modify] from the menu bar.
Note that this dialog box can be opened only while the program is being executed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
169
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Search dialog box
This dialog box is used to search the memory contents of the part of Memory window at which the cursor
is located.
If the cursor is in the memory display area, the memory display area is searched for specified data, which
is assumed to be a binary data string. If the cursor is in the ASCII display area, the ASCII display area is
searched for specified data, which is assumed to be an ASCII character string.
By setting each item and then clicking the <Find Next> button, searching can be started.
By clicking the <Set Find> button, the direction buttons ("<<" and ">>") in the Memory window can be
used for the search.
Non-mapped, peripheral I/O register, and I/O protect areas are not searched.
Figure 7-28 Memory Search Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When Memory windowis the current window
• Click the <Search> button.
(or press Ctrl+G).
• Select [View] -> [Search...]
(or press Alt+V, and S in that order).
170
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Memory Search dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Find What (search data specification area)
(2) Unit (search condition specification area)
(3) Scan Whole Region (search condition specification area)
(4) Direction (search direction specification area)
(5) Address (search range specification area)
(1)
Find What (search data specification area)
This area is used to specify the data to be searched.
In the default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box is
displayed. As necessary, input data from the keyboard to change the character string.
When searching the memory display area, up to 16 data items can be specified. Delimit each data
with a "blank character". When searching the ASCII display area, data of up to 256 characters can be
specified. A "blank character" in the data is treated as a blank character.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
(2)
Unit (search condition specification area)
This area is used to specify the number of bits of the data to be searched in the memory display area.
(3)
Byte
Searches the data as 8-bit data (default).
Half Word
Searches the data as 16-bit data.
Word
Searches the data as 32-bit data.
Scan Whole Region (search condition specification area)
This area is used to specify whether the specified range is fully searched or not.
Checked
Searches the entire range.
Not checked
Searches the remaining part of the range (default)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
171
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4)
Direction (search direction specification area)
This area is used to specify the direction of the search.
(5)
Up
Forward search.
Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position
of the cursor.
Down
Backward search (default).
Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current
position of the cursor.
Address (search range specification area)
This area is used to specify the address to be searched.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Function buttons
172
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition.
If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted.
To continue searching, click this button again.
Set Find
Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box.
Stop
(during search)
Stops searching.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button while data is being searched.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Fill dialog box
This dialog box is used to initialize the memory contents in the Memory window with specified codes.
Figure 7-29 Memory Fill Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Edit] -> [Memory] -> [Fill] from the menu bar.
(or press Alt+E, M and F in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Memory Fill dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Address (address range specification area)
(2) fill code (data specification area)
(1)
Address (address range specification area)
This area is used to specify the memory address range whose contents are to be initialized.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Input the first address to be initialized and then the last address to be initialized.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
173
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2)
fill code (data specification area)
This area is used to specify the data with which the memory contents are to be initialized.
Up to 16 binary data strings (byte data strings) can be specified.
Delimit each data with a "blank character".
Function buttons
174
OK
Initializes the memory.
Stop
(during initialization)
Stops initialization.
While initialization is in progress, the <Cancel> button is replaced by the
<Stop> button.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
While memory contents are being initialized, this button is replaced by the
<Stop> button.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Copy dialog box
This dialog box is used to copy the memory contents in the Memory window.
Figure 7-30 Memory Copy Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Edit] -> [Memory] -> [Copy] from the menu bar.
(or press Alt+E, M and C in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Memory Copy dialog box consists of the following area:
(1) Address (address range specification area)
(1)
Address (address range specification area)
This area is used to specify the copy source and copy destination addresses.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
175
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
From
Specify the address range of the copy source.
Input the first address of the copy source and then the end address.
To
Specify the first address of the copy destination.
Function buttons
176
OK
Copies the memory.
Stop
(during copying)
Stops copying.
While copying is in progress, the <Cancel> button is replaced by the <Stop>
button.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
While copying is in progress, this button is replaced by the <Stop> button.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Compare dialog box
This dialog box is used to compare the memory contents in the Memory window.
Figure 7-31 Memory Compare Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Edit] -> [Memory] -> [Compare] from the menu bar.
(or press Alt+E, M and P in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Memory Compare dialog box consists of the following area:
(1) Address (comparison range specification area)
(1)
Address (comparison range specification area)
This area is used to specify the comparison source address and comparison destination address.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
177
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Mem1
Specify the address range of the comparison source.
Input the first address of the comparison source and then the end address.
Mem2
Specify the first address of the comparison destination.
Function buttons
OK
Compares the memory.
If no difference is found as a result of comparison, a confirmation dialog box
is displayed. If a difference is found, Memory Compare Result dialog box is
opened.
Figure 7-32 Confirmation Dialog Box
Clicking the <OK> button ends memory comparison.
178
Stop
(during comparison)
Stops memory comparison.
While comparison is in progress, the <Cancel> button is replaced by the
<Stop> button.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
While comparison is in progress, this button is replaced by the <Stop> button.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Compare Result dialog box
Displays the result of comparing the memory.
This dialog box is displayed if any difference is found in the memory contents when the memory has been
compared in Memory Compare dialog box.
Figure 7-33 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Explanation of each area
The Memory Compare Result dialog box consists of the following area:
(1) Mem1, Mem2 (comparison result display area)
(1)
Mem1, Mem2 (comparison result display area)
This area displays the results of comparing the memory. Only differences that have been found as a
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
179
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
result of comparison are displayed.
Mem1 Addr
Displays a comparison source address in which a difference has been found.
Memory
Displays the data in which a difference has been found.
Left: Comparison source data
Right: Comparison destination data
Mem2 Addr
Displays the comparison destination address at which a difference has been
found.
Function buttons
180
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
DMM dialog box
This dialog box is used to set addresses and data for DMM (Dynamic Memory Modification).
DMM is used to rewrite the memory contents in real time while the user program is being executed.
Because this function is implemented by software emulation, however, the user program under execution
is temporarily stopped and then executed again.
Caution The following points must be noted when using the DMM function.
- If data is written to an address for which a software break is set, the program may not run
correctly.
- If the program is stopped immediately before rewriting the memory because a break event is
generated, the generated break event is invalid because program execution is resumed,
regardless of the break event.
- Verify check is always invalid.
Figure 7-34 DMM Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Edit] -> [Memory] -> [Modify] from the menu bar.
(or press Alt+E, M and M in that order).
• Click the <Modify> button in the Memory window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
181
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The DMM dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Address (address setting area)
(2) Data (data setting area)
(3) Data Size (data size setting area)
(1)
Address (address setting area)
This area is used to specify the address to which data is to be written.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
(2)
Data (data setting area)
This area is used to specify the data to be written to the memory address specified in Address.
One binary data string can be specified at one time. Specify the data size in Data Size. Specify the
data size in Data Size. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
(3)
Data Size (data size setting area)
This area is used to specify the size of the data to be written.
Byte
Writes data specified in Data as 8-bit data.
Half Word
Writes data specified in Data as 16-bit data.
Word
Writes data specified in Data as 32-bit data.
Function buttons
182
OK
Writes the data.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Watch window
This window is used to display and change specified data.
The result of updating and rewriting data in this window will be reflected in the Memory window.
This window can also display wide-ranging data (such as global variables and public symbols) in real time
even during program execution, in the same way as the Memory window.
To set a breakpoint for read/write access to a variable can be performed by a single action from the menu
that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button.
Caution
If a local variable and a global variable exist with the same name, the local variable takes
priority.
Figure 7-35 Watch Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To add/delete displayed data (variable)
• To change data on the selected line
• To temporarily display a data (variable) value
• To display/change a local variable value
• To set a breakpoint for read/write access to a variable
• To change displayed radix/size
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
183
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the Wch button.
Select [Browse] -> [Watch] from the menu bar,
(or press Alt+B, and W in that order).
Select data in the Source window or Assemble window,
• Select [View] -> [View Watch] from the menu bar,
(or press Alt+ V, and I in that order),
or click the <Watch> button.
In the Quick Watch dialog box or Add Watch dialog box dialog box,
• Click the <Add> button.
Explanation of each area
The Watch window consists of the following areas:
(1) Left field (symbol name display area)
(2) Right field (data value display/setting area)
(1)
Left field (symbol name display area)
This area is used to display variable names, symbol names and types, and tag names of structures or
unions.
Refer to "Name (symbol specification area)" in the Add Watch dialog box for details on the displayed
contents.
'+' is prefixed to the displayed arrays, pointer variables, and structures or unions. These variables are
expanded and displayed as follows when they are double-clicked:
Array
184
All the elements of the variable are displayed in accordance with the type
of the array variable.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Pointer variable
The data indicated by the pointer is displayed.
Structure/union
All the members of the structure/union are displayed in accordance with
the type of the member variable.
If a structure or union is defined in the structure or union, the structure
name or union name of the internal structure or union is also displayed.
The internal structure or union can be also expanded by using '+'.
'+' of the variable that has been expanded and displayed changes to '-'. If the variable is doubleclicked in this status, the expanded display is canceled. Expanded display can be also specified or
canceled by selecting a variable with the arrow keys and then pressing the Enter key.
If an access breakpoint is set for a variable or a symbol in the Watch window, the symbol name display
area is highlighted in gold.
Reference If an array has too many variables and takes too long to expand, a warning message is
displayed.
(2)
Right field (data value display/setting area)
This area is used to display and change data values.
A value is updated when execution is stopped. To save a value, select [File ] -> [Save As...] from the
menu bar when the Save window is the current window. This area is blank if getting data has failed.
'?' is displayed for data that has been invalidated because of a change in the scope or optimized
compiling. The contents of the change are written into the target when the Enter key is pressed. The
previous value can be canceled by the ESC key.
The display format is as follows:
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
185
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-21 Data Display Format (Watch-Related)
Display Data
Contents
Integer
Displayed in the same manner as the language specified in the
Debugger Option dialog box.
C-like (value: xxxx)
Hexadecimal (0xxxxx)
Decimal (xxxx)
Octal (0xxxx)
Binary (0bxxxx)
Assembly language-like (value: xxxx)
Hexadecimal (xxxxH)
Decimal (xxxxT)
Octal (xxxxQ)
Binary (0bxxxxY)
Enumeration type
Member name
If scope is specified
Displayed in accordance with specified scope
Floating-point type
Single precision/double precision supported
The input/display format is as follows:
[ + | - ] inf
[ + | - ] nan
[ + | - ] integer e [ + | - ]exponent
[ + | - ] integer.fraction [e [ + | - ]exponent
The size and radix of a data value can be specified on the [View] menu for each variable.
However, the display size cannot be selected if the display size is fixed, such as for variables in C or bit
symbols or registers of the assembler.
If [View] -> [Adaptive] or [View] -> [Proper] from the menu bar is selected, the size and radix specified
in the Debugger Option dialog box are used for display (refer to "To change displayed radix/size").
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
186
Break when Access
to this Variable
Creates a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for
read/write.
Break when Write to
this Variable
Creates a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for
write.
Break when Read
from this Variable
Creates a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for
read.
Clear
Deletes the break event corresponding to the selected variable.
Event?
Displays the event information of the line at the cursor position or the
selected variable.
If an event is set, Event dialog box is opened.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Change Watch...
Changes the selected data.
Delete Watch
Deletes the selected watch point from the window.
Bin
Displays the selected line in binary numbers.
Oct
Displays the selected line in octal numbers.
Dec
Displays the selected line in decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers.
String
Displays the selected line as a character string.
Proper
Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable.
Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of Debugger Option
dialog box (default).
Byte
Displays the selected line in 8-bit units.
Half Word
Displays the selected line in 16-bit units.
Word
Displays the selected line in 32-bit units.
Adaptive
Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable.
Only this item is valid for a symbol in C language.
Symbols in assembly language are displayed in accordance with the setting
of Debugger Option dialog box (default).
Up
Moves the selected line one line up.
Down
Moves the selected line one line down.
Function buttons
Add...
Opens the Add Watch dialog box.
If data is specified and the <Add...> button is clicked in the Add Watch dialog
box, the specified data is added to the Watch window.
Delete
Deletes the specified data from the Watch window.
The DEL key performs the same operation.
Up
Moves the selected data one line up.
Down
Moves the selected data one line down.
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close
Closes this window.
Related operations
To add/delete displayed data (variable)
Addition method (any of the following)
• Select a variable name or symbol name and click the <Watch> button in the Source window or
Assemble window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
187
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Select a variable name or symbol name in the Source window or Assemble window, and drag it to
the Watch window.
• Specify a variable name or symbol name and click the <Add> button in the Quick Watch dialog box
or Add Watch dialog box.
Deletion method
• Click a variable name or symbol name (two or more variable or symbol names can be selected
using the Shift or Ctrl key), and click the <Delete> button. A line with an expanded hierarchy, such
as the elements of an array, and members of structures and unions cannot be changed.
To change data on the selected line
To change data (variables), select a line to be changed in the Watch window and select right-click
menu -> [Change Watch...]. The Change Watch dialog box will be opened to change the data.
A line with an expanded hierarchy, such as the elements of an array, and members of structures and
unions cannot be deleted.
To temporarily display a data (variable) value
A data (variable) value can be temporarily displayed in the following two ways:
To display using the balloon watch function
Select data (a variable name) in the Source window or Assemble window. Then place the mouse
cursor on the selected character string. The value of the selected data will be displayed.
To display in the Quick Watch dialog box
Select data (a variable name) in the Source window or Assemble window. Then click the <Quick...>
button. The value of the selected data will be displayed in the Quick Watch dialog box.
To display/change a local variable value
A local variable value can be checked or changed in the Local Variable window, which is opened when
the Loc button is clicked.
In this window, the local variable in the current function is automatically displayed and the displayed
variable cannot be added or deleted.
To change a local variable value, move the cursor to the local variable value display/changing area on
the window and write a value in this area directly from the keyboard.
To determine the displayed contents, use the Enter key. To cancel, use the ESC key.
To set a breakpoint for read/write access to a variable
Select a variable in the Watch window and select [Break when Access to this Variable], [Break when
Write to this Variable] or [Break when Read from this Variable] from the right-click menu. In this way, a
hardware break event will be created in the valid status in accordance with the selected item.
Whether the event has been correctly created can be confirmed on the Event Manager.
To change displayed radix/size
Changing each data (variable) at any time
Select a data (variable) name to be changed in the Watch window or Quick Watch dialog box, and
select the radix and size from the right-click menu.
188
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Specifying default condition
Adaptive (when display size is specified) or Proper (when display radix is specified) for watching a
symbol that specifies a default value can be set as the default assumption.
This is done in the Watch Default area of the Debugger Option dialog box, which is opened when
[Option] -> [Debugger Option...] is selected from the menu bar.
The size specified under Size is displayed when Adaptive is specified, and the radix specified under
Radix is displayed when Proper is specified.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
189
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Quick Watch dialog box
This dialog box is used to temporarily display or change specified data.
Figure 7-36 Quick Watch Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [View] -> [Quick Watch...]
(or press Alt+V, and Q in that order).
• Click the <Quick> button in Source window.
(or press Ctrl+W).
• Click the <Quick> button in Assemble window.
(or press Ctrl+W).
Explanation of each area
The Quick Watch dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Name (symbol specification area)
(2) Symbol name display area
(3) Data value display/setting area
(4) Display radix selection area (upper left field)
190
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Display size selection area (second upper left field)
(6) Number (display number specification area)
(1)
Name (symbol specification area)
This area is used to specify the data to be displayed.
In the default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box is
displayed. As necessary, input data from the keyboard to change the character string. This area is
blank if no character string is selected.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
If the contents of Name have been changed, the data specified in Name can be displayed in the field
below by clicking the <View> button.
(2)
Symbol name display area
This area is used to display the variable name and the symbol name.
The displayed contents are the same as those of Name (symbol specification area) in the Add Watch
dialog box.
(3)
Data value display/setting area
This area is used to display and change data values. The displayed contents and display method are
the same as those of Watch window.
The displayed contents are the same as those of Right field (data value display/setting area) in the
Watch window.
(4)
Display radix selection area (upper left field)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
191
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
This area is used to select the display radix.
The display radix of the data name selected in the symbol name display area will be changed.
(5)
Proper
Variable
The default value of each variable is displayed.
Symbol
Displays data with the radix set in Debugger Option dialog box.
Hex
Displays data in hexadecimal numbers (0xxxxx)
Dec
Displays data in decimal numbers (xxxx)
Oct
Displays data in octal numbers (0xxxx)
Bin
Displays data in binary numbers (0bxxxx)
String
Displays character strings.
Display size selection area (second upper left field)
This area is used to select the display size.
The display size of the data selected in the symbol name display area will be changed.
If the display size is fixed, such as when a variable in C or register is to be displayed, it cannot be
changed.
(6)
Adaptive
Variable
The default value of each variable is displayed.
Symbol
Displays data with the size set in Debugger Option dialog box.
Byte
Displays data in 8 bits.
Half Word
Displays data in 16 bits.
Word
Displays data in 32 bits.
Number (display number specification area)
This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed.
Specify blank or a number of 1 to 256.
If this area is blank, data is displayed as a simple variable.
If a number of 1 or more is specified, data is displayed as an array variable.
If an array variable is displayed, '+' is prefixed to the data. By double-clicking this '+', all the elements
of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the type of the data ('-' is prefixed to the
expanded data. If this '-' is double-clicked, the expanded display is canceled).
If the number of data to be displayed is fixed, such as when a variable in C or register is to be
displayed, the specified number of data is invalid.
192
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
View
Displays the data specified in Name in the field below.
Add
Displays the data specified in Name to the Watch window.
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Data that has not actually been written to the target will be canceled.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
193
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Add Watch dialog box
This dialog box is used to register data to be displayed in the Watch window.
Multiple data with the same symbol name can be registered.
Figure 7-37 Add Watch Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [View] -> [Add Watch...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+V, and W in that order).
• Click the <Add> button in Watch window.
Explanation of each area
The Add Watch dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Name (symbol specification area)
(2) Radix (display radix selection area)
(3) Size (display size specification area)
(4) Number (display number specification area)
194
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Name (symbol specification area)
This area is used to specify data to be added to the Watch window.
In the default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box is
displayed. As necessary, input data from the keyboard to change the character string. This area is
blank if no character string is selected.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
The format in which a variable can be input and how a variable is handled when a scope is specified
are as follows:
• Variable Name
Variable expression : Variable Name
|Variable expression[Constant value | Variable Name]
Elements of array
|Variable expression . Member name
Entity members of structure/union
|Variable expression -> Member name
Members of structure/union indicated by pointer
|*Variable expression
Value of pointer variable
|&Variable expression
Address where variable is located
• Register name
• IOR name, IOR bit name
• Label and address of immediate value
• Register name . bit
• Label name . bit , address of immediate value . bit
• Specification of scope
Scope Specification
Program name
File name
Function name
Variable
Name
prog$file#func#var
prog
file
func
var
prog$file#var
prog
file
Global
var
prog$func#var
prog
Global
func
var
prog$var
prog
Global
Global
var
file#func#var
Current
file
func
var
file#var
Current
file
Global
var
func#var
Current
Current
func
var
var
Current
Current
Current
var
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
195
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2)
Radix (display radix selection area)
This area is used to change the radix of the data to be displayed.
(3)
Proper
Variable
The default value of each variable is displayed.
Symbol
Displays data with the radix set in Debugger Option dialog box.
Hex
Displays data in hexadecimal numbers (0xxxxx)
Dec
Displays data in decimal numbers (xxxx)
Oct
Displays data in octal numbers (0xxxx)
Bin
Displays data in binary numbers (0bxxxx)
String
Displays character strings.
Size (display size specification area)
This area is used to change the size of data to be displayed.
If the display size is fixed, such as when a variable in C or a bit symbol or register of the assembler is
to be displayed, it cannot be changed.
(4)
Adaptive
Variable
The default value of each variable is displayed.
Symbol
Displays data with the size set in Debugger Option dialog box.
Byte
Displays data in 8 bits.
Half Word
Displays data in 16 bits.
Word
Displays data in 32 bits.
Number (display number specification area)
This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed.
Specify blank or a number of 1 to 256.
If this area is blank, data is displayed in Watch window as a simple variable.
If a number of 1 or more is specified, data is displayed in the Watch window as an array variable.
The maximum number of lines that can be displayed in the Watch window is 10,000.
If an array variable is displayed, '+' is prefixed to the data. By double-clicking this '+', all the elements
of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the type of the data ('-' is prefixed to the
expanded data. If this '-' is double-clicked, the expanded display is canceled).
If the number of data to be displayed is fixed, such as when a variable in C or register is to be
196
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
displayed, the number of data is invalid in the Watch window even if it has been changed.
Function buttons
Add
Adds the specified data to the Watch window.
The dialog box remains open.
OK
Adds the specified data to the Watch window.
Closes this dialog box.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
197
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Change Watch dialog box
This window is used to change the data on a line selected in the Watch window.
A line with an open hierarchy, such as the elements of an array, and members of structures and unions
cannot be changed.
When watch data is changed, the contents of the selected line are replaced with the new data.
The symbol name can be changed even if it results in duplication of a name already in use with existing
data.
Figure 7-38 Change Watch Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When the Watch window is open or a line is selected
• Select [View] -> [Change Watch...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+V, and G in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Change Watch dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Name (symbol specification area)
(2) Radix (display radix selection area)
(3) Size (display size specification area)
(4) Number (display number specification area)
198
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Name (symbol specification area)
This area is used to change a symbol name.
By displaying the input history, the contents previously input can be reused. Up to 16 input histories
can be recorded.
The format in which a symbol name can be input is the same as that of Name (symbol specification
area) in the Add Watch dialog box.
(2)
Radix (display radix selection area)
This area is used to change the radix of data to be displayed.
(3)
Proper
Variable
The default value of each variable is displayed.
Symbol
Displays data with the radix set in Debugger Option dialog box.
Hex
Displays data in hexadecimal numbers (0xxxxx)
Dec
Displays data in decimal numbers (xxxx)
Oct
Displays data in octal numbers (0xxxx)
Bin
Displays data in binary numbers (0bxxxx)
String
Displays character strings.
Size (display size specification area)
Displays and modifies variables.
If the display size is fixed, such as when a variable in C or register is to be displayed, it cannot be
changed.
(4)
Adaptive
Variable
The default value of each variable is displayed.
Symbol
Displays data with the size set in Debugger Option dialog box.
Byte
Displays data in 8 bits.
Half Word
Displays data in 16 bits.
Word
Displays data in 32 bits.
Number (display number specification area)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
199
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed.
Specify blank or a number of 1 to 256.
If this area is blank, data is displayed in Watch window as a simple variable.
If a number of 1 or more is specified, data is displayed in the Watch window as an array variable.
The maximum number of lines that can be displayed in the Watch window is 10,000.
If an array variable is displayed, '+' is prefixed to the data. By double-clicking this '+', all the elements
of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the type of the data ('-' is prefixed to the
expanded data. If this '-' is double-clicked, the expanded display is canceled).
f the number of data to be displayed is fixed, such as when a variable in C or register is to be
displayed, the number of data is invalid in the Watch window even if it has been changed.
Function buttons
200
Add
Cannot be selected.
OK
Replaces the registration contents currently selected with the specified data,
and then closes this dialog box.
Closes this dialog box.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Local Variable window
This window is used to display and change the local variable in the current function.
This window automatically displays the local variable in the current function. It is linked with the jump
function of the Stack Trace window, and displays the local variable in the function jumped when jumping to
the Source window. Variables cannot be added or deleted.
Figure 7-39 Local Variable Window,
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the Loc button.
• Select [Browse] -> [Local Variable] from the menu bar,
(or press Alt,+B, and L in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Local Variable window consists of the following areas:
(1) Left field (local variable name display area)
(2) Right field (local variable value display/setting area)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
201
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Left field (local variable name display area)
This area displays local variable name.
Auto, internal Static, and Register variables can be displayed.
The display format is the same as that of the Watch window.
This area cannot be edited directly.
(2)
Right field (local variable value display/setting area)
This area displays local variable values.
The display format of the variable value is the same as that of the Watch window.
The display radix of variables can be switched by the menu selection in accordance with each variable.
The new value is written into the target when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be
canceled by the ESC key.
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
202
Add Watch
Registers a selected character string to the Watch window.
Opens the Add Watch dialog box.
Bin
Displays the selected line in binary numbers.
Oct
Displays the selected line in octal numbers.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Dec
Displays the selected line in decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers.
String
Displays the selected line as a character string.
Proper
Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable.
Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of Debugger
Option dialog box (default).
Function buttons
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close
Closes this window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
203
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Stack Trace window
This window is used to display or change the current stack contents of the user program.
From this window, you can also jump to the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window, and
Coverage window corresponding to the stack contents.
Caution
The stack trace display function may not operate correctly if there is a function that does not
create a stack frame. In addition, [ERROR] may be displayed during prologue or epilogue
processing of a function.
Figure 7-40 Stack Trace Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the Stk button.
• Select [Browse] -> [Stack Trace] from the menu bar,
(or press Alt+B , and K in that order).
204
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Stack Trace window consists of the following areas:
(1) Left field (stack frame number display area)
(2) Center field (stack frame contents display area)
(3) Right field (stack contents display/setting area)
(1)
Left field (stack frame number display area)
This area assigns numbers to and displays the stack contents.
A stack frame number is a natural number starting from 1. The shallower the nesting of the stack, the
higher the number. This means that a function having stack number one higher than that of a certain
function is the function that calls the certain function.
(2)
Center field (stack frame contents display area)
This area displays the stack frame contents.
It displays function names or local variable names. Note, however, that this area cannot be directly
edited.
If the stack contents consist of a function, they are displayed as follows:
program name$file name#function name (argument list) #line number
If this line is double-clicked, the operation will be the same as jumping to the Source window of the
jump function (i.e., the local variable in the function to which execution has jumped will be displayed in
the Local Variable window).
If the function has a local variable, the local variable will be displayed on the next and subsequent
lines.
If the stack contents consist of a local variable, its type and name are displayed. These are displayed
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
205
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
in the same manner as in the Watch window. Note that the internal Static and Register variables are
not displayed.
(3)
Right field (stack contents display/setting area)
This area is used to display or change the stack contents.
'-' or a local variable value is displayed. If the stack contents are a function '-' is displayed and the
function cannot be changed.
If the stack contents are a local variable, the variable value is displayed in the same manner as in the
Watch window.
The display radix of variables can be switched by the menu selection in accordance with each variable.
A variable value can be changed. The new value is written into the target when the Enter key is
pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key.
This area is used as the jump source area of the jump function.
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
206
Bin
Displays the selected line in binary numbers.
Oct
Displays the selected line in octal numbers.
Dec
Displays the selected line in decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers.
String
Displays the selected line as a character string.
Proper
Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable.
Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of Debugger Option dialog
box (default).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Text
Displays the corresponding source text and source line from the jump
destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position (the local
variable in the function to which you have jumped is displayed in the Local
Variable window).
If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you
cannot jump.
Opens the Source window.
If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Assemble
Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified
by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Assemble window.
If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
Memory
Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address
specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Memory window.
If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Coverage
Displays the coverage measurement results starting from the jump destination
address specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Coverage window.
If an active Coverage window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
Function buttons
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Shrink<<<
Collapses the local variable list of the selected function.
Expand>>>
Displays the local variable list of the selected function.
Close
Closes this window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
207
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Register window
This window is used to display and change the contents of registers (program registers and system
registers).
The register to be displayed in this window can be selected in the Register Select dialog box.
Figure 7-41 Register Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To change a register value
• To select the register to be displayed
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the Reg button.
• Select [Browse] -> [Register] from the menu bar,
(or press Alt+B, and R in that order).
208
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Register window consists of the following areas:
(1) Upper left field (program register display area)
(2) Lower left field (system register display area)
(1)
Upper left field (program register display area)
This area is used to display or change the contents of program registers.
The new value is written into the target when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be
canceled by the ESC key.
This area is also used as a jump pointer of the jump function.
(2)
Lower left field (system register display area)
This area is used to display or change the contents of system registers.
The new value is written into the target when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be
canceled by the ESC key.
If the name of a register with '+' prefixed is double-clicked, the names and values of its flags are
displayed, and '+' changes to '-'. This '+' can be also changed to '-' by selecting a register name with
the arrow keys and pressing the Enter key.
This area is also used as a jump pointer of the jump function.
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
Add Watch
Registers a selected character string to the Watch window.
Opens the Add Watch dialog box.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
209
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Bin
Displays the selected line in binary numbers.
Oct
Displays the selected line in octal numbers.
Dec
Displays the selected line in decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers (default).
Pick Up
Displays only the registers selected in Register Select dialog box.
Checked: Displays only the selected register.
Not checked: Displays all the registers (default).
Select...
Opens the Register Select dialog box.
Function buttons
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close
Closes this window.
Related operations
To change a register value
To change the value of a register, move the cursor to the system register display area or program
register display area in the window, and directly write a value from the keyboard.
Press the return key to set the new value. To cancel the change, press the ESC key.
To select the register to be displayed
Use the Register Select dialog box, which can be opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Select...] in
the Register window.
210
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Register Select dialog box
This dialog box is used to select registers that are not displayed in the Register window.
Figure 7-42 Register Select Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When Register window is the current window,
• Select [View] -> [Select...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+V, and E in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Register Select dialog box consists of the following area:
(1) Display, No Display (display register selection area)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
211
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Display, No Display (display register selection area)
This area is used to select registers that are displayed in the Register window, and those that are not.
Display
Registers displayed in the Register window.
No Display
Registers not displayed in the Register window.
To display or not display a register in the Register window, select a register name from these lists, and
click the <<<Show> or <Hide>>> button. To display all the registers, click the <<<Show All> button. To
not display any of the registers, click the <<<Hide All> button.
The function of each button is as follows:
<< Show
Moves the register selected from the No Display list to Display.
Hide >>
Moves the register selected from the Display list to No Display.
<< Show All
Moves all registers to Display.
Hide All >>
Moves all registers to No Display.
When selecting a register from the lists, two or more registers can be selected by clicking any of the
above buttons while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key.
Function buttons
212
OK
Reflects the selection in this dialog box inRegister window and closes this
dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
IOR window
This window is used to display and change the contents of peripheral I/O registers and the I/O ports that
have been registered in the Add I/O Port dialog box.
Note, however, that the values of read-only peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports cannot be changed. In
addition, the peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports that cause the device to operate when they are read are
read-protected and therefore cannot be read.
To read these registers, select a register, and select and execute [Compulsion Read] from the right-click
menu.
Reference If the device supports programmable I/O registers and a programmable I/O area has been set
in the Configuration dialog box, the programmable I/O registers are also displayed. If the
value of an I/O port address is defined, the I/O port name is displayed in light color.
Figure 7-43 IOR Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To change a peripheral I/O register value
• To select a peripheral I/O register or I/O port to be displayed
• To change the display sequence
• To change the display radix
• To add, change the contents of, and delete a user-defined I/O port
• To change the display start position
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
213
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening
This window box can be opened as follows:
• Click the IOR button.
• Select [Browse] -> [I/O Register] from the menu bar
(or press Alt,+B, and G in that order).
Explanation of each area
The IOR window consists of the following areas:
(1) Name (peripheral I/O register name display area)
(2) Attribute (attribute display area)
(3) Value (peripheral I/O register contents display area)
(1)
Name (peripheral I/O register name display area)
This area displays the names of peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports.
When the IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used, it also displays the programmable
peripheral I/O registers and expansion peripheral I/O registers.
If the value of an I/O port address is not defined, the I/O port name displayed in light color.
(2)
Attribute (attribute display area)
This area displays the read/write attributes, access types, and absolute addresses of the peripheral I/O
registers and I/O ports. when the bit peripheral I/O register is displayed, bit-offset value is also
displayed.
It can be specified whether this area is displayed or not, by selecting [View] -> [Attribute] from the
214
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
menu bar. As an attribute, the following contents are displayed.
Read/Write Attribute
R
Read only
W
Write only
R/W
Read/write
*
Register that is read via an emulation register to prevent the device from operating
when this register is read.
To read this attribute directly from a peripheral I/O register, execute [View] ->
[Compulsion Read] from the menu bar.
Even a write-only peripheral I/O register can also be read via an emulation register.
However, some devices do not support this function.
Access Type
(3)
1
Can be accessed in bit units.
8
Can be accessed in byte units.
16
Can be accessed in halfword units.
32
Can be accessed in word units.
Value (peripheral I/O register contents display area)
This area is used to display and change the contents of a peripheral I/O register and I/O port.
The contents are displayed differently as follows, depending on the attribute:
Black Display
Read only or read/write
--
Write only
**
Value changes if read
The new value is written into the target when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be
canceled by the ESC key.
The value of read-protected peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports can be read by selecting right-click
menu -> [Compulsion Read].
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
215
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
Move...
Moves the display position.
Opens the Address Move dialog box.
Add Watch
Registers a selected character string to the Watch window.
Opens the Add Watch dialog box.
Add I/O Port ...
Adds user-defined I/O ports.
Opens the Add I/O Port dialog box.
Bin
Displays the selected line in binary numbers.
Oct
Displays the selected line in octal numbers.
Dec
Displays the selected line in decimal numbers.
Hex
Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers (default).
Sort By Name
Displays in alphabetical order.
Sort By Address
Displays in address order (default).
Unsort
Does not sort.
Attribute
Displays or does not display an attribute area (Attribute).
Checked: Displayed (default)
Not checked: Not displayed
Pick Up
Displays only the registers selected in IOR Select dialog box.
Checked: Displays only the selected register.
Not checked: Displays all the registers (default).
Select...
Opens the IOR Select dialog box.
Compulsion Read
Forcibly reads the peripheral I/O registers that are disabled from being read
because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports and I/O
protect area added in Add I/O Port dialog box.
Function buttons
216
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close
Closes this window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Related operations
To change a peripheral I/O register value
To change the contents of a peripheral I/O register or I/O port, move the cursor to the Value area on the
window, and write a value directly from the keyboard.
Press the return key to set the new value. To cancel the change, press the ESC key.
Note that the values of read-only peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports cannot be changed.
To select a peripheral I/O register or I/O port to be displayed
Use the IOR Select dialog box, which can be opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Select...] in the
IOR window.
To change the display sequence
The display sequence can be changed by selecting right-click menu -> [Sort By Name/Sort By
Address/Unsort].
To change the display radix
Select the line whose radix is to be changed, and select right-click menu -> [Bin/Oct/Dec/Hex].
To add, change the contents of, and delete a user-defined I/O port
To manipulate an I/O port, use the Add I/O Port dialog box, which can be opened by selecting rightclick menu -> [Add I/O Port...] in the IOR window.
To change the display start position
Use the Address Move dialog box, which can be opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Move...] in
the Assemble window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
217
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
IOR Select dialog box
This dialog box is used to select peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports that are not displayed the IOR
window.
It is also used to specify the sequence in which registers and ports are displayed.
Figure 7-44 IOR Select Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When IOR window is the current window
• Select [View] -> [Select...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+V, and E in that order).
Explanation of each area
The IOR Select dialog box consists of the following areas and buttons:
(1) Display, Pick Up, No Display (display peripheral I/O register selection area)
(2) Arrange (display sequence specification button)
218
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Sort by (No Display list display sequence change button)
(1)
Display, Pick Up, No Display (display peripheral I/O register selection area)
This area is used to select registers and I/O ports that are displayed or not displayed on the IOR
window.
Display
Registers and I/O ports are displayed in the IOR window
No Display
Registers and I/O ports are not displayed in the IOR window
To display or not display a register or I/O port in the IOR window, select the name of the register or I/O
port from these lists, and click the <<<Show> or <Hide>>> button. To display all the peripheral I/O
registers, click the <<<Show All> button; to not display any of the registers, click the <Hide All>>>
button.
<< Show
Moves the register or I/O port selected from the No Display list to Display.
Hide >>
Moves the register or I/O port selected from the Display list to No Display.
<< Show All
Moves all the registers and I/O ports to Display.
Hide All >>
Moves all the registers and I/O ports to No Display.
When selecting a peripheral I/O register from the list, two or more registers can be selected by clicking
any of the above buttons with the Ctrl or Shift key held down.
(2)
Arrange (display sequence specification button)
This button sets the sequence in which the registers and I/O ports are displayed in the Display list.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
219
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
A peripheral I/O register or I/O port selected in the Display list can be moved to the top of the list by
pressing the <Top> button, or to the bottom of the list by pressing the <Bottom> button. The <Up>
button moves the register or port one line up. The <Down> button moves the register or port one line
down.
(3)
Top
Moves the selected peripheral I/O register or I/O port to the top of the list.
Up
Moves the selected peripheral I/O register or I/O port one line up.
Down
Moves the selected peripheral I/O register or I/O port one line down.
Bottom
Moves the selected peripheral I/O register or I/O port to the bottom of the list.
Sort by (No Display list display sequence change button)
This button selects the sequence in which peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports are displayed in the No
Display list.
Pressing the <Name> button sorts the registers and ports into alphabetical order. The <Address>
button sorts them into address order.
Name
Displays in alphabetical order.
Address
Displays in address order.
Function buttons
220
OK
Reflects the selection in this dialog box inIOR window and closes this dialog
box.
Cancel
Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Add I/O Port dialog box
This dialog box is used to register an I/O port to be added to the IOR window.
Figure 7-45 Add I/O Port Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Option] ->[Add I/O Port...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+O, and P in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Add I/O Port dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) I/O Port List: (I/O port selection area)
(2) Name: (I/O port name specification area)
(3) Address: (I/O port address specification area)
(4) Access (access size specification area)
(5) Read / Write (access attribute specification area)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
221
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
I/O Port List: (I/O port selection area)
This area lists the I/O ports currently registered.
If a new I/O port is registered, it is added to this list. In addition, an I/O port already registered can be
selected and changed or deleted.
(2)
Name: (I/O port name specification area)
This area is used to specify an I/O port name to be added. An I/O port name can be up to 15
characters long.
(3)
Address: (I/O port address specification area)
This area is used to specify the address of the I/O port to be added.
Only an address in one of these areas can be specified: Target area, IOR area
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
(4)
Access (access size specification area)
This area is used to specify the access size of the I/O port to be added.
222
Byte
8 bits (default)
Half Word
16 bits
Word
32 bits
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5)
Read / Write (access attribute specification area)
This area is used to specify the access attribute of the I/O port to be added.
In the default condition, all the attributes are not checked (i.e., the I/O port can be both read and
written).
Read Only
Read only
Write Only
Write only
Read Protect
Read-protected
Function buttons
OK
Reflects the result of addition in IOR window and closes this dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels changes and closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Add
Adds an I/O port of the specified address.
Change
Changes the setting of the I/O port selected in I/O Port List.
Delete
Deletes the I/O port selected in I/O Port List.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
223
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace window
The Trace window displays the trace results.
This window is only in the active status and is updated when a break occurs or step execution is
performed. The source file can also be displayed with the trace results (refer to "Normal display and mixed
display").
The tracer is enabled by selecting [Option] -> [Tracer On] from the menu bar.
To manipulate the tracer during program execution, select [Run] -> [Tracer Start/Stop] from the menu bar.
For details of the trace function, refer to "Trace function".
Figure 7-46 Trace Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To make the trace function usable
• To set trace control mode
• To set a section trace event and quality trace event
• To change the display start position
• To search trace data
• To clear trace data
• To turn on/off the tracer during program execution
224
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• For pick up display
• To display the source text (mixed display mode)
• To select the display item and change the display radix
• To execute DMA trace
• To set a time tag counter, count rate, and total time tag
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the TrW button.
• Select [Browse] -> [Trace] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+B, and T in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Trace window consists of the following areas:
(1) Point mark display area
(2) Trace mode display area
(3) Trace result display area
(1)
Point mark display area
This area displays Event setting status.
If an execution event or access event is set at the corresponding trace address, the mark
corresponding to the type of the event is displayed.
The mark displayed is not that during trace but an event mark that is set when the trace result is
displayed.
(2)
Trace mode display area
This area displays the types of trace modes.
If a qualify trace condition is satisfied while a section trace condition is satisfied, 'Q' is displayed.
D
Delay frame
M
DMA access frame
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
225
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3)
Trace result display area
This area displays the trace results.
This area has two display modes: Normal display and mixed display. In addition, Jump Function and
Trace Result with Linking Window can be used in this area.
Whether each of the following sub-areas is displayed or not can be selected in the Trace Data Select
dialog box.
(a) Frame (trace frame number display)
This area displays trace frame numbers.
(b) Time (time tag display)
This area displays how many clocks the target chip has required since execution of the preceding trace
contents was started until execution of the current trace contents is started. As the display contents,
display of the number of clocks or display of time can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box.
In addition, the division rate of the number of counts can be selected up to 1M in the Extended Option
dialog box.
The number of clocks and time tag value correspond as follows:
Table 7-22 Number of Clocks and Time Tag Value
Time Tag Value
Number of
Clocks
Division rate 1
Division rate 2
Division rate 8
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
4
4
3
2
2
5
5
3
2
2
6
6
4
3
2
7
7
4
3
2
8
8
5
3
2
9
9
5
3
2
If <Add Up Timetag> is checked, the total is displayed.
Caution
226
Division rate 4
65535 is displayed in the case of an overflow.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(c) Address Data Status (fetch access display)
This area displays the result of fetching the program.
The display contents of Address and Data differ depending on the Status display.
Status
The following types of statuses are available:
Program fetch display
BRM1
Fetching of first byte of first instruction after branch
A line is displayed in blue for emphasis if the fetched address is the top of a
symbol.
M1
Fetching of first byte of instruction
Blank
Fetching of sixth or eighth bytes of instruction,
or invalid fetch on occurrence of interrupt
* With IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A
Snap display
SNAP
Snap display
Reference
When a 6-byte or 8-byte instruction code is displayed, the first 4 bytes are displayed in the
first frame, and the other bytes are displayed in the second and third frames.
If two
instructions are executed at the same time, one frame is displayed on two lines. The
instruction code at the lower address is displayed on the first line and the instruction code at
the higher address is displayed on the second line.
Address Data
Displays addresses and data. The display contents differ as follows, depending on the Status display.
Program fetch display
Address
Displays the fetch address
Data
Displays the fetch data
Snap display
Item
Address
Data
Snap Type
Display Contents
Register
Register name
Peripheral I/O register
Peripheral I/O register name
Memory
Memory address
Register
Register value
Peripheral I/O register
Peripheral I/O register value
Memory
Memory contents
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
227
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(d) Address Data Status (data access display)
This area displays the result of accessing data.
Data access by DMA or REFRASH cannot be traced.
Status
R
Data read
W
Data write
(e) ExtProbe (external sense data display)
This area displays the input level of the external sense clip during a trace.
Each bit corresponds to an external sense clip number as follows:
Table 7-23 Correspondence Between External Sense Data and External Sense Clip
External Sense Data Display
External Sense Clip No.
bit 7
No.7
bit 6
No.6
bit 5
No.5
bit 4
No.4
bit 3
No.3
bit 2
No.2
bit 1
No.1
bit 0
No.0
Only when the IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is connected to the ID850, eight
external sense clips are used; otherwise four external sense clips are used. If four external sense clips
are used, the higher 4 bits are always fixed to 0.
(f) DisAsm (mnemonic display)
This area displays the result of disassembly (only when the status of fetch access display is BRM1 or
M1).
To display instruction codes when two instructions are simultaneously executed, one instruction is
displayed on the first line, and the other instruction is displayed on the second line.
Normal display and mixed display
In the normal display mode, only the trace result is displayed.
In the mixed display mode, the source file is also displayed along with the trace result.
If a program code corresponds on the program fetch address to be displayed, a source file line is
displayed before the line indicating the result of tracing that program fetch address.
228
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
The source file line is displayed, emphasized in green.
The display mode can be alternately changed by selecting [View] -> [Mix] from the menu bar.
Caution
The mixed display mode is valid only when the load module has been downloaded and
symbol information is read, and when a fetch address, fetch data, fetch status, or result of
disassembly is displayed.
Jump function
This function allows you to jump to the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window or
Coverage window, using the cursor position as a jump pointer (refer to "Jump Function").
To jump from the Trace window, the jump pointer changes as follows, depending on the area in which
the cursor is positioned:
Table 7-24 Cursor Position and Jump Pointer
Cursor Position
Jump Pointer
Access Address Display Area
Access Data Display Area
Access address
(If the jump destination is the Source window or Assemble
window, the fetch address is always used as the jump pointer.)
Access Status Display Area
Other
Fetch address
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button.
In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal procedure.
Move...
Moves the display position.
Opens the Trace Move dialog box.
Trace Clear
Clears the trace data.
Select
Selects the contents to be displayed.
Opens the Trace Data Select dialog box.
Pick Up
Performs the setting for pickup display.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
229
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Off
Does not pick up and display (default).
Search
Picks up and displays a frame that satisfies the search condition.
Snap
Picks up and displays a snap frame.
BRM1
Picks up and displays the first M1 fetch frame after a program branch.
Mix
Specifies whether the results of assembly are displayed in mixed display
mode, or not displayed.
Checked: Mixed display
Not checked: No display (default)
Window Synchronize
Links the Trace window with the following windows:
Source Text
Links the Source window.
Assemble
Links the Assemble window.
Memory
Links the Memory window.
Coverage
Links the Coverage window.
Source Text
Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value
at the cursor position as the jump destination address.
If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you
cannot jump.
Opens the Source window.
If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
Assemble
Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address
specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Assemble window.
If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the
forefront (so that it can be manipulated).
Memory
Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address
specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Memory window.
If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the
forefront (so that it can be manipulated).
Coverage
Displays the coverage measurement results starting from the jump
destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Coverage window.
If an active Coverage window is open, that window is displayed in the
forefront (so that it can be manipulated).
Function buttons
230
Search...
Opens the Trace Search dialog box and searches or picks up trace results.
The searched result will be highlighted in the Trace window.
This button cannot be selected when a snap frame or BRM1 frame is picked up and
displayed.
This is the same operation as selecting [View] -> [Search...] from the menu bar.
<<
Searches forward (upward on screen) for a trace result that satisfies the search
condition set in the Trace Search dialog box.
This button cannot be selected while pickup display is being performed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
>>
Searches backward (downward on screen) for a trace result that satisfies the search
condition set in the Trace Search dialog box.
This button cannot be selected while pickup display is being performed.
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close
Closes this window.
Related operations
To make the trace function usable
Select and check [Option] -> [Tracer On] from the menu bar. To invalidate the tracer, select [Tracer On]
again and remove the check mark.
To set trace control mode
Select [Run] -> [Tracer Control Mode] from the menu bar and select one of the following modes:
Non Stop
Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the oldest
frame (default).
Full Stop
Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer.
Full Break
Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and
program execution. * Displayed only when IE-703102-MC, IEV850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used.
To set a section trace event and quality trace event
Use the Trace dialog box which can be opened by clicking the Trc button.
To change the display start position
Use the Trace Move dialog box that can be opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Move...] in the
Trace window.
To search trace data
Select right-click menu -> [Pick Up] -> [Off] in the Trace window and click the <Search...> button. The
Trace Search dialog box will be opened, enabling trace results to be searched.
To clear trace data
Select the right-click menu -> [Trace Clear] in the Trace window.
This will clear the trace buffer (display contents of the Trace window).
To turn on/off the tracer during program execution
To temporarily stop coverage, select [Run] -> [Tracer Stop] from the menu bar during program
execution. To resume tracer operation, select [Tracer Start].
This operation can be performed only while the program is being executed.
It cannot be performed if the tracer function is disabled (when [Option] -> [Tracer On] is not checked).
For pick up display
Only specific trace data can be picked up and displayed in the Trace window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
231
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
A snap frame, M1 fetch frame, and picking up a frame that satisfies a given search condition can be
selected as pickup conditions.
To pick up and display a snap frame or M1 fetch frame
Select right-click menu-> [Snap/BRM1] in the Trace window. A snap frame or M1 fetch frame will be
picked up and displayed in the Trace window.
To pick up and display only a frame that satisfies the search condition
Select right-click menu -> [Search] in the Trace window and click the <Search> button. The Trace
Search dialog box will be opened, enabling data to be picked up to be set.
To display the source text (mixed display mode)
Select the right-click menu -> [Mix] in the Trace window.
To select the display item and change the display radix
Use the Trace Data Select dialog box, which can be opened by selecting the right-click menu ->
[Select...] in the Trace window.
The display radix can be changed in the fetch data display area and access data display area.
To execute DMA trace
In addition to the normal trace, the results of a DMA trace can be collected, but only when the IEV850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used. Select [Option] -> [DMA Trace] from the menu bar. Set [DMA
Trace] to ON. DMA trace will be executed, taking precedence over memory access by the program.
The frame marked [M] in the trace mode area in the Trace window is the frame traced by the DMA
trace.
To set a time tag counter, count rate, and total time tag
Use the Extended Option dialog box, which can be opened by selecting [Option] -> [Expanded
Option...] from the menu bar.
232
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Search dialog box
This dialog box is used to search or pick up trace data in Trace window.
This dialog box is used to search trace data if it is opened by selecting [View] -> [Pick Up] -> [Off] from the
menu bar. It is used to pick up and display trace data if it is opened by selecting [View] -> [Pick Up] ->
[Search] from the menu bar.
By setting each item and then clicking the <Find Next> button, searching can be started.
By clicking the <Set Find> button, the direction buttons ("<<" and ">>") in the Trace window can be used
for the search.
Caution
The Trace Search dialog box cannot be called if picking up snap frames and the first M1 fetch
frame (BRM1) after program branch is specified using the menu bar or in Trace Data Select
dialog box.
Figure 7-47 Trace Search Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When Trace window is the current window
• Click the <Search> button.
(or press Ctrl+G).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
233
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Select [View] -> [Search...]
(or press Alt+V, and S in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Trace Search dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Event Status (status selection area)
(2) Access Size (access size selection area)
(3) Address, Mask (address setting area)
(4) Data, Mask (data setting area)
(5) Exp Probe, Mask (external sense data setting area)
(6) Scan Whole Region (search condition specification area)
(7) Direction (search direction specification area)
(8) Frame (search range specification area)
(1)
Event Status (status selection area)
This area is used to set and select a status condition.
A status condition can also be specified in abbreviated form. Uppercase and lowercase characters are
not distinguished.
If a status condition is omitted, all frames (All status) are searched.
Table 7-25 Types of Status Conditions
Status
(2)
Abbreviation
Meaning
All status
ALL
All frames (default)
BRM1 Fetch
BRM1
First M1 fetch after program branch
M1 Fetch
M1
M1 fetch (including BRM1)
R/W
RW
Data read/write (including R, W)
Read
R
Data read
Write
W
Data write
Access Size (access size selection area)
This area is used to set and select an access size condition.
By specifying an access size condition, the access width of a data condition to be detected by an
access event is determined.
An access size condition can also be specified in abbreviated form. Uppercase and lowercase
234
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
characters are not distinguished.
Table 7-26 List of Access Size Conditions (Trace)
Size
Abbreviation
Meaning
Byte
B
Searches for a data condition with 8-bit width (only during 8-bit
access).
Half Word
HW
Searches for a data condition with 16-bit width (only during 16bit access).
Word
W
Searches for a data condition with 32-bit width (only during 32bit access).
No Condition
NC
Does not search based on access size (nothing can be input to
the Data area).
Bit
1
Searches for a data condition with 1-bit width (only during 8-bit
access).
In this case, a search is made for a data condition with 1-bit
width. Because of the operation of the emulator, access to a bit
is not directly detected; the debugger searches a dummy bit
access by internally setting address conditions and data
conditions as follows:
Input example:
Address: FE20.1
Data: 1
Setting of trace search
Address: fe20
Data: 00000010B
Mask: 11111101B
If another bit of the same address is accessed or if all the 8 bits
of the same address are accessed, therefore, an event is
detected in accordance with the specified status if the address
and bit match the specified value of [address.bit].
Caution
If an access event is specified as a status condition, the alternative of Bit is not displayed. If
Bit or 1 is specified, an error occurs.
If no access size condition is specified, a judgment is automatically made from the address condition
and data condition, and the following is set:
• Bit if the address condition is set in bit units
• Byte if the address condition is set in 8-bit units
• Half Word if the address condition is set in 16-bit units
• Word if the address condition is set in 32-bit units
• No Condition if no data condition is specified
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
235
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3)
Address, Mask (address setting area)
Address, which sets an address value and Mask, which sets the mask value of an address value, are
set as address conditions.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Both the address and mask may be omitted.
The following can be set:
Table 7-27 Settable Range of Address Condition
Settable range
Condition
0 =< address value =< 0xFFFFFFFF
None
0 =< mask value =< 0xFFFFFFFF
None
Address
Set an address condition.
The following can be set:
Set Point
Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower
address and the higher address.
Mask can be set.
Set Range
Set a value to the lower address and the higher address.
Mask cannot be set.
Setting of Bit
Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower
address and the higher address. Specify a value in the form of
address.bit.
Mask cannot be set.
The value of bit, which indicates the bit position, must be 0 =< bit =< 7.
Mask
Set a mask value for an address value (only when a point is specified).
The address value of a bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1.
Example 1:
Address
0x4000 to 0x4000
Mask
0xFF
With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition.
236
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Example 2:
Address
0x4000 to 0x4000
Mask
0x101
With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition.
(4)
Data, Mask (data setting area)
Data, which sets an data value, and Mask, which sets the mask value of an data value, are set as data
conditions.
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Both the data and mask may be omitted.
The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in the Access
Size area.
Table 7-28 Settable Range of Data Condition
Access Size
Settable range
Byte
0 =< data value =< 0xFF
0 =< mask value =< 0xFF
Half Word
0 =< data value =< 0xFFFF
0 =< mask value =< 0xFFFF
Word
0 =< data value =< 0xFFFFFFFF
0 =< mask value =< 0xFFFFFFFF
Bit
Data value = 0 or 1
Mask value = Cannot be specified.
Data
Set a data value. Specify a value within the settable range.
A symbol or expression can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15
Specifying Symbols").
Mask
Set a mask value for the data value.
When a mask is set, the data value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1.
The data value for a bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1.
Example 1:
Data
0x4000
Mask
0xFF
With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
237
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Example 2:
Data
0x4000
Mask
0x101
With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition.
(5)
Exp Probe, Mask (external sense data setting area)
This area is used to set an external sense data condition.
External sense data is the input pin level of the external sense clip attached to the emulation probe
connected to the in-circuit emulator (refer to "Table 7-23 Correspondence Between External Sense
Data and External Sense Clip").
External sense data conditions include Ex Probe, which sets an external sense data value, and Mask,
which sets the mask value of an external sense data value.
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. Both data and mask may be omitted.
Settable range of the external sense data condition is as follows:
Table 7-29 Settable Range of External Sense Data Condition
Settable Range
Condition
0 <= Adress value <= 0xFF
None
0 <= Mask value <= 0xFF
None
Exp Probe
Specify an external sense data value.
Set the high input pin level of the external sense clip to 1, and the low input level to 0.
Caution
Only when the IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is connected to the ID850,
eight external sense clips are used; otherwise four external sense clips are used. If four
external sense clips are used, the higher 4 bits are always fixed to 0.
Mask
Set a mask value for the external sense data.
The data value for a bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1.
Example 1:
Ext Probe
0x8
Mask
0x7
With this setting, the condition is satisfied if the data is 0x8 to 0xF.
238
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Example 2:
Ext Probe
0x8
Mask
0x5
With this setting, the condition is satisfied if the data is 0x8, 0x9, 0xC, or 0xD.
(6)
Scan Whole Region (search condition specification area)
This area is used to specify whether the specified range is fully searched or not.
(7)
Checked
Searches the entire range.
Not checked
Searches the remaining part of the range (default)
Direction (search direction specification area)
This area is used to specify the direction of the search.
(8)
Up
Forward search.
Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position
of the cursor.
Down
Backward search (default).
Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current
position of the cursor.
Frame (search range specification area)
This area is used to specify a frame number to be searched.
For how to specify a frame number, refer to "Table 7-14 Frame Number Specification Format".
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal.
Function buttons
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition.
If the specified frame is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To
continue searching, click this button again.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
239
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
240
Set Find
Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog
box.
Pick Up
(Stop (during search))
Picks up according to the specified condition of data search.
If a frame that satisfies the condition is found as a result of a search, it is
picked up. To pick up a frame that satisfies a different condition, press this
button again.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Data Select dialog box
This dialog box is used to select items to be displayed in the Trace window.
Figure 7-48 Trace Data Select Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When Trace window is the current window
• Select [View] -> [Select...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+ V, and E in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Trace Data Select dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Item (trace display item selection area)
(2) Radix (trace display radix selection area)
(3) Pick Up (pickup selection area)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
241
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Item (trace display item selection area)
This area is used to select items to be displayed in the Trace window. Displaying the following items
may or may not be selected. The field checked is displayed.
(2)
Frame
Frame number display field
Timetag
Time tag display field
Whether the clock or time is displayed can be selected.
Clock...Clock display (default)
Time...Time display
Instruction Fetch Address
Fetch address display field
Instruction Fetch Data
Fetch data display field
Instruction Fetch Status
Fetch status display field
Memory Access Address
Access address display field
Memory Access Data
Access data display field
Memory Access Status
Access status display field
External Probe
External sense data display field
DisAssemble
Disassemble display field
Radix (trace display radix selection area)
This area is used to select the radix in which data is to be displayed. Displaying the following items
may or may not be selected.
Display field
Instruction Fetch Data
242
Fetch data display field
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Access Data
Access data display field
External Probe
External sense data display field
Display radix
(3)
HEX
Hexadecimal display
DEC
Displays decimal numbers.
OCT
Displays octal numbers.
BIN
Displays binary numbers.
Pick Up (pickup selection area)
This area is used to select a pick up condition.
Pick Up Off
No pick up display
Pick Up Search Frame
Picks up and displays a frame that satisfies the search condition.
Pick Up Snap Frame
Picks up and displays a snap frame.
Pick Up BRM1 Frame
Picks up and displays the first M1 fetch frame after a program branch.
Function buttons
OK
Reflects the results of selection in this dialog box in Trace window.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
243
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage window
This window displays the coverage results.
The coverage results are displayed only in the range specified in the Coverage-Address dialog box.
Coverage measurement is performed by selecting [Option] -> [Coverage ON]. While the program is
executed, coverage measurement is manipulated by [Run] -> [Coverage Start/Stop] from the menu bar.
The Coverage window has two window statuses: Active Status and Static Status.
Caution The coverage data collected when the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used is only
execution data.
Figure 7-49 Coverage Window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To make the coverage measurement function usable
• To specify the coverage measurement range
• To change the display start position
• To set and display the coverage efficiency display condition
• To turn on/off coverage during program execution
• To search the coverage results
• To clear the overage result
• To change the display bytes
244
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the Cov button.
• Select [Browse] -> [Coverage] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+B, and O in that order).
• Select [Jump] -> [Coverage] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+J and C in that order, or Ctrl+I).
Explanation of each area
The Coverage window consists of the following areas:
(1) Addr (address display area)
(2) 01234... (coverage display area)
(1)
Addr (address display area)
This area displays coverage addresses.
(2)
01234... (coverage display area)
This area displays the coverage results.
To select a display mode, use the [View] menu.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
245
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-30 Status List of Coverage Data
In 1-byte display mode
Display
Meaning
．
Neither execute, read, nor write
X
Execute only
R
Read only
W
Write only
A
Read and write only
$
Execute and read only
#
Execute and write only
%
Execute, read, and write
In 64-/1024-byte display mode
Display
Meaning
．
Neither execute, read, nor write any addresses in the 64-/1024-byte range
X
Execute all addresses in the 64-/1024-byte range
R
Read all addresses in the 64-/1024-byte range
W
Write all addresses in the 64-/1024-byte range
A
Read and write all addresses in the 64-/1024-byte range
$
Execute and read all addresses in the 64-/1024-byte range
#
Execute and write all addresses in the 64-/1024-byte range
%
Execute, read, and write all addresses in the 64-/1024-byte range
This area has a jump function and a function to link the trace display.
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
246
Move...
Moves the display position.
Opens the Address Move dialog box.
1Byte
Displays in 1-byte units (default).
64Bytes
Displays in 64-byte units.
1024Bytes
Displays in 1024-byte units.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Text
Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value at
the cursor position as the jump destination address.
If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot
jump.
Opens the Source window.
If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Assemble
Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified
by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Assemble window.
If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
Memory
Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address
specified by the data value at the cursor position.
Opens the Memory window.
If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Clear...
Clears the coverage measurement results.
Opens the Coverage-Clear dialog box.
Select...
Selects the coverage measurement range as a space of 1 MB or more.
Opens the Coverage-Address dialog box.
Condition...
Sets a coverage efficiency measurement condition.
Opens the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Efficiency...
Displays coverage efficiency.
Opens the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
Function buttons
Search...
Opens the Coverage Search dialog box and searches a coverage result.
The searched result will be highlighted in the Coverage window.
This button is valid only in the 1-byte display mode.
<<
Searches forward (upward on screen) for a coverage result that satisfies the
search condition set in the Coverage Search dialog box, starting from the
address at the cursor position.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button during a search.
This button is valid only in the 1-byte display mode.
>>
Searches backward (downward on screen) for a coverage result that satisfies
the search condition set in the Coverage Search dialog box, starting from the
address at the cursor position.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button during a search.
This button is valid only in the 1-byte display mode.
Stop (during search)
Stops searching.
Refresh
Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Close
Closes this window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
247
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Related operations
To make the coverage measurement function usable
Select and check [Option] -> [Coverage On] from the menu bar. To disable coverage, select
[Coverage On] again.
To specify the coverage measurement range
Use the Coverage-Address dialog box that can be opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Select...] in
the Coverage window. A measurement range of 1 MB can be selected from a list.
To change the display start position
Use the Address Move dialog box that can be opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Move...] in the
Coverage window.
To set and display the coverage efficiency display condition
Use the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box, which can be opened by selecting right-click menu ->
[Condition...] in the Coverage window.
As the address condition in which coverage efficiency is to be measured, an address range or a
function can be specified.
The coverage efficiency status is displayed in the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box, which can be
opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Efficiency...] in the Coverage window.
To turn on/off coverage during program execution
To temporarily stop coverage, select [Run] -> [Coverage Stop] from the menu bar during program
execution. To resume operation, select [Coverage Start].
This operation can be performed only while the program is being executed.
It cannot be performed if the coverage function is disabled (when [Option] -> [Coverage On] is not
checked).
To search the coverage results
Use Coverage Search dialog box, which can be opened by clicking the <Search...> button in the
Coverage window. Data is not searched in a non-mapped area.
To clear the overage result
Use the Coverage-Clear dialog box that can be opened by selecting right-click menu -> [Clear...] in the
Coverage window.
When the coverage measurement result is cleared, the contents of the Coverage window and
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box are initialized.
To change the display bytes
The display bytes can be changed by selecting right-click menu -> [1Byte/64Byte/1024 Byte] in the
Coverage window.
248
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage Search dialog box
This dialog box is used to search coverage results in the Coverage window.
This dialog box can be called only in the 1-byte display mode.
By setting each item and then clicking the <Find Next> button, searching can be started.
By clicking the <Set Find> button, the direction buttons ("<<" and ">>") in the Coverage window can be
used for the search.
Searching cannot be executed in a non-mapped area.
Caution The coverage data collected when the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used is only
execution data.
Figure 7-50 Coverage Search Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
When the Coverage window is the current window
• Click the <Search...> button.
(or press Ctrl+G).
• Select [View] -> [Search...]
(or press Alt+V, and S in that order).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
249
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Coverage Search dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Search data specification area
(2) Scan Whole Region (search condition specification area)
(3) Direction (search direction specification area)
(4) Address (search range specification area)
(1)
Search data specification area
Specify a search condition by checking any of the check boxes in this area.
If two or more check boxes are checked, the specified address is searched when any of the conditions
of the check boxes is satisfied (OR search).
(2)
No Use [.]
Neither execute, read, nor write
Read [R]
Read only
Write [W]
Write only
Read x Write [A]
Read and write
Execute [X]
Execute only
Execute x Read[$]
Execute and read
Execute x Write [#]
Execute and write
Execute x Read x Write [%]
Execute, read, and write
Scan Whole Region (search condition specification area)
This area is used to specify whether the specified range is fully searched or not.
(3)
Checked
Searches the entire range.
Not checked
Searches the remaining part of the range (default)
Direction (search direction specification area)
This area is used to specify the direction of the search.
250
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4)
Up
Forward search.
Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position
of the cursor.
Down
Backward search (default).
Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current
position of the cursor.
Address (search range specification area)
This area is used to specify the address to be searched.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Function buttons
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition.
If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is
highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again.
Set Find
Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog
box.
Stop (during search)
Stops searching.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button while data is being searched.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
251
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage-Clear dialog box
This dialog box is used to clear the coverage measurement results in a specified address range.
As a result, the contents of the Coverage window and Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box are initialized.
Caution The coverage data collected when the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used is only
execution data.
Figure 7-51 Coverage-Clear Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Option] -> [Coverage] -> [Clear...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+O, O, and L in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Coverage-Clear dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Address Range (address specification area)
(1)
Address Range (address specification area)
This area is used to specify the addresses whose coverage results are to be cleared.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
252
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
OK
Clears the coverage result in the address range specified in Address Range.
Stop (while cleared)
Stops clearing the coverage result.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
This button is displayed as the <Stop> button while the coverage result is
being cleared.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
253
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage-Address dialog box
This dialog box is used to select the coverage measurement range to be displayed in the Coverage
window.
Coverage measurement is executed within the specified address range.
The selectable coverage measurement range is as follows:
• With IE-703002-MC
Any 1 MB space of addresses 0x000000to 0xFFFFFF
(Default: 0x000000 to 0x0FFFFF
• With IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A, IE-V850ES-G1
Any 1 MB space of addresses 0x0000000to 0x3FFFFFF
(Default: 0x0000000 to 0x00FFFFF
Caution The coverage data collected when the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used is only
execution data.
Figure 7-52 Coverage-Address Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Option] -> [Coverage] -> [Select...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+O, O, and S in that order).
254
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Coverage-Address dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Address Range (address selection area)
(1)
Address Range (address selection area)
This area is used to select any 1 MB space.
The selected coverage measurement range is set by clicking the <OK> button.
Function buttons
OK
Validates the coverage measurement range selected in Address Range.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
255
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box
This dialog box is used to specify the contents (condition) to be displayed in the Coverage-Efficiency
View dialog box
Up to 16 conditions can be registered.
Caution The coverage data collected when the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used is only
execution data.
Figure 7-53 Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Specifying
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Option] -> [Coverage] -> [Condition...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+O, O, and O in that order).
• Click the <Condition> button in Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
256
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Survey List (selected list display area)
(2) Address Range, Function (address condition specification area)
(3) Survey Condition (status condition specification area)
(1)
Survey List (selected list display area)
This area displays a list of the conditions currently selected.
(2)
Address Range, Function (address condition specification area)
This area specifies an address condition for the coverage efficiency.
An address condition can be specified in two ways. To specify a condition as an address range, use
Address Range. To specify a condition as a function, use Function.
(3)
Address
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to
"Table 7-15 Specifying Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a
numeric value is hexadecimal.
Function
A function can be specified by selecting from the drop-down list or by
inputting from the keyboard. Specify a function name that has been
registered to the load module file.
Survey Condition (status condition specification area)
This area is used to select a status condition for the coverage efficiency.
Execute
Percentage of program execution
Read
Percentage of memory read
Write
Percentage of memory write
All
Percentage of program execution, or memory read or write
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
257
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Specifying
To set a display condition for the coverage efficiency
1
Open the Coverage-Condition dialog box.
Select [Option] -> [Coverage] -> [Condition...] from the menu bar
2
Specify Survey Condition (in Survey Condition (status condition specification area)).
Select Execute if a function is specified.
3
Specify Survey Condition (in Address Range, Function (address condition specification area)).
Specify Address Range or Function (in the address condition specification area).
4
Click the <Insert> button.
To delete a display condition for the coverage efficiency
1
Opens Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
Select [Option] -> [Coverage] -> [Condition...] from the menu bar
2
Select the condition to be deleted from Survey List (Survey List (selected list display area)).
3
Click the <Delete> button.
Function buttons
258
OK
Closes this dialog box.
View
Displays coverage efficiency.
Opens Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box.
Restore
Restores the input data to the original status.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Clear
Clears the contents of Survey List Survey List (selected list display area).
Delete
Deletes the selected address range or function name from Survey List Survey
List (selected list display area).
Insert
Registers the address range or function name specified in Address Range or
Function Address Range, Function (address condition specification area) to
Survey List Survey List (selected list display area).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box
This dialog box displays the coverage efficiency of the coverage results in the range specified in the
Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Caution The coverage data collected when the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used is only
execution data.
Figure 7-54 Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Option] -> [Coverage] -> [Efficiency...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+O, O, and E in that order).
• Click the <View> button in Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Explanation of each area
The Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Survey List (coverage range display area)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
259
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Results(%) (coverage efficiency display area)
(1)
Survey List (coverage range display area)
This area displays the coverage efficiency measurement range.
The area specified in Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box is displayed in this area.
If a function name is specified, "program name$file name#function name" is displayed.
(2)
Results(%) (coverage efficiency display area)
This area displays the coverage efficiency.
The coverage efficiency indicates how many specified statuses (execution, read, and write) are
included in the measurement range, as a percentage (refer to "Table 7-30 Status List of Coverage
Data").
Function buttons
260
OK
Closes this dialog box.
Condition
Sets the displayed contents of the coverage efficiency.
Opens Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Event Manager
This window is used to display, enable or disable, and delete various event conditions.
It is also used to register the various event conditions and manage the event conditions for setting them.
Up to 256 conditions can be registered as event conditions or various event conditions. However, the
number of event conditions that can be used (enabled) at the same time is limited as follows:
Table 7-31 Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each Event Condition
Event
IE Using
Event link
Break
Trace
Snapshot
8
3a.b.
22
1b.
1c.
1a.
14
8
3a.b.
22
1b.
1c.
3a.
14d.
8
3a.b.
22
1b.
1c.
3a.
Execution
Access
IE-703002MC
14
IE-703102MC
IE-V850E-MC
or IE-V850EMC-A, IEV850ES-G1
Stub
Timer
a.
Including the Run-Break event. Since a timer event condition may use one event link condition internally, the
number of the event condition which can be used may diminish.
b.
Since a section trace event condition uses one event link condition internally, the number of the event
condition which can be used may diminish.
c.
The relationship between a snap shot event and a stub event is exclusive.
d.
For event before execution: up to 4 events. For event after execution: up to 10 events.
The event before execution can be used only for the break event condition.
Figure 7-55 Event Manager
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
261
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Explanation of each area
• Functions often used (right-click menu)
• Function buttons
• To save/restore event information
• To enable/disable an event
• To change the display sequence of event icons
• To display details of event condition
• To delete an event
• To manage a software break event
• To create an event condition
• To create an event link condition
• To set an event condition and event link condition as various event condition
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Click the Mgr button.
• Select [Event] -> [Event Manager] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and M in that order).
In the Source window
Move the cursor to the source line in the source text display area where an event is set, or to the
disassemble line in the mixed display mode.
• Select [View] -> [Event?] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+V, and E in that order).
In the Assemble window
Move the cursor to the line in the mnemonic display/change area where an event is set.
• Select [View] -> [Event?] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+V, and E in that order).
In the Event dialog box
• Click the <Manager> button
(or press Alt+G).
In the Event dialog box
• Click the <Manager> button.
(or press Alt+M).
Explanation of each area
The Event Manager consists of the following areas:
262
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Event display area
(2) Event details display area
(1)
Event display area
[When list is displayed]
The event display area displays the icons (event icons) of the registered event, event link, break event,
trace event, snapshot event, stub event, and timer event conditions.
An event icon consists of a mark indicating the type of event, and an event name.
By selecting the right click menu -> [Detail], the details can be displayed (refer to "Event details display
area").
The meaning of each mark is as follows:
Table 7-32 Marks of Event Icon
Mark
Meaning
E.
Event condition
L.
Event link condition
B.
Break event condition
T.
Trace event condition
S.
Snapshot event condition
U.
Stub event condition
Ti.
Timer event condition
The color of the character on the mark indicates the set status of the event.
Table 7-33 Color of Character on Mark and its Meaning
Character
Color
Red
Mark
Meaning
E. L.
Indicates that the various event condition using this event condition
or event link condition is enabled.
B. T. Ti. U. S.
Indicates that this various event condition is enabled.
This various event occurs when its condition is satisfied.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
263
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-33 Color of Character on Mark and its Meaning
Character
Color
Black
Yellow
Mark
Meaning
E. L.
Indicates that this various event condition using this event condition
or event link condition is disabled.
B. T. Ti. U. S.
Indicates that this various event condition is disabled.
This various event does not occur even when its condition is
satisfied.
E. L.
Indicates that the symbol specified for this event is held pending
because it cannot be recognized by the program currently loaded.
B. T. Ti. U. S.
Indicates that this various event is held pending.
The various event does not occur even when its condition is
satisfied.
This area also has the following four functions:
Jump function
If the selected icon is that of an event condition, you can jump to the Source window, Assemble
window, Memory window, or Coverage window, using an address condition as the jump pointer. You
can jump easily by using the right click menu.
The jump pointer will be as follows, depending on the set address condition.
Table 7-34 Address Condition and Jump Pointer
Setting of Address Condition
Jump Pointer
Setting as a point
Specified address
Setting as a range
Lower address
(Point address before the mask if a mask is specified)
Setting as a bit
Address at the bit position
The jump destination window will be displayed from the jump pointer.
Open function
Opens the event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event condition. Each setting dialog
box displays the contents of the selected event condition.
Operation
• Double-click the icon, or click the <Open> button with selecting the icon.
Enable status selection function
The event corresponding to the selected icon can be enabled or disabled.
The break, trace, snapshot, stub, and timer events (but not the event and event link conditions) can be
manipulated via their icons.
Operation
264
1
Click on the mark of the icon using the left mouse button.
2
Click the <Enable> or <Disable> button.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
If the event is enabled, it is disabled (black); if the event is disabled, it is enabled (red). The < Enable>
button is displayed if the icon of an event that is disabled is selected; the <Disable> button is displayed
if the icon of an event that is enabled is selected.
Deletion function
The registered event and set contents of the selected icon can be deleted.
Operation
1
Select an icon. Two or more icons can be selected by using Shift and Ctrl keys. To select all the
icons, select [View] -> [Select All] from the menu bar.
2
Click the <Delete> button or press the DEL key.
Caution
An event condition or event link condition can be deleted only when it is not being used for
another event condition. If it is being used for another event, delete the event that is using
the event condition or event link condition, and then delete the event condition or event link
condition.
(2)
Event details display area
[In detailed display mode]
This area displays the detailed information corresponding to each event icon.
This area is displayed only in the detailed display mode.
Contents are displayed by using the following key information as a separator.
Table 7-35 Separator for Displaying Event Details
Key Information
Contents
Event condition
[S]
Status condition
[Z]
Access size condition
[A]
Address condition
Symbol or expression: (actual address)
[D]
Data condition
Symbol or expression: (actual address)
[E]
External sense data condition
[M]
Mask condition
Event link condition
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
265
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-35 Separator for Displaying Event Details
Key Information
Contents
[P1] - [P4]
Event link condition on "n"th line
[D]
Disable condition
Break condition
[B]
Break condition
Trace condition
[M]
Trace mode
[D]
Delay Count
[S]
Trace start condition
[E]
Trace end condition
[Q]
Qualify trace condition
Timer condition
[S]
Timer measurement start condition
[E]
Timer measurement end condition
[F]
Timer measurement frequency
[U]
Timer measurement unit
snapshot condition
[SN]
Snapshot condition
[R]
Register condition
[M]
Memory condition
Symbol or expression: (actual address)
[Z]
Access size condition
[G]
Peripheral I/O register condition
Stub condition
[SU]
Stub condition
[A]
Jump Address
Symbol or expression: (actual address)
Functions often used (right-click menu)
In this window, functions that are often used can be selected from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button. In this way, the same function can be used more easily than with the normal
procedure.
266
Sort By Name
Displays icons in the order of event names.
Sort By Kind
Displays icons in the order of event types.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Unsort
Does not sort icons (default).
Detail
Displays the details.
Overview
Displays a list (default).
Source Text
Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the position of the
selected event as the jump destination address.
If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot
jump.
Opens the Source window.
If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Assemble
Displays the Assemble window from the position of the selected event, which is
used as the jump destination address.
Opens the Assemble window.
If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront
(so that it can be manipulated).
Memory
Displays the memory contents from the position of the selected event, which is
used as the jump destination address.
Opens the Memory window.
If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Coverage
Displays the coverage measurement result from the position of the selected
event, which is used as the jump destination address.
Opens the Coverage window.
If an active Coverage window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so
that it can be manipulated).
Function buttons
New...
Opens the dialog box to create new event condition.
By clicking each button, the corresponding event setting dialog box can be
opened (with the new event name set). After the event setting dialog box has
been opened, this dialog box is closed.
Open
Opens the event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event condition.
Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event condition.
This button is invalid if no event condition is selected or if two or more event
conditions are selected.
The Enter key performs the same operation.
Enable/
Disable
Enables or disables the selected various event condition (except event conditions
and event link conditions).
This button is invalid if an enabled/disabled event condition is not selected.
Delete
Deletes the selected event condition.
When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error
occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the
event is used as a various event condition.
This button is invalid if no event condition is selected.
Delete All
Deletes all event conditions except software break conditions.
Info...
Opens the Select Display Information dialog box.
This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event names.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
267
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Sort by
Name
Sorts events into name order.
Sort by Kind
Sorts events into type order.
Unsort
Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting
the events.
Detail
Sets the detailed display mode.
Overview
Sets the list display mode.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key).
Close
Closes this window.
Related operations
To save/restore event information
Use this window as the current window, and open the View File Save dialog box by selecting [File] ->
[Save As...] from the menu bar.
To restore the set status of an event, open the View File Load dialog box by clicking the Open button.
By loading an event setting file (*.evn), the previously set event information can be restored.
To enable/disable an event
An event can be enabled or disabled by clicking the mark of the event icon to be changed. By clicking
Enable (red), the event can be disabled (black): by clicking Disable (black), the event can be enabled
(red).
This change can be also performed on the Event Manager or in each event setting dialog box.
To change the display sequence of event icons
Select the right-click menu -> [Sort B Name/Sort By Kind/Unsort] on the Event Manager.
To display details of event condition
Select the right-click menu -> [Detail] on the Event Manager.
By selecting [Overview], the list can be displayed again.
To delete an event
Select the icon of the event to be deleted, and click the <Delete> button.
Caution
An event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if it is being used for an event.
Delete the event first, and then delete the event condition or event link condition.
To manage a software break event
Use the Software Break Manager, which is opened by selecting [Event] -> [Software Break Manager]
from the menu bar.
To create an event condition
Create an event condition in the Event dialog box, which can be opened by clicking the Evn button. In
268
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
addition, an event condition that is created when a hardware break is set in the source can also be
used (refer to "Breakpoint setting/deletion function").
To create an event link condition
Create an event link condition in the Event Link dialog box, which can be opened by selecting [Event] > [Event Link] from the menu bar.
To set an event condition and event link condition as various event condition
Set an event condition or event link condition as a various event condition in the Break dialog box,
Trace dialog box, Snap Shot dialog box, Stub dialog box, or Timer dialog box, which can be opened by
clicking the corresponding button, such as <Break...> and <Trace...> in the Event dialog box or Event
Link dialog box.
By dragging and dropping the event condition to be set from the Event Manager area at the lower part
of the screen to the condition setting area on each event setting dialog box, the event condition can be
easily set.
Each event setting dialog box can also be opened by selecting from the [Event] menu.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
269
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Software Break Manager
This window is used to display, enable or disable, and delete software breaks.
Up to 100 software break events can be enabled at the same time.
Software breakpoints cannot be set in this window; they can be set in the Source window or Assemble
window.
Figure 7-56 Software Break Manager
The section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Select [Event] -> [Software Break Manager] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and M in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Software Break Manager consists of the following areas:
(1) Name (event name display area)
(2) Brk (break mark display area)
(3) File#Line / Symbol+Offset (breakpoint display area)
(4) Address (address display area)
270
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Name (event name display area)
This area displays the names of registered events, and the check boxes that indicate whether each
event is enabled or disabled.
An event name is displayed in the form of Swb+[number] in the default condition. It can be changed
to an alphanumeric string of up to 256 characters.
To change an event name, select and click a name. Then directly edit the name. To set the editing,
press the Enter key.
When an event is enabled, the check box is checked.
Furthermore, the name jumps to the Source window by double-clicking an event name if the event
name corresponds to the source line, whereas the name jumps to the Assemble window if it does not
correspond to the source line.
Reference
By clicking Name (on the label), the character strings of the displayed items can be
compared and sorted lexicographically (in alphabetical order).
Whether the character
strings are compared or sorted in ascending or descending order can be alternately
selected by clicking the mouse.
(2)
Brk (break mark display area)
The '>' mark is displayed for a software break event that is set at the current PC position (so that the
software break event that caused a break can be easily identified).
(3)
File#Line / Symbol+Offset (breakpoint display area)
This area displays the location at which a software break event was set as follows:
If the event corresponds to the source line.
Program$file name#line number
If the event dose not correspond to the source line.
Program$file name#symbol+offset
Events are evaluated based on this when a symbol is re-downloaded.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
271
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Reference
By clicking File#Line/Symbol+Offset (on the label), the character strings of the displayed
items can be compared and sorted lexicographically (in alphabetical order). Whether the
character strings are compared or sorted in ascending or descending order can be
alternately selected by clicking the mouse.
(4)
Address (address display area)
This area displays the address at which a software break event is set.
Reference
By clicking Address (on the label), the numeric values of the displayed items can be
compared and sorted.
Whether the values are compared or sorted in ascending or
descending order can be alternately selected by clicking the mouse.
Function buttons
272
Enable
Enables the selected event.
Disable
Disables the selected event.
Delete
Deletes the selected event.
Delete ALL
Deletes all the set software break events.
Close
Closes this window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Event dialog box
Registers and displays event conditions.
An event condition registered in this dialog box will be automatically registered to the Event Manager.
As an event condition, one event can be set for two or more event conditions (break, trace, snapshot,
stub, timer, and event link).
Up to 256 event conditions can be registered. However, the number of event conditions that can be
simultaneously used is limited (refer to "Table 7-31 Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each Event
Condition").
Caution Event conditions used for break, snapshot, and stub cannot be used for trace and timer,
including those that are used via event link. Similarly, the event conditions used for trace and
timer cannot be used for break, snapshot, and stub, including those that are used via event
link.
An event condition for which an address range is specified internally uses two event
conditions. Therefore, the number of event conditions that can be used decreases by the
number of event conditions for which an address range is specified.
Figure 7-57 Event Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
273
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
In normal mode
If the Event dialog box is opened as follows, an event condition can be registered without its purpose
being specified.
• Click the Evn button.
• Select [Event] -> [Event...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and E in that order).
In select mode
If the <OK> button is pressed when the Event dialog box has been opened as follows, an event
condition can be registered in the setting dialog box from which this dialog box was opened.
• In each event setting dialog box
Click the <Add Event> button.
(or press Alt and E in that order).
In the select mode, the setting dialog box from which the Event dialog box was opened is displayed
on the title bar.
Explanation of each area
The Event dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Event Name (event name setting area)
(2) Event Status (status selection area)
(3) Access Size (access size selection area)
(4) Address (address setting area)
(5) Data, Mask (data setting area)
(6) Ext Probe, Mask (external sense data setting area)
(7) Event Manager (event manager area)
(1)
Event Name (event name setting area)
This area is used to set a event name.
Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name.
To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list.
In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event condition setting area of the
setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box.
274
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 7-33 Color of
Character on Mark and its Meaning"). The gray E. mark indicates that the event condition is being
edited and has not been registered yet.
(2)
Event Status (status selection area)
This area is used to select a status condition.
By specifying a status condition, the type of the execution event and an access event is determined (if
an execution event is specified, nothing can be input to the Access Size, Address Mask, and Data
areas).
The status conditions that can be specified are listed below. A status condition can also be specified in
abbreviated form.
Uppercase and lowercase characters are not distinguished in the input status condition.
Table 7-36 List of Status Conditions
<Execution event>
Status
a.
Abbreviation
Meaning
Execution
EX
Program execution
Before Execution
EX-B
Program execution (break before execution) a.
With IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A
Multiple events can be set for Before Execution, however, up to 2 events can be enabled. It can be used only
for break event conditions. An address range cannot be specified to it.
<Access event>
Status
Abbreviation
Meaning
R/W
RW
Data read/write
Read
R
Data read
Write
W
Data write
Access
AC
All access statuses
R/W(Data not Equal)
RWND
Data read/write
(An event occurs only if a data condition is not
satisfied.)
* Displayed only when V850E is selected
Read(Data not Equal)
RND
Data read
(An event occurs only if a data condition is not
satisfied.)
* Displayed only when V850E is selected
Write(Data not Equal)
WND
Data write
(An event occurs only if a data condition is not
satisfied.)
* Displayed only when V850E is selected
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
275
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3)
Access Size (access size selection area)
This area is used to set and select an access size condition.
By specifying an access size condition, the access width of a data condition to be detected by an
access event is determined.
The access size conditions that can be specified are listed below. An access size condition can also
be specified in abbreviated form. Uppercase and lowercase characters are not distinguished in the
input access size condition.
Table 7-37 List of Access Size Conditions (Event)
Size
Abbreviation
Meaning
Byte
B
Detects data condition with 8-bit width (only during 8-bit access).
Half Word
HW
Detects data condition with 16-bit width (only during 16-bit
access).
Word
W
Detects data condition with 32-bit width (only during 32-bit
access).
No Condition
NC
Does not detect access size (nothing can be input to the Data
area).
Bit
1
Detects data condition with 1-bit width (only during 8-bit access).
In this case, a data condition is detected with 1-bit width.
Because of the operation of the emulator, access to a bit is not
directly detected; the debugger detects a dummy bit access by
internally setting address conditions and data conditions as
follows:
Input example:
Address: fe20
Data: 1
Setting to emulator)
Address: fe20
Data: 00000010B
Mask: 11111101B
If another bit of the same address is accessed or if all the 8 bits
of the same address are accessed, therefore, an event is
detected in accordance with the specified status if the address
and bit match the specified value of [address.bit].
When data is written to a bit, all the 8 bits are read/written. If read or read/write is specified as the
status, an event occurs if a read operation is performed at this time if the value of the specified
[Address.bit] matches.
If no access size is specified, judgment is automatically made from the address condition and data
condition, and the following is set:
• Bit if the address condition is set in bit units
• Byte if the address condition is set in 8-bit units
• Half Word if the address condition is set in 16-bit units
276
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Word if the address condition is set in 32-bit units
• No Condition if no data condition is specified
(4)
Address (address setting area)
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Settable range
0 =< data value =< 0xFFFFFFFF
Address
Set an address condition (lower address - higher address).
The following can be set:
(5)
Set Point
Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower
address and the higher address.
Set Range
Set a value to the lower address and the higher address.
To change the event condition used, a range must be specified after
changing the event condition if a range is specified before the change.
Similarly, if a range is not specified before the change, a range cannot be
specified for an address condition.
Set Bit
Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower
address and the higher address. Specify a value in the form of
address.bit.
The value of bit, which indicates the bit position, must be 0 =<bit =<7.
Data, Mask (data setting area)
Data, which sets an data value, and Mask, which sets the mask value of an data value, are set as data
conditions.
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Both the data and mask may be omitted.
The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in the Access
Size area.
Table 7-38 Settable Range of Data Condition
Access Size
Settable range
Byte
0 =< data value =< 0xFF
0 =< mask value =< 0xFF
Half Word
0 =< data value =< 0xFFFF
0 =< mask value =< 0xFFFF
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
277
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-38 Settable Range of Data Condition
Access Size
Settable range
Word
0 =< data value =< 0xFFFFFFFF
0 =< mask value =< 0xFFFFFFFF
Bit
Data value = 0 or 1
Mask value = Cannot be specified.
Data
Set a data value. Specify a value within the settable range.
A symbol or expression can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15
Specifying Symbols").
Mask
Set a mask value for the data value.
When a mask is set, the data value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1.
The data value for a bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1.
Example 1:
Data
0x4000
Mask
0xFF
With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition.
Example 2:
Data
0x4000
Mask
0x101
With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition.
(6)
Ext Probe, Mask (external sense data setting area)
This area is used to set an external sense data condition.
External sense data is the input pin level of the external sense clip attached to the emulation probe
connected to the in-circuit emulator (refer to "Table 7-23 Correspondence Between External Sense
Data and External Sense Clip").
External sense data conditions include Ex Probe, which sets an external sense data value, and Mask,
which sets the mask value of an external sense data value.
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. Both data and mask may be omitted.
Table 7-39 Settable Range of External Sense Data Condition
Settable Range
0 <= Address value <= 0xFF
278
Condition
None
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-39 Settable Range of External Sense Data Condition
Settable Range
Condition
0 <= Mask Value <= 0xFF
None
Exp Probe
Specify an external sense data value.
Set the high input pin level of the external sense clip to 1, and the low input level to 0.
Caution
Only when the IE-703102-MC, IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is connected to the ID850,
eight external sense clips are used; otherwise four external sense clips are used. If four
external sense clips are used, the higher 4 bits are always fixed to 0.
Mask
Set a mask value for the external sense data.
The data value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1.
Example 1:
Ext Probe
0x8
Mask
0x7
With this setting, the condition is satisfied if the data is 0x8 to 0xF.
Example 2:
Ext Probe
0x8
Mask
0x5
With this setting, the condition is satisfied if the data is 0x8, 0x9, 0xC, or 0xD.
(7)
Event Manager (event manager area)
This area displays a list of break, trace and other registered events.
In this area, the following operations can be performed.
Displaying set contents
Select an event and click the <Open> button or double-click the event. The setting dialog box
corresponding to the selected event will be opened and the set contents of the event will be displayed.
Delete
A selected event can be deleted by selecting the icon of the event and clicking the <Delete> button or
pressing the DEL key while focussing on the event manager area.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
279
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Changing display mode and sorting
The display mode of and sorting in the event manager area can be selected by clicking the <Info...>
button.
Function buttons
Setting-related buttons
OK
Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this
dialog box.
In the select mode
An event condition is selected and the setting dialog box (indicated on the title
bar) that called the Event dialog box is displayed again. If the calling dialog box
has already been closed, the select mode is returned to the normal mode, and
the Event dialog box is not closed. Otherwise, this dialog box will be closed.
New
Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box.
An event name is automatically created and a new event condition is prepared.
Set
(when a new
event is created
or an event is
changed)
Registers each event condition. Because the dialog box is not closed even
after an event has been registered, new event conditions can be registered.
In the select mode
An event condition is selected. If there is an event being edited, it is
automatically registered and selected.
Clear
(when an event is
not edited)
Clears the contents of the event condition.
This button is displayed when an event condition has not been edited.
This button and the <Restore> button are alternately displayed.
Restore
(when an event is
edited)
Restores the contents of an edited event condition.
If an event condition not registered is displayed, all the fields other than the
event name field are blank or the default values are set.
This button and the <Clear> button are alternately displayed.
Cancel
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not registered and the dialog box
is closed.
<Cancel> is displayed if a condition is not created, changed, or deleted;
<Close> is displayed if it is.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Buttons for opening each event setting dialog box
Event Link...
Opens the Event Link dialog box.
Break...
Opens the Break dialog box.
Trace...
Opens the Trace dialog box.
Snap Shot...
Opens the Snap Shot dialog box.
Stub...
Opens the Stub dialog box.
Timer...
Opens the Timer dialog box.
Manager
Opens the Event Manager.
Buttons in event manager area
280
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Shrink <<<
(When area is
displayed)
Turns off display of the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is reduced.
Expand >>>
(When area is not
displayed)
Displays the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is expanded.
Open
(When only one
event is selected)
Opens the event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event
condition. Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event
condition.
The Enter key performs the same operation.
Remove
(When event is
selected)
Deletes the selected event condition.
When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error
occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the
event is used as an event condition.
Info...
Opens the Select Display Information dialog box.
This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event
names.
Sort by Name
Sorts events into type order.
Sort by Kind
Sorts events into type order.
Unsort
Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting
the events.
Detail
Sets the detailed display mode.
Overview
Sets the list display mode.。
Cancel
Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
281
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Event Link dialog box
This dialog box is used to register and display event link conditions.
A event link condition registered in this dialog box will be automatically registered to the Event Manager.
An event link condition is an event condition that is generated only if the user program is executed in the
sequence specified by a set event condition.
Up to four sequences can be specified. If a disable condition is detected while the program is being
executed, however, the event conditions that have so far been satisfied are initialized, and the event
conditions are detected again starting from the first event condition. If a link condition and a disable
condition are detected at the same time, the disable condition takes precedence.
An event link condition can be used for multiple various event conditions. The following various event
conditions can use event link conditions:
Table 7-40 Various Event Conditions for Which Event Link Condition Can Be Use
Using IE
Break
condition
Trace
condition
Snapshot
condition
Stub
condition
Timer
condition
IE-703002-MC
OK a.
OK b.
NG
NG
OK
IE-703102-MC
OK a.
OK b.
NG
NG
OK
IE-V850E-MC or IEV850E-MC-A, IEV850ES-G1
OK a.
OK b.
NG
NG
OK
a.
An event link condition which is used for a break event condition cannot be used for a trace or timer event
condition. Alternately, In a similar manner, an event link condition which is used for a trace or timer event
condition cannot be used for a break event condition.
b.
It cannot be used for a qualify condition or section trace condition.
Up to 256 event link conditions can be registered. However, the number of event link conditions that can
be simultaneously used (valid) is limited (refer to "Table 7-31 Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each
Event Condition").
282
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 7-58 Event Link Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
In normal mode
If the Event Link dialog box is opened as follows, an event link condition can be registered without its
purpose being specified.
• Select [Event] -> [Event Link...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and L in that order).
In select mode
If the <OK> button is pressed when the Event Link dialog box has been opened as follows, an event
link condition can be registered in the setting dialog box from which this dialog box was opened.
• In each various event setting dialog box
Click the <Add Link...> button.
(or press Alt+L, and L in that order).
In the select mode, the setting dialog box from which the Event Link dialog box was opened is
displayed on the title bar.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
283
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
The Event Link dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Link Name (event link name setting area)
(2) Phase1, Phase2, Phase3, Phase4 (link condition setting area)
(3) Disable (disable condition setting area)
(4) Pass Count (pass count setting area)
(5) Event Manager (event manager area)
(1)
Link Name (event link name setting area)
This area is used to set a event link name.
Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name.
To display the contents of an already created event link condition, select from the drop-down list.
In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event kink condition setting area of
the setting dialog box that called the Event Link dialog box.
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of event link condition (refer to "Table 733 Color of Character on Mark and its Meaning"). The mark "L" in gray indicates that an event link
condition is being edited and has not been registered yet.
(2)
Phase1, Phase2, Phase3, Phase4 (link condition setting area)
This area is used to specify the sequence in which event conditions and events are detected.
Set Phase 1 -> Phase 2 -> Phase 3 -> Phase 4, in that order. Phase 4 does not have to be set.
in this case, an event occurs when the event condition set for the last phase has been detected. An
event condition can be set for only Phase 1 or the same event condition can be set for two or more
Phases.
The number of event conditions that can be set for each Phase in this area is up to 10. However, the
total number of event conditions settable in this area, including those set in the Disable area, is 22 (14
execution events* and eight access events).
Note
If the IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MC-A is used, the 14 execution events* include 10 events
before execution (can be used only for break) and after execution.
284
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Setting event condition in each area
Select an event condition in the Event Manager area, and click the <Add> button or drag and drop an
event condition. An event link condition can also be set by dragging and dropping not only in this
dialog box, but also in the Event Manager area of each various event setting dialog box or the Event
Manager.
In addition, the Event dialog box can be opened in "select mode" by clicking the <Add Event...> button,
and the event condition to be set can be selected.
In the event condition setting area in this dialog box, an event condition can be alternately copied or
moved by dragging and dropping.
• If an event condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved.
• If an event condition is dropped with the Shift key held down, it is moved.
• If an event condition is dropped with the Ctrl key held down, it is copied.
(3)
Disable (disable condition setting area)
This area is used to set an event condition that invalidates the event conditions that have so far been
satisfied (refer to "Setting event condition in each area").
The number of event conditions that can be set in this area is up to 10.
(4)
Pass Count (pass count setting area)
This area is used to set a pass count condition (settable range: 1 to 32767).
A pass count condition specifies how many times an event condition must be satisfied during user
program execution before a given condition is satisfied.
If the pass count is set to 1, the condition is satisfied as soon as the event condition is satisfied.
If no pass count is specified, 1 is assumed.
(5)
Event Manager (event manager area)
This area displays a list of break, trace and other registered various event conditions.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
285
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
For details, refer to "Event Manager (event manager area)".
Function buttons
Setting-related buttons
OK
Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this
dialog box.
In the select mode
An event condition is selected and the setting dialog box (indicated on the title
bar) that called the Event Link dialog box is displayed again. If the calling
dialog box has already been closed, the select mode is returned to the normal
mode, and the Event dialog box is not closed. Otherwise, this dialog box will be
closed.
New
Newly creates an event link condition in this dialog box.
An event link condition name is automatically created and a new event link
condition is prepared.
Set
(when a new
event link is
created or an
event link is
changed)
Registers the various event condition. Because the dialog box is not closed
even after an event has been registered, new event link conditions can be
registered.
In the select mode
An event condition is selected. If there is an event being edited, it is
automatically registered and selected.
Clear
(when an event is
not edited)
Clears the contents of the event link condition.
This button is displayed when an event link condition has not been edited.
This button and the <Restore> button are alternately displayed.
Restore
(when an event is
edited)
Restores the contents of an edited event link condition.
If an event link condition not registered is displayed, all the fields other than the
event name field are blank or the default values are set.
This button and the <Clear> button are alternately displayed.
Cancel
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Even if an event link condition is being edited, it is not registered and the dialog
box is closed.
<Cancel> is displayed if a condition is not created, changed, or deleted;
<Close> is displayed if it is.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Buttons for opening each event setting dialog box
Add Event...
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly creates an
event condition to be set. The event condition will be added to the area
selected when the < Add Event...> button is pressed.
Other...
Opens the dialog box for selecting the event type.
By pressing each of the above buttons, each event setting dialog box can be
opened in the new creation status.
Buttons in event manager area
Shrink <<<
(When area is
displayed)
286
Turns off display of the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is reduced.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Expand >>>
(When area is not
displayed)
Displays the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is expanded.
Open
(When only one
event is selected)
Opens the event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event
condition. Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event
condition.
The Enter key performs the same operation.
Remove
(When event is
selected)
Deletes the selected event condition.
When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error
occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the
event is used as a various event condition.
Add
Sets additionally the event condition or event link condition selected in the
event manager area to setting area with a focus. The area to be set additionally
is the area which was selected when this button was selected.
Info...
Opens the Select Display Information dialog box.
This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event
names.
Sort by Name
Sorts events into type order.
Sort by Kind
Sorts events into type order.
Unsort
Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting
the events.
Detail
Sets the detailed display mode.
Overview
Sets the list display mode.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
287
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Break dialog box
This dialog box is used to register, set, and display break event conditions.
A break event condition registered in this dialog box will be automatically registered to the Event
Manager.
A break event condition automatically becomes valid when it has been registered.
Up to 256 break event conditions can be registered. However, the number of break event conditions that
can be simultaneously used is limited (refer to "Table 7-31 Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each
Event Condition"). If the maximum number of break event conditions that can be used at the same time is
exceeded or if the number of event conditions or event link conditions used exceeds the maximum limit,
therefore, register a break event condition in the disabled state.
If [Run] -> [Ignore Break Point] is selected from the menu bar, a break event condition does not operate
even if it is valid.
Figure 7-59 Break Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
288
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Click the Brk button.
• Select [Event] -> [Break...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and B in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Break dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Break Name (break event name setting area)
(2) Break Event (break condition setting area)
(3) Event Manager (event manager area)
(1)
Break Name (break event name setting area)
This area is used to set a break event name.
Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name.
To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list.
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 7-33 Color of
Character on Mark and its Meaning"). The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited
and has not been registered yet.
By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated.
(2)
Break Event (break condition setting area)
This area is used to set an event condition for break.
The number of event conditions that can be set in this area, combining execution events and access
events, is as follows:
Table 7-41 Number of Events Settable in Break Condition Setting Area
Total (execution/access)
IE Using
IE-703002-MC
22(14/8)
IE-703102-MC
22(14/8)
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
289
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 7-41 Number of Events Settable in Break Condition Setting Area
Total (execution/access)
IE Using
IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MCA, IE-V850ES-G1
a.
22(14a./8)
Event before execution:4, Event after execution:10
The number of event link conditions explained in Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each Event
Condition can be used as long as the number of event conditions does not exceed the maximum
number of event conditions simultaneously usable.
Setting event condition and event link condition in each area
Select an event condition or event link condition in the Event Manager area, and click the <Add>
button or drag and drop an event condition or event link condition. An event condition or event link
condition can also be set by dragging and dropping not only in this dialog box, but also in the Event
Manager area of each event setting dialog box and from the Event Manager.
In addition, Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box can be opened in "select mode" by clicking the
<Add Event...> or <Add Link...> button, and the event condition or event link condition to be set can be
selected.
In the event condition setting area in this dialog box, an event condition can be alternately copied or
moved by dragging and dropping.
• If an event condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved.
• If an event condition is dropped with the Shift key held down, it is moved.
• If an event condition is dropped with the Ctrl key held down, it is copied.
(3)
Event Manager (event manager area)
This area displays a list of break, trace and other registered events.
For details, refer to "Event Manager (event manager area)".
Function buttons
Setting-related buttons
290
OK
Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this
dialog box. The event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
New
Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box.
An event name is automatically created and a new event condition is prepared.
Set
(when a new
event is created
or an event is
changed)
Registers each event condition. Because the dialog box is not closed even after
an event has been registered, new event conditions can be registered. Each
event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been registered.
If an already registered event condition is displayed, the <Enable> or <Disable>
button is alternately displayed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Enable/Disable
(when a
registered event is
displayed)
Validates (enables) or invalidates (disables) the selected event condition.
However, event conditions and event link conditions cannot be enabled or
disabled.
This button and the <Set> button are alternately displayed.
Clear
(when an event is
not edited)
Clears the contents of the event condition.
This button is displayed when an event condition has not been edited.
This button and the <Restore> button are alternately displayed.
Restore
(when an event is
edited)
Restores the contents of an edited event condition.
If an event condition not registered is displayed, all the fields other than the
event name field are blank or the default values are set.
This button and the <Clear> button are alternately displayed.
Cancel
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not registered and the dialog box
is closed.
<Cancel> is displayed if a condition is not created, changed, or deleted;
<Close> is displayed if it is.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Buttons for opening each event setting dialog box
Add Event...
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly creates an
event condition to be set. The event condition will be added to the area
selected when the < Add Event...> button is pressed.
Add Link...
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly
creates an event link condition. The event link condition will be added to the
area selected when the <Add Link...> button is pressed.
Other...
Opens the Select Event Type dialog box.
By pressing each of the above buttons, each event setting dialog box can be
opened in the new creation status.
Buttons in event manager area
Shrink <<<
(When area is
displayed)
Turns off display of the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is reduced.
Expand >>>
(When area is not
displayed)
Displays the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is expanded.
Open
(When only one
event is selected)
Opens the event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event
condition. Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event
condition.
The Enter key performs the same operation.
Remove
(When event is
selected)
Deletes the selected event condition.
When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error
occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the
event is used as an event condition.
Add
Sets additionally the event condition or event link condition selected in the
event manager area to setting area with a focus. The area to be set additionally
is the area which was selected when this button was selected.
Info...
Opens the Select Display Information dialog box.
This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event
names.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
291
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
292
Sort by Name
Sorts events into name order.
Sort by Name
Sorts events into type order.
Unsort
Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting
the events.
Detail
Sets the detailed display mode.
Overview
Sets the list display mode.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace dialog box
This dialog box is used to register, set, and display trace event conditions.
In this dialog box, the following types of trace event conditions can be set:
• Event condition for delay trigger
• Event condition for starting section trace
• Event condition for ending section trace
• Event condition for qualify trace
To use the above trace event conditions, select [Run] -> [Cond. Trace ON] from the menu bar.
A trace event condition registered in this dialog box will be automatically registered to the Event Manager.
A trace event condition automatically becomes valid when it has been registered.
Up to 256 trace event conditions can be registered. However, the number of trace event conditions that
can be simultaneously used is only 1 (refer to "Table 7-31 Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each Event
Condition").
If the maximum number of trace event conditions that can be used at the same time is exceeded or if the
number of event conditions or event link conditions used exceeds the maximum limit, therefore, register a
trace event condition in the disabled state.
Figure 7-60 Trace Dialog Box
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
293
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
• Related operations
• To set delay count
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Click the Trc button.
• Select [Event] -> [Trace...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and T in that order).
• Click the <Trace> button in the Event dialog box
(or press Alt+T in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Trace dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Trace Name (trace event name setting area)
(2) Delay Trigger (delay trigger condition setting area)
(3) Section Start, Section End (section trace range condition setting area)
(4) Qualify (qualify trace condition setting area)
(5) Event Manager (event manager area)
(1)
Trace Name (trace event name setting area)
This area is used to set a trace event name.
Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name.
To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list.
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 7-33 Color of
Character on Mark and its Meaning"). The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited
and has not been registered yet.
By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated.
294
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2)
Delay Trigger (delay trigger condition setting area)
This area is used to set an event condition for a delay trigger.
To set a delay count, use Delay Count dialog box that can be opened by selecting [Event] -> [Delay
Count...] from the menu bar.
The number of event conditions that can be set in this area, combining execution events and access
events, is as follows:
Total (execution/access)
IE Using
IE-703002-MC
22(14/8)
IE-703102-MC
22(14/8)
IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MCA, IE-V850ES-G1
18(10/8)
To set an event condition, drag the icon of the event to be set from the Event Manager area, and drop
it in this area. For details, refer to "Setting event condition and event link condition in each area".
(3)
Section Start, Section End (section trace range condition setting area)
This area is used to set event conditions for starting and stopping a section trace.
By setting a trace start event condition as Section Start and a trace end event condition as Section
End, a section trace (zone trace) can be performed.
The number of event conditions that can be set in this area, combining execution events and access
events, is as follows:
Total (execution/access)
IE Using
a.
IE-703002-MC
22(14/8) a.
IE-703102-MC
22(14/8) a.
IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MCA, IE-V850ES-G1
18(10/8) a.
Only event after executions can be used as execution events.
The number of event link conditions explained in Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each Event
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
295
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Condition can be used as long as the number of event conditions does not exceed the maximum
number of event conditions simultaneously usable.
To set an event condition, drag the icon of the event to be set from the Event Manager area, and drop
it in this area. For details, refer to "Setting event condition and event link condition in each area".
(4)
Qualify (qualify trace condition setting area)
This area is used to set an event condition for a qualify trace.
In a qualify trace, a trace is performed only when a trace condition is satisfied.
If two or more events are set, trace is performed when each event occurs.
The number of event conditions that can be set in this area, combining execution events and access
events, is as follows:
Total (execution/access)
IE Using
a.
IE-703002-MC
22(14/8) a.
IE-703102-MC
22(14/8) a.
IE-V850E-MC or IE-V850E-MCA, IE-V850ES-G1
18(10/8) a.
An event link condition cannot be used.
The number of event link conditions explained in Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each Event
Condition can be used as long as the number of event conditions does not exceed the maximum
number of event conditions simultaneously usable.
Note that an event link condition cannot be set.
To set an event condition, drag the icon of the event to be set from the Event Manager area, and drop
it in this area. For details, refer to "Setting event condition and event link condition in each area".
(5)
Event Manager (event manager area)
This area displays a list of break, trace and other registered various event conditions.
For details, refer to "Event Manager (event manager area)".
296
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Setting-related buttons
OK
Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this
dialog box. The event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
New
Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box.
An event condition name is automatically created and a new event condition is
prepared.
Set
(when a new
event link is
created or an
event link is
changed)
Registers the various event condition. Because the dialog box is not closed
even after an event has been registered, new event conditions can be
registered. Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
If an already registered event condition is displayed, the <Enable> or <Disable>
button is alternately displayed.
Enable/Disable
(when a
registered event is
displayed)
Validates (enables) or invalidates (disables) the selected event condition.
However, event conditions and event link conditions cannot be enabled or
disabled.
This button and the <Set> button are alternately displayed.
Clear
(when an event is
not edited)
Clears the contents of the event condition.
This button is displayed when an event condition has not been edited.
This button and the <Restore> button are alternately displayed.
Restore
(when an event is
edited)
Restores the contents of an edited event condition.
If an event condition not registered is displayed, all the fields other than the
event name field are blank or the default values are set.
This button and the <Clear> button are alternately displayed.
Cancel
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not registered and the dialog box
is closed.
<Cancel> is displayed if a condition is not created, changed, or deleted;
<Close> is displayed if it is.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Buttons for opening each event setting dialog box
Add Event...
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly creates an
event condition to be set. The event condition will be added to the area
selected when the < Add Event...> button is pressed.
Add Link...
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly
creates an event link condition. The event link condition will be added to the
area selected when the <Add Link...> button is pressed.
Other...
Opens the dialog box for selecting the event type.
By pressing each of the buttons, each various event setting dialog box can be
opened in the new creation status.
Buttons in event manager area
Shrink <<<
(When area is
displayed)
Turns off display of the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is reduced.
Expand >>>
(When area is not
displayed)
Displays the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is expanded.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
297
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Open
(When only one
event is selected)
Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event
condition. Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event
condition.
The Enter key performs the same operation.
Remove
(When event is
selected)
Deletes the selected event condition.
When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error
occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the
event is used as a various event condition.
Add
Sets additionally the event condition or event link condition selected in the
event manager area to setting area with a focus. The area to be set additionally
is the area which was selected when this button was selected.
Info...
Opens the Select Display Information dialog box.
This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event
names.
Sort by Name
Sorts events into type order.
Sort by Kind
Sorts events into type order.
Unsort
Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting
the events.
Detail
Sets the detailed display mode.
Overview
Sets the list display mode.。
Cancel
Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key).
Related operations
To set delay count
To set a delay count, use Delay Count dialog box, which can be opened by selecting [Event] -> [Delay
Count...] from the menu bar.
The set delay count is valid for trace event conditions for which a delay trigger event is set.
298
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Snap Shot dialog box
This dialog box is used to register, set, and display snapshot event conditions.
A snapshot event condition registered in this dialog box will be automatically registered to the Event
Manager.
A snapshot event condition automatically becomes valid when it has been registered.
Up to 256 snapshot event conditions can be registered.
However, the number of snapshot event
conditions that can be simultaneously used is one including the stub event condition (refer to "Table 7-31
Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each Event Condition").
If the maximum number of break event conditions that can be used at the same time is exceeded or if the
number of event conditions or event link conditions used exceeds the maximum limit, therefore, register a
break event condition in the disabled state.
Caution The ID850 uses hardware breaks to control the operation of the snapshot from the host
computer. Therefore, the timing at which the snapshot event occurs differs depending on the
setting of the break mode ("break before execution" and "break after execution" : refer to
"Extended Option dialog box").
In addition, the time during which real-time execution is
disrupted depends on the load of Windows on the host computer.
Figure 7-61 Snap Shot Dialog Box (with Register Selected)
This section explains the following items:
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
299
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Event] -> [Snap Shot...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and S in that order).
• Click the <Snap Shot...> button in the Event dialog box.
(or press Alt and S in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Snap Shot dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Snap Name (snapshot event name setting area)
(2) Snap Event (snapshot condition setting area)
(3) Select (snap data selection area)
(4) Snap data setting area
(5) Snap Entry (snap data display area)
(6) Event Manager (event manager area)
(1)
Snap Name (snapshot event name setting area)
This area is used to set a snapshot event name.
Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name.
To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list.
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 7-33 Color of
Character on Mark and its Meaning"). The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited
and has not been registered yet.
By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated.
(2)
Snap Event (snapshot condition setting area)
This area is used to set an event condition for the snapshot.
In the snapshot condition setting area, only one event condition and one event link condition can be
set.
300
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
To set an event condition or event link condition, drag the icon of the event to be set from the Event
Manager area, and drop it in this area. For details, refer to "Setting event condition and event link
condition in each area".
(3)
Select (snap data selection area)
This area is used to select type of data subject to snapshot.
By selecting a data type, the item to be displayed in the snap data setting area on the right of this area
changes in accordance with the selected area.
Data Type
(4)
Contents
Item in Right Area (Snap Data Setting Area)
Register
A register can be registered.
Register Name
I/O Reg
A peripheral I/O register can
be registered.
I/O Reg Name
Memory
Memory can be registered.
Memory Address , Memory Display
Snap data setting area
This area is used to register, change, or delete snap data.
The snap data registered, changed, or deleted in this area is reflected in the Snap Entry area.
If snap data is selected in the Snap Entry area, the contents of the selected snap data are displayed in
this area.
As snap data, up to 16 registers, peripheral I/O registers, and memory addresses each can be
registered; therefore, a total of 48 registers, peripheral I/O registers, and memory addresses can be
registered.
This area displays different items, as follows, depending on the item selected in the Select field.
When Register is selected
Register Name (register name setting area)
This area is used to specify a register name.
To specify a register name, select a register name from the drop-down list.
Program registers and system registers can be specified. Uppercase and lowercase characters are
not distinguished.
A register name can be specified as both a function name and an absolute name.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
301
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Note that all register names are displayed in uppercase characters in the Trace window, in the form of
'absolute name (function name)'.
When I/O Reg is selected
I/O Reg Name (peripheral I/O register name setting area)
This area is used to specify a peripheral I/O register name.
To specify a register name, either directly input one to the text box, or select one from the drop-down
list.
Only the peripheral I/O registers that can be read can be specified. Uppercase and lowercase
characters are not distinguished.
The peripheral I/O bit names and the I/O port name registered in the Add I/O Port dialog box cannot be
specified.
Note that all the register names are displayed in uppercase characters in the Trace window.
When Memory is selected
Memory Address (memory address setting area)
This area is used to specify an address range of the memory (settable range: 0 <= address <=
0xFFFFFFFF).
Start address - End address
If a value is input as only the start address and specifying the end address is omitted, it is assumed
that the same value as the start address is specified as the end address. If the specified address
range cannot be divided by the access size, the address range is rounded up to a range that can be
divided by the access size.
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
If addresses are registered or changed in this area by using expressions or symbols, the converted
address values are displayed in the Snap Entry area along with the specified expressions and
symbols.
In the Trace window, only the converted address values are displayed.
Memory Display (memory display size setting area)
This area is used to specify the access size of memory snap data.
To specify the access size, either directly input the size or select the size from the drop-down list.
Uppercase and lowercase characters are not distinguished.
302
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Access Size
Abbreviation
Contents
Byte
B
Snapshot of memory in 8-bit units
Half Word
HW
Snapshot of memory in 16-bit units
Word
W
Snapshot of memory in 32-bit units
Buttons to manipulate snap data
The following buttons are used to register, change, and delete snap data.
(5)
Insert
Registers snap data.
The registered snap data is inserted and displayed at the selected position in
the Snap Entry area.
Change
Changes the contents of the snap data selected in the Snap Entry area to
the contents of the snap data specified in this area.
Delete
Deletes the snap data selected in the Snap Entry area.
The DEL key performs the same operation.
Restore
Restores the contents in the Snap Entry area.
Snap Entry (snap data display area)
This area displays a list of registered snap data.
The registered snap data is written into the tracer when a snapshot event occurs.
If snap data is selected in this area, the contents of the selected snap data are displayed in each
setting area.
Snap data is displayed as follows:
Register snap data:
R1
R3(SP)
Register name
Peripheral I/O register snap data:
P0
P1
Peripheral I/O register name
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
303
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory snap data:
0xFFE000,HW
0xFFE100-0xFFE10f
(6)
Start address <symbol expression> - End address <symbol
expression>, Access size
Event Manager (event manager area)
This area displays a list of break, trace and other registered various event conditions.
For details, refer to "Event Manager (event manager area)".
Function buttons
Setting-related buttons
304
OK
Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this
dialog box. The event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
New
Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box.
An event condition name is automatically created and a new event condition is
prepared.
Set
(when a new
event link is
created or an
event link is
changed)
Registers the various event condition. Because the dialog box is not closed
even after an event has been registered, new event conditions can be
registered. Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
If an already registered event condition is displayed, the <Enable> or <Disable>
button is alternately displayed.
Enable/Disable
(when a
registered event is
displayed)
Validates (enables) or invalidates (disables) the selected event condition.
However, event conditions and event link conditions cannot be enabled or
disabled.
This button and the <Set> button are alternately displayed.
Clear
(when an event is
not edited)
Clears the contents of the event condition.
This button is displayed when an event condition has not been edited.
This button and the <Restore> button are alternately displayed.
Restore
(when an event is
edited)
Restores the contents of an edited event condition.
If an event condition not registered is displayed, all the fields other than the
event name field are blank or the default values are set.
This button and the <Clear> button are alternately displayed.
Cancel
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not registered and the dialog box
is closed.
<Cancel> is displayed if a condition is not created, changed, or deleted; <
Close> is displayed if it is.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Help
Opens the Help window.
Buttons for opening each event setting dialog box
Add Event...
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly creates an
event condition to be set. The event condition will be added to the area
selected when the <Add Event...> button is pressed.
Add Link...
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly
creates an event link condition. The event condition will be added to the area
selected when the <Add Link...> button is pressed.
Other...
Opens the dialog box for selecting the event type.
By pressing each of the buttons, each various event setting dialog box can be
opened in the new creation status.
Buttons in event manager area
Shrink <<<
(When area is
displayed)
Turns off display of the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is reduced.
Expand >>>
(When area is not
displayed)
Displays the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is expanded.
Open
(When only one
event is selected)
Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event
condition. Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event
condition.
The Enter key performs the same operation.
Remove
(When event is
selected)
Deletes the selected event condition.
When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error
occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the
event is used as a various event condition.
Add
Sets additionally the event condition or event link condition selected in the
event manager area to setting area with a focus. The area to be set additionally
is the area which was selected when this button was selected.
Info...
Opens the Select Display Information dialog box.
This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event
names.
Sort by Name
Sorts events into type order.
Sort by Kind
Sorts events into type order.
Unsort
Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting
the events.
Detail
Sets the detailed display mode.
Overview
Sets the list display mode.。
Cancel
Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
305
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Stub dialog box
This dialog box is used to register, set, and display stub event conditions.
A stub event condition registered in this dialog box will be automatically registered to the Event Manager.
A stub event condition automatically becomes valid when it has been registered.
Up to 256 stub event conditions can be registered. However, the number of stub event conditions that
can be simultaneously used is one including the snap shot event condition (refer to "Table 7-31 Maximum
Number of Valid Events for Each Event Condition"). If the maximum number of stub event conditions that
can be used at the same time is exceeded or if the number of event conditions or event link conditions used
exceeds the maximum limit, therefore, register a stub event condition in the disabled state.
Caution To use the stub event, set After (break after execution) under Break condition (break mode
setting area) in the Extended Option dialog box.
Note that the ID850 uses hardware breaks to control the operation of the stub from the host
computer. The time during which real-time execution is disrupted depends on the load of
Windows on the host computer.
Figure 7-62 Stub Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
306
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Event] -> [Stub...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and U in that order).
• Click the <Stub...> button in the Event dialog box.
(or press Alt+U).
Explanation of each area
The Stub dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Stub Name (stub event name setting area)
(2) Stub Event (stub condition setting area)
(3) Go to (jump address setting area)
(4) Event Manager (event manager area)
(1)
Stub Name (stub event name setting area)
This area is used to set a stub event name.
Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name.
To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list.
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 7-33 Color of
Character on Mark and its Meaning"). The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited
and has not been registered yet.
By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated.
(2)
Stub Event (stub condition setting area)
This area is used to set an event condition for the stub.
In the stub condition setting area, only one event condition and one event link condition can be set.
To set an event condition, drag the icon of the event to be set from the Event Manager area, and drop
it in this area. For details, refer to "Setting event condition and event link condition in each area".
(3)
Go to (jump address setting area)
This area is used to specify the top address of the function that is executed when a stub event occurs.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
307
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Settable range : 0 <= top address of function <= 0xFFFFFFFF
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to "Table 7-15 Specifying
Symbols"). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
To return from the specified function when a stub event occurs, describe 'JMP [r31] instruction' in the
function.
(4)
Event Manager (event manager area)
This area displays a list of break, trace and other registered various event conditions.
For details, refer to "Event Manager (event manager area)".
Function buttons
Setting-related buttons
308
OK
Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this
dialog box. The event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
New
Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box.
An event condition name is automatically created and a new event condition is
prepared.
Set
(when a new
event link is
created or an
event link is
changed)
Registers the various event condition. Because the dialog box is not closed
even after an event has been registered, new event conditions can be
registered. Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
If an already registered event condition is displayed, the <Enable> or <Disable>
button is alternately displayed.
Enable/Disable
(when a
registered event is
displayed)
Validates (enables) or invalidates (disables) the selected event condition.
However, event conditions and event link conditions cannot be enabled or
disabled.
This button and the <Set> button are alternately displayed.
Clear
(when an event is
not edited)
Clears the contents of the event condition.
This button is displayed when an event condition has not been edited.
This button and the <Restore> button are alternately displayed.
Restore
(when an event is
edited)
Restores the contents of an edited event condition.
If an event condition not registered is displayed, all the fields other than the
event name field are blank or the default values are set.
This button and the <Clear> button are alternately displayed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Cancel
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not registered and the dialog box
is closed.
<Cancel> is displayed if a condition is not created, changed, or deleted;
<Close> is displayed if it is.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Buttons for opening each event setting dialog box
Add Event...
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly creates an
event condition to be set. The event condition will be added to the area
selected when the < Add Event...> button is pressed.
Add Link...
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly
creates an event link condition. The event link condition will be added to the
area selected when the <Add Link...> button is pressed.
Other...
Opens the dialog box for selecting the event type.
By pressing each of the buttons, each various event setting dialog box can be
opened in the new creation status.
Buttons in event manager area
Shrink <<<
(When area is
displayed)
Turns off display of the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is reduced.
Expand >>>
(When area is not
displayed)
Displays the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is expanded.
Open
(When only one
event is selected)
Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event
condition. Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event
condition.
The Enter key performs the same operation.
Remove
(When event is
selected)
Deletes the selected event condition.
When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error
occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the
event is used as a various event condition.
Add
Sets additionally the event condition or event link condition selected in the
event manager area to setting area with a focus. The area to be set additionally
is the area which was selected when this button was selected.
Info...
Opens the Select Display Information dialog box.
This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event
names.
Sort by Name
Sorts events into type order.
Sort by Kind
Sorts events into type order.
Unsort
Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting
the events.
Detail
Sets the detailed display mode.
Overview
Sets the list display mode.。
Cancel
Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
309
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Timer dialog box
This dialog box is used to display the execution time measurement result, and register and set timer
event conditions.
A timer event condition that has been registered in this dialog box is automatically registered to the Event
Manager.
The execution time measurement result is displayed when the set timer event condition is selected.
A timer event condition automatically becomes valid when it has been registered.
Up to 256 timer event conditions can be registered. The number of timer event conditions that can be
simultaneously used (validated) is limited (refer to "Table 7-31 Maximum Number of Valid Events for Each
Event Condition").
If the maximum number of timer event conditions that can be used at the same time is exceeded or if the
number of event conditions or event link conditions used exceeds the maximum limit, therefore, register a
timer event condition in the disabled state.
Run-Break event
Run-Break is a timer event name given to a timer event condition that measures the execution time
from execution to break. This timer event name is registered in the default condition and the execution
time can be displayed by selecting it in the Timer Name area in this dialog box.
The Run-Break event for the ID850 is included in the number of timer events simultaneously usable;
therefore, it is always valid and can be used if the maximum number of timer events has not been
reached.
A timer event condition is satisfied only when the timer is valid.
Figure 7-63 Timer Dialog Box
310
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Click the Tim button.
• Select [Event] -> [Timer...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N, and I in that order).
• Click the <Timer... > button in the Event dialog box.
(or press Alt+I).
Explanation of each area
The Timer dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Timer Name (timer event name setting area)
(2) Start Event, End Event (timer condition setting area)
(3) Time (timer display unit selection area)
(4) Execution time display area
(5) Event Manager (event manager area)
(1)
Timer Name (timer event name setting area)
This area is used to set a timer event name.
Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name.
To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list.
The timer event name [Run-Break] that displays from execution to break is registered in the default
condition, but is not displayed on the Event Manager.
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 7-33 Color of
Character on Mark and its Meaning"). The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited
and has not been registered yet.
By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
311
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2)
Start Event, End Event (timer condition setting area)
This area is used to set an event condition for the timer.
Start Event
Set the event condition or event link condition that starts time measurement.
End Event
Set the event condition or event link condition that stops time measurement.
The number of event conditions that can be registered in the timer condition setting area is one for
each of the start and end conditions.
To set an event condition, drag the icon of the event to be set from the Event Manager area, and drop
it in this area. For details, refer to "Setting event condition and event link condition in each area".
(3)
Time (timer display unit selection area)
This area is used to select the unit in which the timer measurement result is to be displayed.
(4)
nsec
Nanoseconds (default)
usec
Microseconds
msec
Milliseconds
sec
Seconds
min
Minutes
clock
Number of Clocks
Execution time display area
This area displays the result of measuring the execution time of the program.
312
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Total
note
Total execution time in the measurement zone specified by start event and end
event conditions
(measurable execution time: 2 minutes 51 seconds max note )
CPU clock : 25MHz, Rate : 1, Display unit: 0.1us
Buttons to manipulate execution time display area
(5)
Initialize
Clears the measurement results.
Copy
Copies the measurement result to the clipboard in text format.
View Always
Displays the Timer Result dialog box in which the selected timer event
condition or the measurement result of Run-Break is displayed.
Event Manager (event manager area)
This area displays a list of break, trace and other registered various event conditions.
For details, refer to "Event Manager (event manager area)".
Function buttons
Setting-related buttons
OK
Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this
dialog box. The event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
New
Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box.
An event condition name is automatically created and a new event condition is
prepared.
Set
(when a new
event link is
created or an
event link is
changed)
Registers the various event condition. Because the dialog box is not closed
even after an event has been registered, new event conditions can be
registered. Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been
registered.
If an already registered event condition is displayed, the <Enable> or <Disable>
button is alternately displayed.
Enable/Disable
(when a
registered event is
displayed)
Validates (enables) or invalidates (disables) the selected event condition.
However, event conditions and event link conditions cannot be enabled or
disabled.
This button and the <Set> button are alternately displayed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
313
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Clear
(when an event is
not edited)
Clears the contents of the event condition.
This button is displayed when an event condition has not been edited.
This button and the <Restore> button are alternately displayed.
Restore
(when an event is
edited)
Restores the contents of an edited event condition.
If an event condition not registered is displayed, all the fields other than the
event name field are blank or the default values are set.
This button and the <Clear> button are alternately displayed.
Cancel
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not registered and the dialog box
is closed.
<Cancel> is displayed if a condition is not created, changed, or deleted;
<Close> is displayed if it is.
Help
Opens the Help window.
Buttons for opening each event setting dialog box
Add Event...
Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly creates an
event condition to be set. The event condition will be added to the area
selected when the < Add Event...> button is pressed.
Add Link...
Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly
creates an event link condition. The event link condition will be added to the
area selected when the <Add Link...> button is pressed.
Other...
Opens the dialog box for selecting the event type.
By pressing each of the buttons, each various event setting dialog box can be
opened in the new creation status.
Buttons in event manager area
314
Shrink <<<
(When area is
displayed)
Turns off display of the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is reduced.
Expand >>>
(When area is not
displayed)
Displays the event manager area.
At this time, the size of the dialog box is expanded.
Open
(When only one
event is selected)
Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event
condition. Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event
condition.
The Enter key performs the same operation.
Remove
(When event is
selected)
Deletes the selected event condition.
When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error
occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the
event is used as a various event condition.
Add
Sets additionally the event condition or event link condition selected in the
event manager area to setting area with a focus. The area to be set additionally
is the area which was selected when this button was selected.
Info...
Opens the Select Display Information dialog box.
This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event
names.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Sort by Name
Sorts events into type order.
Sort by Kind
Sorts events into type order.
Unsort
Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting
the events.
Detail
Sets the detailed display mode.
Overview
Sets the list display mode.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
315
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Timer Result dialog box
This dialog box displays the result of measuring the execution time.
It displays the timer event condition set in the Timer dialog box and the result of measuring the execution
time of [Run-Break].
The Timer Result dialog box corresponds to a timer event condition or [Run-Break] on a one-to-one
basis, and two or more of this dialog box can be simultaneously opened. Up to 257 Timer Result dialog
boxes can be opened, of which 256 correspond to timer event conditions and one corresponds to [RunBreak].
However, the number of timer event conditions that can be simultaneously measured is up to the number
of timer event conditions that can be simultaneously used (refer to "Table 7-31 Maximum Number of Valid
Events for Each Event Condition").
Figure 7-64 Timer Result Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select a timer event condition or Run-Break in the Timer dialog box
Click the <View Always> button.
(or press Alt+V).
Explanation of each area
The Timer Result dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Execution time display area
(1)
Execution time display area
This area displays the result of measuring the execution time of the program (refer to "Execution time
316
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
display area").
Function buttons
Initialize
Clears the measurement results.
Copy
Copies the measurement result to the clipboard in text format.
Close
Closes this dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
317
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Delay Count dialog box
This dialog box is used to set or display delay count values.
By setting a delay count value, a trace can be executed the number of times specified by the delay count
value after the delay trigger event condition set in the Trace dialog box has been satisfied. The program
can be executed and the tracer can be stopped.
Figure 7-65 Delay Count Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Event ] -> [Delay Count...] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+N and Y in that order).
Explanation of each area
This dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Delay Count (delay count setting area)
(1)
Delay Count (delay count setting area)
This area is used to set or display a delay count value (unit: frames).
The settable range is 0 (default) to 32767.
318
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
OK
Sets the specified delay count and closes this dialog box.
Restore
Restores the previous delay count.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
319
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Reset Debugger dialog box
This dialog box is used to initialize the debugger, emulation CPU, and symbol information.
Specify what is to be initialized by using the check box. In the default condition, the debugger is
initialized.
Figure 7-66 Reset Debugger Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Explanation of each area
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [File] -> [Debugger Reset...] on the menu bar
(or press Alt+F, and R in that order).
Explanation of each area
The Reset Debugger dialog box consists of the following areas:
(1) Reset subject selection area
(1)
Reset subject selection area
This area is used to select what is to be initialized.
320
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Debugger
Initializes the debugger (default).
Symbol
Initializes the symbol information.
Target CPU
Initializes the emulation CPU.
Function buttons
OK
Initializes the debugger, symbol information, or CPU.
Cancel
Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box.
Help
Opens the Help window.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
321
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
About dialog box
This dialog box displays the version information of the debugger and in-circuit emulator (the year is
displayed in 4 digits).
The following version information is displayed:
• Product version of debugger
• Version of device file
• Version of GUI
• Version of debugger DLL
• Version of assembler DLL
• Version of executor
• Version of monitor
Figure 7-67 About Dialog Box
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
• Select [Help]->[About]
(or press Alt+H, and A in that order).
322
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
OK
Closes this dialog box.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
323
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Exit Debugger dialog box
This dialog box is used to select whether the current debug environment is saved to a project file or not
before terminating the debugger.
It can be specified in the Debugger Option dialog box that the debugger is terminated without this
confirmation dialog box being opened.
Figure 7-68 Exit Debugger Dialog Box
Reference If an attempt is made to terminate the debugger while the user program is being executed,
the following message is displayed and the program execution can be stopped.
<Yes> button is selected
Execution of the user program is stopped and then the Exit Debugger dialog box is displayed.
If it is specified in the Debugger Option dialog box that the Exit Debugger dialog box is not to
be displayed, however, the debugger is terminated.
<No> button is selected
Execution of the user program is not stopped and the Exit Debugger dialog box is not
displayed. The debugger is not terminated.
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
• Function buttons
Opening
This dialog box can be opened as follows:
324
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
• Select [File] -> [Exit] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+F, and X in that order).
• Press the Alt+F4 keys simultaneously.
• If forcible termination, such as to terminate the application, has been executed on the task list that
terminates Windows.
Function buttons
Yes
Saves the current debug environment to a project file, closes all the windows, and
terminates the debugger.
If a project file name is not specified, the Project File Save dialog box is opened. If
the < Cancel> button is selected on the Project File Save dialog box, the
environment is neither saved to a project file nor is the debugger terminated.
If a project file is loaded or saved during debugger operation, this button has the
default focus.
No
Closes all the windows and terminates the debugger.
If a project file is not loaded or saved during debugger operation, this button has the
default focus.
Cancel
Closes this dialog box without executing anything.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
325
CHAPTER 7 WINDOW REFERENCE
Console window
This window is used to input commands that control the debugger.
Because the key bind is Emacs-like, the accelerator key is not acknowledged if the Console window is
active.
However, the F1 key displays the help of the Console window.
While the Console window is open, an error message window with only an <OK> button is displayed in
the Console window.
Refer to "COMMAND REFERENCE" for details on the command specifications.
Figure 7-69 Console window
This section explains the following items:
• Opening
Opening
This window can be opened as follows:
• Select [Browse] -> [Console] from the menu bar
(or press Alt+B, and N in that order).
326
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
This section explains the command functions of the ID850 in detail.
8. 1
Command Line Rules
The specification of command lines has the following rules:
• Command name, option, and argument are specified for command line.
• To divide words, a space (space key or tab key) is used.
• At the end of a line, a line feed character or a semicolon is used.
• When a command name and an option are entered to the point of identifiability, they are recognized.
• In script, command names have to be entered completely.
Command format
command -options arg1 arg2 arg3 ...
8. 2
Command List
The list of ID850 commands is shown in Table 8-1 and Table 8-2 .
Table 8-1 List of Debugger Control Commands
Command Name
Function
address
Evaluation of address expression
Converts the address expression specified with expression into address.
assemble
Disassemble/line assemble (a)
Assembles the character strings specified with code from the address
specified with address.
batch
Executing batch (with echo)
Executes in batch displaying files specified with scriptname on the screen.
breakpoint
Setting/deletion of breakpoint (b)
Operates breakpoint specified with options and address.
cache
Setting of cache
Sets I cache and D cache.
dbgexit
Terminating debugger
Terminates the debugger.
download
Download of files (l)
Downloads files specified with filename according to options.
extwin
Creation of expansion window
Creates expansion window with scriptfile.
finish
Returning from function
Executes until it returns to the program that called the current function.
go
Continuous execution (g)
Executes program continuously.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
327
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
Table 8-1 List of Debugger Control Commands
Command Name
328
Function
help
Display of help
Displays help of Dcl.
hook
Setting of hook
Sets the procedure for hook with scriptfile.
ie
Display/setting of IE register
This command depends on the IE.
jump
Jump to window (j)
Displays the window specified with options.
map
Setting/deletion of memory mapping
Sets, deletes, and displays memory mapping.
mdi
Setting of expansion window
Sets the size and title name of the expansion window.
memory
Display/setting of memory (m)
Sets value in the memory of the address specified with address according to
options.
module
Display of the list of files and functions
Displays the list of files and functions of the load module specified with
progname.
next
Procedure step (n)
Executes the procedure steps.
refresh
Redrawing of window
Redraws the window and updates the data.
register
Display/setting of register value and I/O register value
Sets value in the register specified with regname.
reset
Reset
Resets CPU, debugger or symbols.
run
Reset and execution of CPU (r)
Resets program and executes it.
step
Step execution (s)
Executes step execution.
stop
Stop execution
Stops the program forcibly.
upload
Upload
Saves the memory data or coverage data within the specified range in a file.
version
Display of the version information
Displays the version information of the debugger.
watch
Display/setting of variables (w)
Displays and sets the variables.
where
Trace of stack
Executes the back-trace of the stack.
wish
Start of Tclet
Starts the script using Tk (Tclet).
xcoverage
Operation of coverage
Operates coverage.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
Table 8-1 List of Debugger Control Commands
Command Name
Function
xtime
Operation of timer
Operates timer.
xtrace
Operation of tracer
Operates tracer.
Table 8-2 List of Console/Tcl Commands
Command Name
Function
alias
Creation of another name
cd
Change of directory
clear
Clears the screen
echo
Echo
exit
Close/end
history
Display of history
ls
Display of files
pwd
Check of the directory
source
Execution of batch
time
Measurement of time for commands
tkcon
Console control
unalias
Deletion of another name
which
Display of the command path or another name
Other commands
Based on Tcl/Tk 8.1
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
329
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
8. 3
List of Variables
• dcl(chip) - Chip name read only
• dcl(prjfile) - Project file name read only
• dcl(srcpath) - Source path read only
• dcl(ieid) - IE type read only
• dcl(iestat) - IE status read only
• dcl(bkstat) - Break status read only
• env(LANG) - Language
• dcl_version - Dcl version read only
8. 4
List of Packages
• tcltest - Restoration test
• cwind - Automatic window control
• BWidget - Toolkit
8. 5
Key Bind
• tcsh + emacs like
• Complement of command name [Tab]
• Complement of file name [Tab]
• HTML help [F1]
8. 6
Expansion window
The expansion windows can be created using Tk.
In the expansion windows, Widget is allocated with '.dcl' as a root instead of '.'.
When the following script files are allocated in bin/idtcl/tools/, an expansion window is added on selecting
[Browse] -> [Others] from the menu bar.
The mdi command, an exclusive command for expansion windows, has been added.
# Sample.tcl
wm protocol .dcl WM_DELETE_WINDOW { exit }
mdi geometry 100 50
button .dcl.b -text Push -command exit
pack .dcl.b
In expansion windows, Tk menu commands cannot be used because of the restrictions of MDI windows.
8. 7
Callback Procedure
Expansion windows can hold dcl_asyncproc procedures called by asynchronous messages.
330
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
proc dcl_asyncproc {mid} {
if {$mid == 19} {
redraw
}
}
The asynchronous message ID is passed for the argument of the dcl_asyncproc procedure.
The message IDs are shown below:
Table 8-3 Message ID
Message ID
8. 8
Meaning
9
After changing configuration
10
After registering event
11
After deleting event
12
Before executing
13
After breaking
14
After resetting CPU
15
After resetting debugger
17
After changing extended option
18
After changing debugger option
19
After downloading
20
After changing memory or register
36
Before starting tracer
37
After stopping tracer
38
Before starting coverage
39
After stopping coverage
40
Before starting timer
41
After stopping timer
42
After clearing trace
45
After resetting symbol
Hook Procedure
A hook can be set in the debugger using the hook procedure.
The hook procedures are shown below:
BeforeDownload
Hook before downloading
AfterCpuReset
Hook after resetting CPU
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
331
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
BeforeCpuRun
Hook before starting execution
AfterCpuStop
Hook after breaking
By using hook procedures, register values can be changed before downloading programs or after
resetting the CPU.
An actual example of the procedure is shown below. A hook is valid till the debugger is closed.
[When hook is set with debugger control command]
1
Create script file a. with an editor.
2
Start up the ID850, select [Browse] menu -> [Console], and open the Console window.
3
If the script file is executed in the window as below, the hook in the script file is set.
%hook test.tcl
[When hook is set on downloading of project file]
1
Create script file a. with an editor.
Caution Be sure that the script file name is the same as the project file.
Example:
The script file corresponding to test.prj is test.tcl.
Allocate test.prj, test.pri, and test.tcl in the same directory.
2
Start up the ID850 and read test.prj.
The hook in the script file is set.
An example of the contents of a script file is shown as below (using the ICE for the V850E/MS1).
proc BeforeDownload {} {
register MM 0x7
register PMC8 0xff
register PMC9 0xff
register PMCX 0xe0
}
proc AfterCpuReset {} {
register MM 0x7
register PMC8 0xff
register PMC9 0xff
register PMCX 0xe0
}
332
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
8. 9
Related Files
• Executes when the aliases.tcl console is opened.
Sets the default alias etc.
• Executes when the project file name.tcl project is opened.
The hook of BeforeDownload, AfterCpuReset, BeforeCpuRun and AfterCpuStop can be used.
• Executes when the load module name.tcl load module is downloaded.
The hook of BeforeDownload, AfterCpuReset, BeforeCpuRun and AfterCpuStop can be used.
8. 10
Cautions
• The separator for file and path is a slash (/).
• When a console or an expansion window is active, the accelerator key cannot be acknowledged.
• When a console is open, error messages are output to the console.
• When the [F1] key on the console is pressed, the HTML format help is opened (not opened from the
menu).
• To terminate the command forcibly, close the console.
• The execution of external commands (DOS commands) is OFF by default.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
333
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
8. 11
Commands
In this section, each command is explained using the format shown below.
Command name
Gives a brief explanation of the function of the command.
Name
Describes the command name.
Input format
Describes the input format of the command.
Functions
Explains the functions of the command.
Usage example
Shows an example of the usage of the command.
334
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
address
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
address - Evaluation of address expression
Input format
address expression
Functions
Converts the address expression specified by expression into address.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % address main
0xaa
(IDCON) 2 % address main+1
0xab
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
335
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
assemble
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
assemble - Disassemble/line assemble
Input format
assemble ?options? address ?code?
Functions
Assembles the character strings specified by code from the address specified by address.
When '.' is specified for address, it is understood as an address continuing from the immediately previous
assemble.
When code is omitted, it is assembled from the address specified by address.
The followings are options. They are ignored for assembly.
-code
Command code is also displayed. It is ignored for assembly.
-number number
number line is displayed. It is ignored for assembly.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % assemble -n 5 main
0x000000aa B7
PUSH HL
0x000000ab B1
PUSH AX
0x000000ac 891C
MOVW AX,SP
0x000000ae D6
MOVW HL,AX
0x000000af A100
MOV A,#0H
(IDCON) 2 % assemble main mov a,b
(IDCON) 3 % assemble . mov a,b
336
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
batch
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
batch - Executing batch (with echo)
Input format
batch scriptname
Functions
Executes in batch with displaying files specified by scriptname on the screen.
Nesting is possible.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % clear
(IDCON) 2 % batch bat_file.tcl
(IDCON) 3 % tkcon save a:/log.txt
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
337
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
breakpoint
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
breakpoint - Setting/deletion of breakpoint
Input format
breakpoint ?options? ?address1? ?address2?
breakpoint -delete brkno
breakpoint -enable brkno
breakpoint -disable brkno
breakpoint -information
Functions
Operates the breakpoint specified by options and address.
If a breakpoint can be set correctly, the breakpoint number is returned.
The following are options:
338
-software
A software break is specified.
-hardware
A hardware break is specified (default).
-execute
The address execution break is set (default).
-beforeexecute
The break before address execution is set.
-read
An address data read break is set.
-write
An address data write break is set.
-access
An address data access break is set.
-size size
The access size is set (8, 16, or 32).
-data value
The data condition is set.
-datamask value
The data mask is set.
-extprobe value
The external sense data condition is set.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
-extprobemask value
The external sense data mask is set.
-passvalue
The path count is set.
-information
The list of breakpoints is displayed.
-delete
The breakpoint whose number is specified is deleted.
-disable
The breakpoint whose number is specified is disabled.
-enable
The breakpoint whose number is specified is enabled.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % breakpoint main
1
(IDCON) 2 % breakpoint -i
1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17
(IDCON) 3 % breakpoint -software sub
2
(IDCON) 4 % breakpoint -i
1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17
2 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#8
(IDCON) 5 % breakpoint -disable 2
(IDCON) 6 % breakpoint -i
1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17
2 Brk00001 disable rammon.c#8
(IDCON) 7 % breakpoint -delete 1
2 Brk00001 disable rammon.c#8
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
339
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
cache
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
cache - Setting of cache
Input format
cache
cache config ?-icache itype? ?-dcache dtype?
cache clear ?-icache bool? ?-dcache bool?
Functions
When config is specified for the subcommand, the cache type is set.
When clear is specified for the subcommand, whether cache clear is to be done by EXEC, or not, is set
(default is clear)
When subcommand or below is omitted, the current status is displayed.
itype is selected from the following:
NB85E212
NB85E212 is used.
NB85E213
NB85E213 is used.
nouse
Not used (default).
dtype is selected from the following:
340
NB85E252
NB85E255 is used.
NB85E263
NB85E263 is used.
nouse
Not used (default).
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % cache config -i NB85E212 -d NB85E252
(IDCON) 2 % cache
i-cache: NB85E212
d-cache: NB85E252
(IDCON) 3 % cache clear -i false
(IDCON) 4 % cache
i-cache: NB85E212 (persist)
d-cache: nouse
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
341
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
dbgexit
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
dbgexit - Terminating debugger
Input format
dbgexit ?options?
Functions
Terminates the debugger.
The following are options:
-saveprj
Project is saved on terminating debugger.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % dbgexit -saveprj
342
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
download
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
download - Download of files
Input format
download ?options? filename ?offset?
Functions
Downloads file specified by filename according to options.
If offset is specified, the address is shifted by the offset (if the data is in binary format, the load start
address is specified for offset).
-binary
Binary format data is downloaded.
-coverage
Coverage data is downloaded.
-append
Additional download is executed.
-nosymbol
Download is executed. Symbol information is not read.
-reset
CPU is reset after download.
-information
Download information is displayed.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % download test.lmf
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
343
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
extwin
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
extwin - Creation of expansion window
Input format
extwin scriptfile
Functions
Creates expansion window with scriptfile.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % extwin d:/foo.tcl
344
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
finish
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
finish - Returning from function
Input format
finish
Functions
Executes until it returns to the program that called the current function.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % finish
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
345
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
go
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
go - continuous execution
Input format
go ?options?
Functions
Executes the program continuously. When -waitbreak is specified, it waits for the program to stop.
The following are options:
-ignorebreak
Breakpoint is ignored.
-waitbreak
The command waits for the program to stop.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % go -w
346
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
help
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
help - Display of help
Input format
help
Functions
Displays Dcl help.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % help
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
347
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
hook
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
hook - Setting of hook
Input format
hook scriptfile
Functions
Sets the procedure for hook with scriptfile.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % hook d:/foo.tcl
348
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
ie
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
ie - Display/setting of IE register
Input format
ie reg address ?value?
ie dcu address ?value?
Functions
The ie command depends on the IE.
When reg is specified for the subcommand, referencing and setting of the IE register is executed.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % ie reg 0x100 1
(IDCON) 2 % ie dcu 0x100 1
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
349
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
jump
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
jump - Jump to window
Input format
jump -source -line filename ?line?
jump ?options? address
Functions
Displays the window specified by options.
-source
The Source window is displayed from the address specified by address.
-assemble
The Assemble window is displayed from the address specified by
address.
-memory
The Memory window is displayed from the address specified by
address.
-coverage
The Coverage window is displayed from the address specified by
address.
-line
The command is moved to the line specified by ine.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % jump -s main
(IDCON) 2 % jump -s -l mainfile.c 10
(IDCON) 3 % jump -m array
350
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
map
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
map - Setting/deletion of memory mapping
Input format
map options address1 address2 ?accsize?
Functions
Sets, deletes, and displays memory mapping.
The access size of 8, 16, or 32 is specified by accsize (the default is 8).
The following are options:
-erom
Alternate ROM is mapped.
-eram
Alternate RAM is mapped.
-target
Target area is mapped.
-protect
I/O protect area is mapped.
-rrm
The starting address in the real-time RAM monitor area is set (only for
V850).
-clear
All the settings for the mapping are deleted.
-information
Refer to the setting for the mapping.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % map -i
1: 0 0x7fff 8 {IROM}
2: 0x8000 0x87ff 8 {Target RRM}
3: 0x8800 0x9fff 8 {Target}
4: 0xa000 0xf7ff 8 {NonMap}
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
351
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
5: 0xf800 0xfaff - {NonMap}
6: 0xfb00 0xfedf 8 {Saddr}
7: 0xfee0 0xfeff 8 {Register}
8: 0xff00 0xffff 8 {SFR}
(IDCON) 2 % map -erom 0x100000 0x10ffff
(IDCON) 3 % map -c
352
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
mdi
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
mdi - Setting of expansion window
Input format
mdi geometry ?x y? width height
mdi title string
Functions
Sets the size and title name of the expansion window.
The command can be used only from the expansion window.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % mdi geometry 0 0 100 100
(IDCON) 2 % mdi title foo
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
353
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
memory
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
memory - Display/setting of memory
Input format
memory ?options? address ?value?
memory ?options? -fill address1 address2 value
memory ?options? -copy address1 address2 address3
Functions
Sets value in the memory of the address specified by address according to options.
If value is omitted, display the value of the memory of the address specified by address.
If -fill is specified, value is filled from address1 to address2.
If -copy is specified, data from address1 to address2 is copied to address3.
The following are options:
-byte
Displayed/set in one-byte units (default).
-halfword
Displayed/set in halfword units.
-word
Displayed/set in word units.
-fill
The data is filled in.
-copy
The data is copied.
-noverify
Verification is not executed on writing.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % memory 100
0x10
354
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
(IDCON) 2 % memory 100 2
(IDCON) 3 % memory 100
0x02
(IDCON) 4 % memory -fill 0 1ff 0
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
355
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
module
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
module - Display of the list of files and functions
Input format
module progname ?filename?
Functions
Displays the list of files and functions of the load module specified by progname.
If filename is not specified, the list of files is displayed.
If filename is specified, the list of functions of the specified files is displayed.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % module rammon.lmf
1: rammon.c
(IDCON) 2 % module rammon.lmf rammon.c
1: rammon.c sub1
2: rammon.c main
356
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
next
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
next - Procedure step
Input format
next ?options?
Functions
Executes the procedure steps. If functions are called, the step stops after executing function.
The following are options:
-source
Command is executed in source line units (default).
-instruction
Command is executed in command units.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % next -i
(IDCON) 2 % next -s
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
357
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
refresh
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
refresh - Redrawing of window
Input format
refresh
Functions
Redraws the window and updates the data.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % batch foo.tcl
(IDCON) 2 % refresh
358
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
register
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
register - Display/setting of register value and I/O register value
Input format
register ?options? regname ?value?
Functions
Sets value in the register specified with regname.
If value is omitted, displays the value of the register specified by regname.
The following are options:
-force
Compulsory reading is executed.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % register pc
0x100
(IDCON) 2 % register pc 200
(IDCON) 3 % register pc
0x200
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
359
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
reset
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
reset - Reset
Input format
reset ?options?
Functions
Resets the CPU, debugger or symbols.
If options are omitted, the CPU is reset.
The following are options:
-cpu
CPU is reset (default).
-debugger
Debugger is reset.
-symbol
Symbol is reset.
-event
Event is reset.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % reset
360
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
run
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
run - Reset and execution of CPU
Input format
run ?options?
Functions
Resets the program and executes it.
If -waitbreak is not specified, the command does not wait until the program stops.
The following are options:
-waitbreak
The command waits for the program to stop.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % run
(IDCON) 2 % run -w
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
361
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
step
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
step - Step execution
Input format
step ?options?
Functions
Executes step execution.
If functions are called, the command stops at the head of the functions.
The following are options:
-source
The command is executed in source line units (default).
-instruction
The command is executed in command units.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % step -i
(IDCON) 2 % step -s
362
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
stop
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
stop - Stop executing
Input format
stop
Functions
Stops the program forcibly.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % run
(IDCON) 2 % stop
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
363
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
upload
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
upload - Upload
Input format
upload ?options? filename address1 address2
Functions
Saves the memory data or coverage data within the specified range in a file.
The following are options:
-binary
The data is saved in binary format.
-coverage
The coverage data is saved.
-intel
The data is saved in Intel HEX format (default).
-motorola
The data is saved in Motorola HEX format.
-tektronix
The data is saved in Tektronix HEX format.
-force
The file is overwritten.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % upload -b foo.hex 0 0xffff
(IDCON) 2 % upload -c -f foo.cov 0 0xffff
364
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
version
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
version - Display of the version information
Input format
version
Functions
Displays the version information of the debugger.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % version
GUI
: E2.00y [31-May-99]
Devicefile
: 78K0[uPD780034] E1.01a
Debugger
: 78K/0 Debugger E2.50c [02-Apr-99]
Executer
: 78K/0 Executer E1.3c
Packet translator : 78K/0 Packet E2.00w
Assembler
: 78K/0 Asm/Disasm E1.15a [01-Apr-99]
Tcl/Tk
: 8.1.1
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
365
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
watch
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
watch - Display/setting of variables
Input format
watch ?options? variable ?value?
Functions
Displays and sets the variables.
The following are options:
-binary
The value is displayed in binary digits.
-octal
The value is displayed in octal digits.
-decimal
The value is displayed in decimal digits.
-hexdecimal
The value is displayed in hexdecimal digits.
-string
The value is displayed in character strings.
-sizeof
The size, instead of the value, of variables is displayed in decimal digits.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % watch var
0x10
(IDCON) 2 % watch -d var
16
(IDCON) 3 % watch array\[0\] 0xa
366
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
where
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
where - Trace of stack
Input format
where
Functions
Executes the back-trace of the stack.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % where
1: test2.c#sub2(int i)#13
2: test.c#num(int i)#71
3: test.c#main()#82
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
367
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
wish
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
wish - Startup of Tclet
Input format
wish scriptname
Functions
Starts up the script using Tk (Tclet).
The expansion window can be created with Tclet.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % wish test.tcl
368
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
xcoverage
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
xcoverage - Operation of coverage
Input format
xcoverage option
Functions
Operates coverage.
The following are options:
-start
The coverage starts on executing the program.
-stop
The coverage stops on executing the program.
-clear
The coverage memory is cleared.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % xcoverage -start
(IDCON) 2 % xcoverage -stop
(IDCON) 3 % xcoverage -clear
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
369
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
xtime
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
xtime - Operation of timer
Input format
xtime option
Functions
Operates timer.
The following are options:
-start
Timer starts on executing the program.
-stop
Timer stops on executing the program.
-gobreak
Time from Go to Break is displayed with clock.
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % xtime -start
(IDCON) 2 % xtime -stop
370
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
xtrace
The following items are explained here.
• Name
• Input format
• Functions
• Usage example
Name
xtrace - Operation of tracer
Input format
xtrace -dump ?-append? frameno ?filename?
xtrace -start
xtrace -stop
xtrace -clear
xtrace -addup bool
xtrace -mode mode
Functions
Operates tracer.
The following are options:
-start
The tracer starts on executing the program.
-stop
The tracer stops on executing the program.
-clear
The trace data is dumped (default).
-dump
The dump result is redirected to the console window.
If the file name is specified, the dump result is written in the file.
-append
The dump result is added to a file.
-addup bool
Whether the time tag is integrated or not is selected.
-mode mode
The trace control mode (any one of: all, cond, nonstop, fullstop,
fullbreak, delaystop, delaybreak, machine, or event) is selected.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
371
CHAPTER 8 COMMAND REFERENCE
Usage example
(IDCON) 1 % xtrace -start
(IDCON) 2 % xtrace -stop
(IDCON) 3 % xtrace -dump 3
_01685 2 000000BC M1 br _sub2+0x2
_01686 4 0000009A BRM1 st.w r6, 0x8[sp]
_01687 3 0000009E BRM1 st.w r0, 0x0[sp]
(IDCON) 4 % xtrace -clear
(IDCON) 5 % xtrace -addup true
372
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX A INPUT CONVENTIONS
APPENDIX A INPUT CONVENTIONS
This appendix explains the input conventions of the following items:
• Character set
• Symbols
• Numeric Values
• Expressions and Operators
A. 1
Character set
The characters listed in Table A-1 can be used as the character set.
The characters listed in Table A-2 can be used as special characters.
Specify a line number as an integer constant, starting from 1.
Table A-1 Usable Character Set
Classification
Character
Alphabetic
characters
Uppercase characters: A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V X W Z
Lowercase characters: a b c d e f g h I j k l m n o p q r s t u v x w z
Numerals
0123456789
Character
equivalent to
alphabetic
character
@_
Table A-2 List of Special Characters
Character
Name
Usage
(
Left parenthesis
Changes operation order.
)
Right parenthesis
Changes operation order.
+
Plus
Addition operator or positive sign
-
Minus
Subtraction operator or negative sign
*
Asterisk
Multiplication operator or indirect reference operator
/
Slash
Division operator
%
Percent
Remainder operator
~
Tilde
Complement operator
|
Vertical line
Bit sum operator
^
Circumflex
Bit difference operator
&
Ampersand
Bit product operator or address operator
[
Left bracket
Array subscript operator or base register specification symbol
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
373
APPENDIX A INPUT CONVENTIONS
Table A-2 List of Special Characters
Character
A. 2
Name
Usage
]
Right bracket
Array subscript operator or base register specification symbol
.
Period
Direct member operator or bit position specifier
,
Comma
Delimiter between operands
Symbols
The following rules apply to symbols:
1
A symbol consists of characters A to Z, a to z, @, _ (underbar), . (period), and 0 to 9.
2
A symbol must start with a character other than numerals 0 to 9.
3
Uppercase characters (A to Z) and lowercase characters (a to z) are distinguished.
4
A symbol must be no more than 256 characters long (if a symbol of more than 265 characters is
defined, only the first 256 characters are valid).
5
A symbol is defined by loading a load module file.
6
Symbols are classified into the following types by the valid range:
- Global symbol (assembly language, C language)
- Static symbol (C language)
In-file static symbol
In-function static symbol
- Local symbol (C language)
In-file local symbol
In-function local symbol
In-block local symbol
7
The following symbols are available for each language used:
- Assembly language
Label name
- C language
Variable name (including pointer function name, enumeration type variable name, array name,
structure name, and union name)
Function name, label name
Array element, structure element, union element, bit field (if the symbol is an array, structure, or
union)
8
A symbol can be described instead of an address or numeric value.
9
The valid range of a symbol is determined based on the source debug information when the source
file is assembled or compiled.
10 Describe only the symbol name of a global symbol.
11 A local symbol is expressed in pairs with a file name.
374
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX A INPUT CONVENTIONS
A. 3
Numeric Values
The following four types of numeric values can be used. The input format of each type is as shown
below.
The suffix (bold) and the alphabetic characters of hexadecimal numbers may be uppercase or lowercase
characters. If the first character is A to F, 0 must be prefixed to it.
In the input field of the debugger, decimal numbers or hexadecimal numbers are alternately selected,
depending on the default radix.
Table A-3 Input Format of Numeric Values
numeric value
A. 4
Input format
Binary number
nY
n...nY (n=0,1)
Octal number
nO
n...nO (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7)
nQ
n...nQ (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7)
Decimal number
n
n...n
nT
n...nT (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9)
Hexadecimal numbers
n
n...n
nH
n...nH
0xn
0xn...n (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F)
Expressions and Operators
Expressions
An expression consists of constants, register names, IOR names, and symbols coupled by operators.
If an IOR name, label name, function name, or variable name is described as a symbol, an address is
calculated as the value of the symbol.
The elements making up an expression, except operators, are called terms (constants and labels).
Terms are called the first term, the second term, and so on, starting from the left.
Operators
The following operators of the C language can be used:
Table A-4 List of Operators
Symbol
Meaning
Explanation
Operators
+
Addition
Returns the sum of the first and second terms.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
375
APPENDIX A INPUT CONVENTIONS
Table A-4 List of Operators
Symbol
Meaning
Explanation
-
Subtraction
Returns the difference between the first and second terms..
*
Multiplication
Returns the product of the first and second terms.
/
Division
Divides the value of the first term by the value of the
second term, and returns the integer of the result.
MOD
%
Remainder
Divides the value of the first term by the value of the
second term, and returns the remainder of the result.
- sign
Unary operator
(negative)
Returns 2's complement of the value of the term.
+ sign
Unary operator
(positive)
Returns the value of the term.
Logical operator
NOT
~
Negation
Logically negates each bit of the term, and returns the
result.
AND
&
Logical product
Obtains the logical product of the values of the first and
second terms on each bit, and returns the result.
OR
|
Logical sum
Obtains the logical sum of the values of the first and
second terms on each bit, and returns the result.
XOR
^
Exclusive logical
sum
Obtains the exclusive logical sum of the values of the first
and second terms on each bit, and returns the result.
SHR
>>
Right shift
Shifts the value of the first term by the value (number of
bits) of the second term to the right, and returns the result.
As many 0s as the number of shifted bits are inserted in the
higher bits.
SHL
<<
Left shift
Shifts the value of the first term by the value (number of
bits) of the second term to the left, and returns the result.
As many 0s as the number of shifted bits are inserted in the
lower bits.
Shift operator
Byte separation operator
HIGH
Higher byte
Of the lowest 16 bits of the term, returns the higher 8 bits.
LOW
Lower byte
Of the lowest 16 bits of the term, returns the lower 8 bits.
Word separation operator
HIGHW
Higher word
Of the 32 bits of the term, returns the higher 16 bits.
LOWW
Lower word
Of the 32 bits of the term, returns the lower 16 bits.
(
Left parenthesis
)
Right parenthesis
Performs the operation in ( ) before the operation outside (
).
'(' and ')' are always used in pairs.
Other
Rules of operation
Operations are performed according to the priority of the operators.
376
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX A INPUT CONVENTIONS
Table A-5 Operator Priority
Priority
1
Higher
Operators
(, )
2
+ sign, - sign, NOT, , HIGH, LOW, HIGHW, LOWW
3
*, /,, MOD, %, SHR, >>, SHL, <<
4
+, -
5
AND, &
6
Lower
OR, |, XOR, ^
• If the priorities of the operators are the same, the operation is performed from the left toward the
right.
• Performs the operation in ( ) before the operation outside ( ).
• Each term in an operation is treated as unsigned 32-bit data.
• All operation results are treated as unsigned 32-bit data.
• If an overflow occurs during operation, the lower 32 bits are valid, and the overflow is not detected.
Terms
To describe a constant for a term, the following numeric values can be described.
Table A-6 Range of Radixes
Radix
Range
Binary number
0Y <= value <= 1111111111111111111111111111111Y (32 digits)
Octal number
0O <= value <= 37777777777O
Decimal number
-2147483648 <= value <= 4294967295
(A negative decimal number is internally converted into a 2's
complement.)
Hexadecimal numbers
0H <= value <= 0FFFFFFFH
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
377
APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY
APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY
The major terms used throughout this manual are as follows:
• Current window
• Delimiter (separator)
• Program
• File
• Function
• Structure
• Stack frame number
• Line
B. 1
Terminology
Current window
The current window is the window you are now in and operating by means of key input and menu
selection.
Delimiter (separator)
The following separators can be used as the delimiter of file names, function names, variable names,
and line numbers.
Table B-1 Delimiter
Delimiter
Meaning
#
Used as a separator of file names, variable names, function names, and line
numbers.
$
Used as a separator of load module names, file names, variable names, and
function names.
Program
A program is the execution unit to be debugged. The debugger manages each one of the load module
files specified on downloading as a program.
To specify a program name, use a load module file name on downloading.
Current program
The current program is the program that contains the instruction currently breaking execution
(instruction indicated by the PC).
When specifying a file in the current program, the program name may be omitted.
File
Up to 127 characters can be handled in a file name with path.
Depending on the type of file, however, a file name of more than 127 characters can be specified.
378
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY
Current file
The current file is the source file that contains the instruction currently breaking execution (instruction
indicated by the program counter (PC)).
When specifying a line or function in the current file, the file name may be omitted.
Function
Indicates the functions constituting a C source program.
Current function
The current function is the function that contains the instruction currently breaking execution
(instruction indicated by the program counter (PC)).
When accessing a local variable in the current function, specifying the function name may be omitted.
Structure
Structures and unions in C language are called structures.
The name structure is used if a structure or union variable is used without members explicitly specified.
Stack frame number
The stack frame number is a decimal integer starting from 1 and is assigned to the stack contents.
The shallower the nesting level of the stack, the higher the number. A function having a stack number
one less than that of a certain function is the function that calls the certain function.
Line
A line is specified in order to identify one line in the source file.
Specify a line number as an integer constant, starting from 1.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
379
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
This appendix explains messages displayed in the Error/Warning dialog box of the debugger.
C.1
Error/Warning Messages from
C. 1. 1
Display format of
Messages are generated and output to the Error/Warning dialog box when "information that should be
informed to users (fatal error, syntax error, and warning or questions)" is detected while the debugger is
executing processing.
The product name is displayed on the title bar of the dialog box.
Figure C-1 Error/Warning Messages
There are three types of messages in the debugger (fatal error message, syntax error message, and
warning message or question message).
A
: Fatal error messages
When a fatal error is detected in the debugger, a message is output to the Error dialog box
before aborting the processing and terminating the debugger.
F
: Syntax error messages
When a syntax error is detected in the debugger, a message is output to the Error dialog box
before aborting the processing. At this time, opened windows and dialog boxes are closed.
W
: Warning message or question message
When a warning or question is detected in the debugger, a message is output to the Warning
dialog box before aborting the processing.
C. 1. 2
Fatal error messages
A list of the messages that are output when fatal errors are detected while the debugger is executing
processing is shown below in numerical order.
380
A0101:
Can not find initialization file (expc.ini).
A0102:
Host name not found.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
A0105:
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file.
A0106:
1)
Failed in reading device file (d3xxx.800).
Illegal data received.
Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board and
restart the debugger.
A01a0:
No response from the evachip. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET, WAIT,
HLDRQ and so on.
1)
Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board and
restart the debugger.
A01a1:
Failed in reading ie703000.ie.
A01a2:
Break board is not connected.
A01a3:
Emulation board is not connected.
A01a4:
Board configuration of ICE is not consistent.
A01a5:
POD/EM1 board is not connected.
A01a6:
Executor is running.
A01a8:
Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini).
A04a1:
Not enough memory for emulation.
A0600:
Not enough memory for buffer.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
A1000:
Failed in initializing ICE.
A1001:
No entry exists for specified number.
A1002:
Can not relocate internal RAM.
A1005:
Illegal relocation address.
A1007:
Not enough memory on ICE.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
381
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
A1008:
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
A1009:
Already initialized.
A100a:
Not initialized.
A1015:
Programmable-IOR does not exist.
A10ff:
Can not communicate with ICE.
A1dbe:
Error occurred inside debugger.
A2001:
Illegal address.
A2009:
Device file is damaged or error is in file.
A200b:
Can not copy.
A200c:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
A20ff:
Can not communicate with ICE.
A2222:
Illegal condition.
A3012:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
A30ff:
Can not communicate with ICE.
A4011:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
A4018:
1)
Not enough memory.
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
A5000:
Illegal device file type.
A5001:
Not enough memory.
1)
382
Not enough memory for tables.
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
A5002:
Can not open device file.
A5003:
Reading of device file went wrong.
A5004:
Can not close device file.
A5005:
Illegal device file format.
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file.
A5006:
Failed in initializing ICE.
A5007:
Device file has broken or error is in a file.
A500c:
Failed in reading expc.ini.
A500d:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
A5300:
Illegal device file type.
A5301:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
A5302:
1)
Can not open database file.
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger and device file.
A5303:
Reading of database file went wrong.
A5304:
Can not close database file.
A5305:
Illegal database file format.
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger or simulator, and device file.
A5306:
Database information has been already initialized.
A5307:
Database information does not exist.
A7012:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
383
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
A70fe:
1)
CPU is in the bus-hold status. Reset the debugger.
A70ff:
Can not communicate with ICE.
A7f03:
Failed in canceling RUN/STEP.
A9000:
Specified register symbol does not exist.
A9001:
Specified register symbol ID does not exist.
A9003:
Illegal condition.
A9004:
Too large register size.
Aa005:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
Aa00b:
Can not close file.
Aa00c:
Failed in reading file.
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Aa010:
Can not communicate with ICE.
Aa013:
Reading of file went wrong.
Ab009:
Not enough memory.
1)
384
Bus hold error.
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
Ab00d:
Current function does not exist.
Ab00e:
Current line does not exist.
Ab00f:
Tag not found.
Ab010:
Failed in loading symbol table.
Ab011:
Illegal line number.
Ab015:
Reading of file went wrong.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Ab016:
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Ab017:
1)
Can not open file.
Failed in writing file.
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Ab019:
Reading of file went wrong.
Ab01a:
Can not close file.
Ab01c:
Too many entries of the task kind .
Ab023:
Current stack frame is not active.
Ab024:
Different section.
Ab02a:
Can not communicate with ICE.
Ab030:
Monitor timed out.
1)
Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board and
restart the debugger.
Ab031:
Already set in memory.
Ab032:
Out of scope.
Ab033:
LP is not stored.
Ab039:
Failed in loading debug information.
Ab03a:
No more section information.
Ab041:
Specified file is not load module.
Ac002:
Can not close file.
Ac003:
Reading of file went wrong.
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
385
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Ac004:
Reading of file went wrong.
Ac009:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
Ac010:
Can not communicate with ICE.
Ad000:
Error occurred inside debugger.
Ad001:
Not enough memory.
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
Ad002:
Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini).
Ad003:
ICE is not connected.
Ae008:
Not enough memory
1)
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
Af000:
1)
C. 1. 3
Not enough memory.
There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
Syntax error messages
A list of the messages that are output when syntax errors are detected while the debugger is executing
processing is shown below in numerical order.
F0002:
This feature is not supported.
F0100:
Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC
interface board.
F0103:
Data transfer to ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface
cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board.
F0104:
Data receive from ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the
interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board.
F0200:
386
No mapped address was accessed.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
1)
External memory could not be accessed, as it is not set. Change the register values necessary for
accessing the external memory using the IOR window or Hook Procedure before download (Refer to
"Changing the register values necessary for accessing the external memory").
F02a0:
1)
Bus hold error.
CPU is in the bus-hold status. Reset the debugger.
F02a2:
Can not compulsory break.
F02d2:
Not enough memory for trace-buffer.
F0300:
User program is running.
F0301:
User program is being breaked.
F0302:
User program is being traced.
F0303:
Not traced.
F0304:
Trace memory is not set.
F0306:
No trace block exists.
F0307:
No event condition exists.
F0308:
No timer measurement is done.
F0309:
No trigger frame exists.
F030a:
Tracer is being stopped.
F030b:
Specified snap-event has not been registered.
F030c:
Specified stub-event has not been registered.
F030d:
Timer is running.
F030e:
Memory copy area is overlapped.
F030f:
Trace has been already set.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
387
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
F0310:
Event condition is not set.
F0311:
Too many valid timer event conditions.
F0312:
Specified timer event is not set.
F0313:
illegal map range.
1)
Check the setting in "Memory Mapping (mapping setting area)" in the Configuration dialog box.
When mapping to external memory has been performed, change the register values necessary for
accessing the external memory using the IOR window or Hook Procedure before download (Refer to
"Changing the register values necessary for accessing the external memory").
F0315:
Delay trigger cannot set with trace full mode.
F03a1:
Step execution is being done.
F03a2:
Timer and Tracer are running.
F03d0:
Back-trace is being executed.
F03d1:
Back-trace is being stopped.
F03d2:
Back-trace execution point overrun oldest frame.
F03d3:
Register status or Memory status cannot be set up other than Phase1 of event link.
F03d4:
No back-trace information exists.
F03d5:
Last command can not be backstepped.
F0400:
Illegal condition.
1)
Settings of the used in-circuit emulator and those of the Configuration dialog box may not match.
Check the Chip selection of "Chip (Emulation CPU selection area)".
388
F0401:
Result of timer measurement overflowed.
F0402:
Too many event conditions with path count.
F0403:
Too many address range conditions.
F0404:
Too many simultaneously-usable-event conditions.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
F0405:
Too many snap-events.
F0406:
Too many stub-events.
F0407:
Too many initialization data.
F0408:
Too large search data (> 16 byte).
F0409:
Too large search data (> search range).
F040a:
Too many Linking-event conditions.
F04a0:
Too many software breaks (> 100).
F04a2:
Too many partition of bus size.
F04a3:
Too many execution-event conditions.
F04a4:
Too many bus-event conditions.
F0b61:
Section Trace event conditions overflow.
F0c00:
Monitor file read error.
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger.
F0c20:
Guarded area can not be accessed.
F0c40:
Status of effective event conditions cannot be changed.
F0c41:
Coverage test is being executed.
F0c60:
Event before execution cannot be set up other than break conditions.
F0c61:
Can not register event numbers which can not be used for hardware break.
F0c62:
Event numbers reserved for hardware breaks can not be used.
F0ca0:
Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface
cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
389
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
F0ca1:
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger.
F1003:
Illegal relocation address.
F1004:
Illegal condition
F1006:
Illegal address.
F100b:
User program is running.
F100c:
Different bus size has been already specified.
F100d:
Too large bus size.
F100e:
Too large bus partition size.
F100f:
Target is not turned on.
F1010:
Illegal map range.
F1011:
Failed in setting internal ROM and RAM.
F1012:
This feature is not supported.
F1013:
No terminal name.
F1016:
Programmable-IOR does not movable.
1)
390
Monitor file not found.
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the latest device file.
F2000:
Illegal I/O register name.
F2002:
User program is running.
F2003:
Illegal I/O register number.
F2004:
Illegal bit number.
F2006:
Hidden I/O register was specified.
F2007:
I/O register of ban read/write was specified.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
F2008:
I/O register not existing was specified.
F200a:
Illegal value specified for I/O register.
F3000:
No mapped address was accessed.
1)
The allocation addresses of the program and the addresses of the debugger may not match.
Set the mapping to the external memory in "Memory Mapping (mapping setting area)" in the
Configuration dialog box according to the allocation addresses specified in the link directive file on
compilation. When mapping to external memory has been executed, change the register values
necessary for accessing the external memory using the IOR windowor Hook Procedure before
download (Refer to "Changing the register values necessary for accessing the external memory").
F3001:
Memory has different value.
F3002:
Illegal start address.
F3003:
Illegal end address
F3004:
Illegal start address and end address.
F3005:
Illegal condition.
F3006:
User program is running.
F3007:
Verification error.
F3008:
No condition specified.
F3009:
Parameter size does not align with access size alignment.
F300a:
Specified address does not align with access size alignment.
F300b:
Source address does not align with access size alignment.
F300c:
Destination address does not align with access size alignment.
F300d:
Illegal end address.
F300e:
Different access size in specified area.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
391
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
F300f:
Different access size both in source and destination areas.
F3010:
Different access size in destination area.
F3011:
Different access size, source & destination.
F3013:
Failed in writing DMM.
F3014:
Oveflowed mapping area.
F3015:
Processing was interrupted.
F3016:
This feature is not supported.
F4000:
Can not delete specified event.
1)
The specified event cannot be deleted as it is being used under another condition. Invalidate it for
other usages before deleting.
392
F4001:
Illegal table number.
F4002:
Illegal start address.
F4003:
Illegal end address.
F4004:
Illegal status.
F4005:
Illegal data.
F4006:
Specified event number has been already used.
F4007:
Too many same events are registered.
F4008:
Specified event has not been registered.
F4009:
Illegal data size.
F400a:
Illegal mode.
F400b:
Setting value is inaccurate.
F400c:
Event link conditions cannot be used for section trace conditions.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
F400d:
Too many identical events are registered (>= 32767).
F400e:
Specified event condition does not exist.
F400f:
Illegal event link condition.
F4010:
Function not found.
F4012:
Timer is being disabled.
F4014:
Can not use software break.
F4015:
Can not use event condition specifying address range.
F4016:
Can not change event condition.
F4017:
Can not access word at odd address.
F4019:
This feature is not supported.
F401a:
No Event.
F401b:
Can not use tag-event.
F401d:
Start event and end event of timer are not made to the same setup.
F401e:
Too many trace-events.
F401f:
Path count cannot be set up.
F4020:
Address range cannot be set up in event before execution.
F4021:
Event conditions number overflow.
F4022:
Software DMM conditions number overflow.
F4023:
Real-time call conditions number overflow.
F4024:
Software break call conditions number overflow.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
393
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
F4318:
Illegal memory bank setting.
F5008:
Can not open device file.
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file.
F5009:
Can not open ie703000.ie.
F500a:
Specified device file is illegal version.
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file.
F5308:
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall debugger or simulator.
F5309:
1)
394
Can not open specified database file.
Specified database file is illegal version.
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger or simulator, and the device file.
F6000:
Current function does not exist.
F6001:
Illegal symbol name.
F6002:
Illegal condition.
F6003:
Illegal function name.
F6004:
Overflowed output buffer size.
F6005:
Illegal expression.
F7000:
Illegal mode.
F7001:
User program is running.
F7002:
User program has been stopped.
F7003:
Trace enabled.
F7004:
Trace memory is not set.
F7005:
Function return address does not exist, can not do step execution.
F7801:
End waiting state of step execution was canceled.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
F7802:
End waiting state of step execution was canceled.
F7f00:
Aborted step execution.
F7f02:
Suspended step execution.
F7f04:
Can not execute non-mapped area.
F7f05:
This feature is not supported.
F8000:
Specified file was not found.
F8001:
Illegal line number.
F8002:
Current information is not set.
F8003:
Illegal address.
F8004:
This feature is not supported.
F9002:
Illegal value.
F9005:
This feature is not supported.
Fa001:
Illegal expression.
Fa002:
Start address is bigger than the end address.
Fa003:
Illegal source path.
Fa004:
Too long expression.
Fa006:
Illegal argument.
Fa007:
Illegal program number.
Fa008:
Source path is not set.
Fa009:
File not found.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
395
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Fa00a:
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Fa00d:
Not source file of load module.
Fa00e:
Illegal line number.
Fa00f:
Variable does not exist.
Fa011:
Can not access register.
Fa012:
Can not access memory.
Fa014:
It was going to open the binary file.
Fa015:
Can not get temporary path.
1)
The disk is full. Delete or move unnecessary files and increase the available memory in the disk.
Fa016:
1)
Can not create temporary file.
The disk is full. Delete or move unnecessary files and increase the available memory in the disk.
Fa017:
Can not remove temporary file.
Fa020:
This feature is not supported.
Fa021:
Symbol assigned to register cannot be specified.
Fb000:
Illegal command line.
Fb001:
Program information does not exist in specified load module file.
Fb002:
File not found.
Fb003:
Function not found.
Fb004:
Selected load module different from kind(Chip) was loaded.
Fb005:
Symbol not found.
1)
The address could not be found. Specify a location holding address information.
Fb008:
396
Can not open file.
Illegal expression.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Fb00a:
Illegal symbol in load module file.
Fb00b:
Current program does not exist.
Fb00c:
Current file does not exist.
Fb012:
Too large line number.
Fb01b:
Too long load module file name.
Fb01d:
Address not found.
Fb01f:
Can not find structure member.
Fb020:
Can not find value.
Fb021:
No debug information exists in load module file.
1)
To create a load module with appended debug information, execute build in build mode of Debug
Build.
Fb022:
Illegal line number.
Fb026:
Too many array dimensions (> 4).
Fb027:
Found end of file.
1)
The specified file may be damaged. Recreate the file.
Fb028:
This feature is not supported.
Fb029:
Illegal address.
Fb02b:
Can not stack trace with current PC value.
Fb02c:
Too many blocks for one function.
Fb02d:
Illegal argument.
Fb02e:
The file does not exist in the SOURCE PATH.
1)
On stopping the program, the source that the debugger tried to display could not be found. Check if
the path connects to the source (using "Source Path (source path specification area)" in the
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
397
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Debugger Option dialog box), or check if the source is in the same directory as the out file. Refer to
the Assemble window on which the error message is displayed, and check if the corresponding path
connects.
Fb02f:
Information has been deleted because of optimization.
Fb034:
Return execution from present PC position cannot be performed.
Fb037:
Too Many Line-Numbers Information.
Fb038:
Compiler version mismatch.
1)
Recreate the load module with the latest compiler.
Fb040:
1)
Specified file is not load module.
This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output
from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker.
Fb32e:
Illegal port number.
Fb32f:
Illegal port name.
Fb330:
Illegal port position.
Fb331:
Illegal increment number.
Fb332:
Port for memory bank is not set.
Fb333:
Illegal bank number.
Fb334:
Area for memory bank is not set.
Fc001:
Can not open file.
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Fc005:
Illegal file type.
Fc006:
Kind(Chip) of load module is illegal.
Fc007:
Specified file is not load module.
1)
This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output
from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker.
398
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Fc008:
Specified load module file (ELF) is old version.
Fc00a:
No mapped address was accessed.
Fc00b:
Load module is not loaded.
Fc00c:
Illegal argument.
Fc00d:
User program is running.
Fc00e:
User program is being traced.
Fc00f:
Interrupted.
Fc011:
Illegal load module file format.
Fc012:
Check sum error.
Fc013:
Too wide address range to upload (> 1M byte).
Fc014:
Failed in writing file.
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Fc015:
Illegal program number.
Fc016:
Load information is full.
Fc018:
Specified file is not load module.
1)
This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output
from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker.
Fc019:
Failed in writing memory.
Fc01b:
Programmable-IOR address not specified.
1)
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall debugger or simulator.
Fc100:
This feature is not supported.
Fd004:
Can not find Dynamic Link Library.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
399
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Fe000:
Illegal argument.
Fe001:
Illegal start address.
Fe002:
Illegal end address.
Fe003:
Too large size.
Fe004:
Can not open file.
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Fe005:
1)
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Fe006:
Reading of file went wrong.
Fe007:
Failed in writing file.
1)
400
Failed in reading file.
The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
Fe009:
Illegal file format.
Fe00a:
Verification error.
Fe010:
This feature is not supported.
Ff001:
[XXX] not found.
Ff004:
Missing parameter.
Ff005:
Illegal function name.
Ff006:
Illegal number.
Ff007:
Start address is bigger than end address.
Ff008:
Illegal symbol or expression.
Ff009:
[XXX] This file is illegal type.
Ff100:
Disk cannot write or full.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Ff101:
File not found.
Ff102:
File not Create.
Ff103:
Old project file version.I
Ff104:
Illegal project file format.
Ff105:
This file is a project file for [XXX].Please select a correct file.
Ff201:
Memory mapping error.
Ff202:
Verify error.
1)
External memory could not be accessed, as it is not set. Change the register values necessary for
accessing the external memory using the IOR window or Hook Procedure before download (Refer to
"Changing the register values necessary for accessing the external memory").
Ff301:
The symbol being used on the event condition can't be evaluated.
Ff306:
This name is too long.
Ff307:
There is the same name in other kinds.
Ff308:
An address can't be omitted.
Ff309:
Illegal address mask.
Ff30a:
Illegal data mask.
Ff30b:
Illegal ext probe mask.
Ff30c:
Illegal ext probe data.
Ff30d:
Illegal pass count.
Ff30e:
Illegal register name.
Ff310:
Illegal delay count.
Ff312:
[XXX] is already there.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
401
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Ff313:
Event number already exist.
Ff314:
Event name is not set.
Ff315:
[XXX] is already there.
Ff316:
Max number of enabled [XXX] event is over. Please disable other enabled [YYY] event.
Ff317:
Max number of set event is over.
Ff31e:
Illegal start address.
Ff31f:
Illegal end address.
Ff350:
There is a phase which event are not in the middle.
Ff351:
The same event is contained in Link and Disable.
Ff352:
An event isn't specified.
Ff400:
Coverage mapping error.
Ff500:
Illegal symbol.
Ff501:
Illegal value.
Ff502:
Illegal parameter.
Ff503:
Max number of symbol is over.
Ff504:
This variable cannot be set as a break.
1)
Break cannot be set for the following variables.
• Local variables, static variables
• Array variables, member variables of structures/unions
• Register/peripheral IOR
• Variable expressions
402
Ff802:
All events are deleted. because the use of external probe was changed.
Ff803:
This event address is invalid on current configuration.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Ff804:
Invalid PC value.
Ff805:
Cannot set temporary break on this address.
Ff806:
External data is being used by Debugger.
Ff900:
Illegal I/O port name.
Ff901:
Memory mapping error.
1)
The specification of the address is illegal. The addresses that can be specified are in either the
Target area or IOR area. Check in "Address: (I/O port address specification area)" in theAdd I/O
Port dialog box.
Ff902:
Illegal access size.
Ff903:
Illegal access type.
Ff904:
There is the same name.
Ffa00:
The [XXX] function of current program on PC position not found.
1)
The symbol specified in main() label: in "Startup Routine (start-up symbol setting area)" in the
Debugger Option dialog box could be found. Set a symbol of the main routine of the program.
Default is _main.
Ffa01:
1)
The line information on PC position not found.
The source file corresponding to program counter (PC) value when the program was stopped could
not be found. The following reasons are possible.
1
The source file exists in a location that the source path does not connect to.
2
The program stopped where the source files, such as library or RX, do not exist.
3
The program looped, jumped to an address that is not used by the program, and stopped there.
Ffc00:
Help window cannot be started. Please install HTML Help environment with reference to a
users manual.
Fffff:
C. 1. 4
Interrupted.
Warning message or question message
A list of the messages that are output when warnings or questions are detected while the debugger is
executing processing is shown below in numerical order.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
403
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
W03a0:
Target is not turned on.
W1014:
Data is not exist.
W2005:
I/O register of Read Protect attribute was specified.
W200d:
No initialize data for SFR.
W4013:
Access size is different from its mapped bus size.
W401c:
Software break can not be set on this area.
W500b:
Specified device file does not relocate IRAM.
W7010:
No source information exists.
W7011:
Unknown result of step execution.
Wb01e:
No debug information (not compiled in Debug Build mode).
Wb036:
Out of variable region.
Wb042:
Symbol module is not initialized.
Wb335:
Too long symbol name.
Wc017:
Symbol information is duplicated, please reset symbols.
Wc01a:
No mapped address was accessed.
Wc01c:
Programmable IOR address mismatch.
1)
404
Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger or simulator.
Wc01d:
Selected load module different from kind(Chip) was loaded.
Wf002:
Not found [XXX]. Search from the beginning?
Wf003:
Already exceed search region.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
Wf106:
CPU in the Project File was Changed. You must exit the debugger for the new CPU. Do you
exit the Debugger?
Wf107:
CPU in the Project File was Changed. Do you start the Debugger with this CPU?
Wf108:
Selected project file different [YYY] from chip [XXX] was opened. Does it open, although the
chip cannot be changed?
Wf109:
Project Manager cannot be used with the debugger of this version. Please use PMplus.
Wf200:
No differences encountered.
Wf203:
When a program is running, while rewriting a memory, program execution stops for a moment.
Do you wish to rewrite a memory?
Wf300:
Would you like to save the changes made in [XXX]?
Wf302:
Delete: [XXX]
Wf303:
[XXX] is edited. Delete: [YYY]?
Wf304:
[XXX] is edited. Save: [YYY]?
Wf305:
[XXX] is already exist. Do you replace it?
Wf311:
Only one [XXX] can be enabled. Do you make this [YYY] to enable?
Wf325:
User program is running. Do you want to stop user program for a moment and set it?
Wf326:
User program is running. Do you want to stop user program for a moment and delete it?
Wf401:
Clear coverage?
Wf600:
Save project file?
Wf601:
When connecting the target system, please turn on the target system.
1)
When a target is not connected, simply click the <OK> button.
Wf602:
Please change a MODE mask condition or connect the target system.
Wf700:
Do you want to download Load Module File?
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
405
APPENDIX C MESSAGES
406
Wf905:
[XXX] is already exist. Do you replace it?
Wf906:
Would you like to register the change made in [XXX]?
Wfb00:
User program is running. Do you want to stop user program?
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST
APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST
Debugging can be efficiently executed by using special function keys.
Note that, in the following explanation, ordinary key representation (generic key representation) is used
because the key representation differs depending on the type of keyboard.
Table D-1 through Table D-8 list the functions of the respective keys.
D. 1
Function List of Special Function Keys
Table D-1 Function List of Special Function Keys
Key
Function
BackSpace
Deletes one character before the cursor and moves the cursor to the position of
the deleted character.
At this time, the character string following the cursor moves forward.
Delete
Deletes one character after the cursor and move the character string following the
cursor forward.
Deletes a various event condition selected in the Event Manager or each event
dialog box.
Deletes the data selected in the Watch window.
Insert
Alternately selects the insert mode and overwrite mode in the Source window and
Assemble window. However, this key is invalid in the Memory, Register, and IOR
windows, and only the overwrite mode can be used as an input mode.
PrintScreen
Loads the entire display screen to the clipboard as a bitmap image (function of
Windows).
Esc
Closes the pull-down menu.
Closes the modal dialog box.
Restores the input data.
Alt
Moves the cursor to the menu bar.
End
Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
Home
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
PageUp
Scrolls the screen one screen up. The cursor also moves up to the top of the
screen.
PageDown
Scrolls the screen one screen down. The cursor also moves up to the top of the
screen.
Space
Inserts one blank character.
Tab
Moves the cursor to the next item.
Up arrow key
Moves the cursor up.
If the cursor is at the bottom of the screen, scrolls the screen up one line at a time.
Down arrow key
Moves the cursor down.
If the cursor is at the top of the screen, scrolls the screen down one line at a time.
Right arrow key
Moves the cursor to the left.
If the cursor is at the leftmost position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column
to the right.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
407
APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST
Table D-1 Function List of Special Function Keys
Key
D. 2
Function
Left arrow key
Moves the cursor to the right.
If the cursor is at the rightmost position on the screen, scrolls the screen one
column to the left.
Enter
Sets the input data.
Presses the default push button.
Function List of Function Keys
Table D-2 Function List of Function Keys
Key
D. 3
Function
F1
Opens the Help window.
F2
Forcibly stops program execution.
Same function as [Run] -> [Stop] on the menu bar.
F3
Resets the emulation CPU.
Same function as [Run] -> [CPU Reset] on the menu bar.
F4
Resets the emulation CPU and executes the program.
Same function as [Run] -> [Restart] on the menu bar.
F5
Executes the program.
Same function as [Run] -> [Go] on the menu bar.
F6
Executes the program to the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window.
Same function as [Run] -> [Come Here] on the menu bar
F7
The user program is real-time executed until execution returns.
Same function as [Run] -> [Return Out] on the menu bar
F8
Step execution.
Same function as [Run] -> [Step In] on the menu bar.
F9
Sets a breakpoint at cursor position in Source or Assemble window.
Same function as [Run] -> [Break Point] on the menu bar.
F10
Next step execution.
Same function as [Run] -> [Next Over] on the menu bar.
F11
Sets or deletes a software breakpoint.
Same function as [Run] -> [Software Break Point] on the menu bar.
Function List of Special Function Keys (Shift + key)
Table D-3 Function List of Special Function Keys (Shift + key)
Key
408
Function
End
Expands the selection range to the end of the line.
Home
Expands the selection range to the beginning of the line.
Left arrow key
Expands the selection range one character to the left.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST
Table D-3 Function List of Special Function Keys (Shift + key)
Key
Right arrow key
D. 4
Function
Expands the selection range one character to the right.
Function List of Function Keys (Shift + key)
Table D-4 Function List of Function Keys (Shift + key)
Key
D. 5
Function
F6
Executes the program from the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window.
Same function as [Run] -> [Start From Here] on the menu bar.
F9
Resets the emulation CPU.
Same function as [Run] -> [CPU Reset] on the menu bar.
List of Special Function Keys (Ctrl + key)
Table D-5 List of Special Function Keys (Ctrl + key)
Key
D. 6
Function
End
Displays the last line.
The cursor will also move to the last line.
Home
Displays the first line.
The cursor will also move to the first line.
Left arrow key
Moves the cursor one word to the left.
If the cursor at the leftmost position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column
to the right.
Right arrow key
Moves the cursor one word to the right.
If the cursor at the rightmost position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column
to the left.
Function List of Function Keys (Ctrl + key)
Table D-6 Function List of Function Keys (Ctrl + key)
Key
Function
F5
Ignores break points being set, and executes the program.
Same function as [Run] -> [Ignore break points and Go] on the menu bar.
F9
Sets the address at the cursor position in the Source window or Assemble window
to the PC.
Same function as [Run] -> [Change PC] on the menu bar.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
409
APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST
D. 7
Function List of Control Keys (Ctrl + key)
Table D-7 Function List of Control Keys (Ctrl + key)
Key
410
Function
A
Selects all the events registered to the Event Manager.
Same function as [View] -> [Select All Event] on the menu bar in the Event Manager.
C
Copies a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer.
D
Disassembles and displays the results from the jump destination address specified by
the data value selected in the current window.Opens the Assemble window.
Same function as [Jump] -> [Assemble] on the menu bar.
E
Opens the source file displayed in the active Source window with the editor specified
by the PM plus when the PM plus is running.
Same function as [Edit] -> [Edit Source] on the menu bar.
G
Performs a search.Opens the search dialog box corresponding to the current window.
Same function as [View] -> [Search...] on the menu bar.
I
Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by the data
value selected in the current window.Opens the Coverage window.
Same function as [Jump] -> [Coverage] on the menu bar.
J
Moves the display position. Opens the Source Move, Address Move, or Trace Move
dialog box, depending on the current window.
Same function as [View] -> [Move...] on the menu bar.
M
Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by the data
value selected in the current window. Opens the Memory window.
Same function as [Jump] -> [Memory...] on the menu bar.
O
Loads a view file, source file, or text file.
Opens the View File Load dialog box. The operation will differ depending on the
extension of the file.
view file: Displays the file in the corresponding window.
Others: Displays the file in the Source window.
Same function as [File] -> [Open...] on the menu bar.
S
Saves the data displayed in the current window to the view file.
Same function as [View] -> [Save...] on the menu bar.
U
Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value selected
in the current window as the jump destination address. Opens the Source window.
Same function as [Jump] -> [Source Text] on the menu bar.
V
Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the text cursor position.
W
Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data.
Opens the Quick Watch dialog box.
Same function as [View] -> [Quick Watch...] on the menu bar.
X
Cuts a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer.
Same function as [Edit] -> [Cut...] on the menu bar.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST
D. 8
List of Special Function Keys (Ctrl + Shift + key)
Table D-8 List of Special Function Keys (Ctrl + Shift + key)
Key
Function
Left arrow key
Expands the selection range one word to the left.
Right arrow key
Expands the selection range one word to the right.
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
411
APPENDIX E INDEX
APPENDIX E INDEX
Debugger Option dialog box … 95
Debugging environment … 35
Delay count … 318
Delay trigger … 295
Delay trigger trace … 42
Delimiter … 378
Device file … 19
Disable condition … 285
Display color of breakpoint … 142
Display files … 45
Displaying Event Details … 265
DMA trace … 232
download … 327, 343
Download dialog box … 117
Drag & drop function … 150, 151
dummy DMM function … 169
A
About dialog box … 322
Active status … 50
Add I/O Port dialog box … 221
Add Watch dialog box … 194
address … 327, 335
Address Move dialog box … 128
All trace … 41
ASCII display … 167
assemble … 327, 336
Assemble Search dialog box … 162
Assemble window … 156
Auto Load … 109
Auto load … 32, 98
Auto save … 98, 107
B
Balloon watch function … 44, 144, 188
batch … 327, 337
Break condition … 93
Break dialog box … 288
Break function … 39
breakpoint … 327, 338
Breakpoint for read/write access … 188
Breakpoint setting/deletion function … 141
Browse dialog box … 126
Build mode … 30
C
cache … 327, 340
Callback procedure … 330
Change Watch dialog box … 198
Character set … 373
Color of character on event mark … 263
Come function … 36, 39, 148
Command … 17, 326
Command line … 327
Command list … 327
Command reference … 327
Compulsion read … 213, 215
conditional trace … 41
Configuration dialog box … 27, 78
Console window … 326
Contents Saved to Project File … 105
Coverage measurement function … 42
Coverage Search dialog box … 249
Coverage window … 244
Coverage-Address dialog box … 254
Coverage-Clear dialog box … 252
Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box … 256
Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box … 259
Current window … 378
D
Data display format … 186
dbgexit … 327, 342
412
E
emulation ROM … 35
Error message … 380
Error/warning message … 380
Event after execution … 150
Event condition … 38
Event dialog box … 273
Event display mark … 143
Event function … 37
Event link condition … 38
Event Link dialog box … 282
Event Manager … 261
Exit Debugger dialog box … 324
Expressions … 375
Extended Option dialog box … 90
extwin … 327, 344
F
Fail-safe break … 40
Fatal error message … 380
File … 378
finish … 327, 345
Flow of debugging operations … 48
Font … 98
Font dialog box … 103
Format of file that can be downloaded … 117
Format of specifiable file … 121
Full break … 42
Full stop … 42
Function … 379
G
-g option … 19
go … 327, 346
H
hardware break … 299, 306
help … 328, 347
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
APPENDIX E INDEX
hook … 328, 348
Hook procedure … 331
Host machine … 18
Warning message or question message
… 380, 403
Mixed display … 146, 228
mnemonic … 228
module … 328, 356
I
I/O Port … 213, 221
I/O protect … 35
ie … 328, 349
Illegal access break … 40
In-circuit emulator … 18
in-circuit emulator … 18
Information files … 46
initialized … 320
Input conventions … 373
Installing … 20
Internal RAM … 34
IOR Select dialog box … 218
IOR window … 213
N
next … 328, 357
Non map break … 40
Non-mapped area … 249
Non-real-time execution function … 36
Non-stop … 42
Normal mode … 274, 283
O
Offset setting … 119
Online assembly … 156
Operating environment … 18
Operating system … 19
Operators … 375
J
JMP [r31] … 43
jump … 328, 350
Jump address … 307
Jump function … 51, 148
P
Pass count … 285
Pick up … 243
Pickup display … 231
PM plus … 30
Point mark area … 141, 157
Product ID … 22
Program … 378
Program code … 143, 144
Program counter setting … 148
Program execution function … 35
Program register … 209
Programmable IOR … 43
Project file … 35, 98, 324
Project File Load dialog box … 108
Project File Save dialog box … 105
K
Kanji code … 99
Key function list … 407
L
Linking window … 52
Load module list dialog box … 124
Load/save function … 45
Local Variable window, … 201
M
Main window … 27, 57
map … 328, 351
mapping function … 34
Mapping unit … 86
Marks of Event Icon … 263
mask … 84, 237, 278
Mask value … 279
Maximum number of valid events … 261
mdi … 328, 353
memory … 328, 354
Memory Compare dialog box … 177
Memory Compare Result dialog box … 179
Memory Copy dialog box … 175
Memory Fill dialog box … 173
Memory manipulation function … 44
Memory Search dialog box … 170
Memory window … 165
Menu bar … 60
Messages … 380
Display format … 380, 406
Fatal error message … 380
Syntax error message … 380, 386
Q
Qualify trace … 42, 296
Quick Watch dialog box … 190
R
RAM sampling function … 46
Range of radixes … 377
Real-time execution … 36
real-time internal RAM sampling function … 46
refresh … 328, 358
register … 328, 359
Register manipulation function … 44
Register Select dialog box … 211
Register window … 208
Registering debugger … 30
reset … 328, 360
Reset Debugger dialog box … 320
Right-click menu … 56
run … 328, 361
Run-Break event … 44, 310
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
413
APPENDIX E INDEX
S
Section trace … 42, 295
Select mode … 274, 280, 283, 286
Selecting debugger … 30
Setting event condition in each area … 285
Setting files … 46
Show offset … 100
Snap data … 301
Snap Shot dialog box … 299
Snapshot function … 43
software break … 40
Software Break Manager … 270
Source Move dialog box … 130
Source Path … 96
Source Search dialog box … 153
Source window … 139
Specification of scope … 195
Specifying Symbols … 137
Stack frame … 205, 379
Start function … 36, 148
Start-up symbol … 100
Static status … 50
Status bar … 75
step … 328, 362
stop … 328, 363
Structure … 379
Stub dialog box … 306
Stub function … 43
Symbol To Address dialog box … 136
Symbols … 374
Syntax error message … 380, 386
System register … 209
V
Verify check … 93
version … 328, 365
View file … 45
View File Load dialog box … 114
View File Save dialog box … 110
W
Warning message … 380
Warning message or question message
… 380, 403
watch … 328, 366
Watch function … 44, 149
Watch symbol setting … 101
Watch window … 183
where … 328, 367
Window lists … 53
Window reference … 53
wish … 328, 368
Write-protect break … 40
X
xcoverage … 328, 369
xtime … 329, 370
xtrace … 329, 371
T
Tab size … 99
target … 34
Terminology … 378
Time measurement function … 44
Time tag … 91, 226
Timer event … 44
Timer Result dialog box … 316
Toolbar … 57
Trace condition … 41
Tracer control mode … 231
Trace Data Select dialog box … 241
Trace dialog box … 293
Trace function … 40
Trace memory … 41
Trace Move dialog box … 133
Trace Search dialog box … 233
Trace window … 224
Tracer control mode … 42
U
Unconditional trace … 41
Uninstalling … 25
upload … 328, 364
Upload dialog box … 121
414
User’s Manual U16217EJ1V0UM
Facsimile Message
From:
Name
Company
Tel.
Although NEC has taken all possible steps
to ensure that the documentation supplied
to our customers is complete, bug free
and up-to-date, we readily accept that
errors may occur. Despite all the care and
precautions we’ve taken, you may
encounter problems in the documentation.
Please complete this form whenever
you’d like to report errors or suggest
improvements to us.
FAX
Address
Thank you for your kind support.
North America
Hong Kong, Philippines, Oceania
NEC Electronics Inc.
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
Corporate Communications Dept. Fax: +852-2886-9022/9044
Fax: +1-800-729-9288
+1-408-588-6130
Korea
Europe
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH
Seoul Branch
Technical Documentation Dept.
Fax: +82-2-528-4411
Fax: +49-211-6503-274
South America
NEC do Brasil S.A.
Fax: +55-11-6462-6829
Asian Nations except Philippines
NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Fax: +65-250-3583
Japan
NEC Semiconductor Technical Hotline
Fax: +81- 44-435-9608
Taiwan
NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.
Fax: +886-2-2719-5951
I would like to report the following error/make the following suggestion:
Document title:
Document number:
Page number:
If possible, please fax the referenced page or drawing.
Document Rating
Excellent
Good
Acceptable
Poor
Clarity
Technical Accuracy
Organization
CS 01.2